/ liJ

PROSPECTUS

OP THE

THEOLOGICAL CRITIC,

A QUARTERLY JOURNAL,

EDITED BY THE REV.

THOMAS KERCHEVER ARNOLD, M.A.

RECTOR OF LYNDON, AND LATE FELLOW OF TRINITY COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE.

The principal object 1 have in view in editing this Journal is the furtherance of Biblical Criticism : — a most important branch of Theological Literature, which has been of late years all but entirely neglected in England.

The Journal will embrace Theology in the widest acceptation of the term, as comprehending the Criticism of the Sacred Text, Ecclesij Religio; History Discipli senting ^ Moralit a from its Ijl

•^(?<^^>9 3<^^>9S<^^« »<^^«©^!^«®^?^« ♦

9d

lie

<'*'>>iit;;

will no © Work i % that primar the coi ^P unity o--^'^ pages

I Theolog; for refu|\ criticisn\/

!01 ^

;es. ^^

[n u^^

PRINCETON. N. J.

Part of the ADDISON ALEXANDER LIBRARY,

which was presented by Messrs. R. L. and A. Stuabt.

of

id, re le

d, of in

le

Case,

S1uJf\

Booh',

— '-- ^^Tv' in m Its

Diyiaion.. P^-^ .-|j-

f sound

Christian- e,^^Q£<s^^e£.<;

,,,«,^les of

^G£<^^^o e<$^i>w£s^^ja.^onsible Editor of the Work, I give a pledge that I shall not willingly and intentionally allow any article or statement to appear in its pages in violation of Christian charity, candour, or courtesy.

T. K. A.

In 8vo. Price As.

RIVINGTONS, ST. PAUL's CHURCH YARD, AND WATERLOO PLACE.

;.

w/^/< i Lzt^CCi^iyL^ ^-^i^^{X^t<^;U^

aA

^^L-x. CjL L/^i^

^i^c:

/

^// //-tX

THE

FIRST HEBREW BOOK.

BY THE REV.

THOMAS KEECHEYEE AENOLD, M.A.

RECTOR OF LYNDON, AND LATE FELLOW OF TRINITY COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE.

LONDON:

FRANCIS & JOHN RIVINGTON,

ST. Paul's church yard, and Waterloo place.

1851.

LONDON : GILBERT AND RIVINGTON, PRINTERS,

ST. John's square.

PREFACE.

The plan of the following Work is the same as that which I have pursued in my other '^ First Books/' I have principally followed Gesenius ; and the later chapters of the Work, especially those which treat of the ^Irregular' or 'Weak' conjugations, are an abridged translation of that author's Grammar. These portions contain more information than will be at first necessary for the pupil; indeed, it will not be absolutely necessary that he should do more than commit to memory the * Short Paradigm ' pre- fixed to each chapter, and the accompanying Table of ' Normal Forms/ before he proceeds to translate the Exercise, with which the chapter concludes. When he meets with any variation from the forms he has committed to memory, he must refer to the fuller account of the conjugation that follows the Paradigm.

Through a considerable portion of the Work the Hebrew Exercises are printed both in Hebrew and English characters; for I am convinced that the

a2

IV PREFACE.

difficulty of learning to read with correctness and fluency the first oriental language that a person attacks, is very far greater than the editors of our elementary Hebrew works would appear to suppose. Wishing, therefore, to tempt many persons to teach themselves the language in which the Scriptures of the Old Testament were composed, I have felt it necessary to smooth the path to the accomplishment of the first and most irksome portion of the labour.

T. K. A.

Lyndon, May 5, 1851.

LIST OF CONTRACTIONS.

G. = Gesenius. E. = Ewald. L. = Lee.

ERRATA.

Page 23, ']6a,for English read Hebrew.

— 35, 103, /or affirmatives read afforraatives.

105, last line, for prefixes read suffixes.

— 107. In 308, /or to be pure, for n2|7 kanah, read rr;?: nakali.

— 1 84, 6 9, for treasures read treasuries.

CONTENTS.

PAGE

Introduction . . , vii

CHAP.

I. Reading and Orthography 2

§ 1. The Letters ib.

2. Division of the Consonants .... 3

3. Long Vowels. Quiescent Letters. Syllables . 5

4. Begadchephath Letters. Dagesh, Short Vowels 8

13 14

16 17

5. Sh'va

6. The Semi-vowels

7. On Syllables

8. On distinguishing Kamets Khatuph from Karaets and Long Khirek fi'om Short Khirek

9. Further Remai'ks on the Vowels. Diphthongs 10, On Verbal Roots, and on the Derivation of Nouns 20

11. On the Derivation of Nouns

12. The Accents

II. § 1. The definite Article

2. The Perfect and Imperfect of Kal

III. §1. Gender of Substantives. Adjectives

2. Formation of the Plural ....

3. Participles of Kal with their feminine and plural

forms .......

4. The Dual Number

5. The Construct State (Status constructus) .

IV. § 1. Suffixes denoting Possession

2. Prepositions denoting the Relations of Case

3. Other prepositional Prefixes. Vav

24

27

33 34

38 41

46 48 60

53 60 65

Modes of expressing the Comparative and Superlative . 67 A3

VI

CONTENTS.

CHAP.

VI.

VII.

PAGE

§ 1. Numerals. 1. The ten first Cardinal Numbers . 69 2. The Cardinals continued. Ordinals .

The Pronouns

§ 1. Personal Pronouns ....

2. Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronouns

monstrative Pronouns

3. Relative Pi'onoun ....

VIIT. The Regular Verb

Derivation of Verbs. The Conjugations On the ground-form (or Conjugation) Kal

Niphal

Piel and (its passive) Pual Hiphil and (its passive) Hophal Hithpael ......

IX. Verbs with Gutturals .

§ 1. Verbs with Pe guttural

2. Verbs Ayin Guttural .

3. Verbs Lamed Guttural

X. Use of the Accents as Stops .

XL

§1. 2.

3. 4. 5.

quies

Verbs Double Ayin ....

Verbs Pe Nun

Verbs Pe Aleph. Feeble Verbs (Verba

centia) ......

Verbs Pe Yod. First Class, or Verbs originally

Pe Vav

Verbs Pe Yod (continued). Second Class, or

Verbs properly Pe Yod .

6. Verbs Ayin Vav ....

7. Verbs Ayin Yod ....

8. Verbs Lamed Aleph ....

9. Verbs Lamed He ....

XII. Suffixes of the Verb

Differences of Idiom, &c

Index I. Hebrew and English II. English and Hebrew

Appendix A. Table of Declensions

„ B. Table of Irregular Nouns

„ C. Shorter Paradigms of the Regular Verb

„ D. General Paradigms of the Regular Verb

„ E. Paradigms of the Irregular Verbs

De

INTRODUCTION.

(A bridged from Gesenius, )

§ 1. Of the Semitic Languages in general.

The Hebrew tongue is one member of a large family of languages, which was native in Palestine, Phoenicia, Syria, Mesopotamia, Babylonia, and Arabia. This family spread itself in early antiquity from Arabia over .'Ethiopia, and by means of Phoenician colonies, over many islands and shores of the Mediterranean, but especially over the whole Carthaginian coast.

For want of a name, sanctioned by long usage, for the nations and languages united in this family, the term Shemites, Semitic languages (most of the nations using these tongues being descended from Shem) is generally received at present.

The Semitic languages may be divided into three principal divisions : a) The Arabic, to which the jEthiopic belongs as a branch of the southern Arabic (Himyaritic). b) The Aramcean in the north and north-east. It is called Syriac, as it appears in the Christian Aramaean literature, but Chaldee, as it exists in the Aramaean writings of Jews. To this division belong some later portions of the Old Tes- tament, viz., Ezra iv. 8 — vi. 18 and vii. 12 — 26; Dan. ii. 4 — vii. 28. To the Chaldee is closely allied the Samaritan, both exhibiting a frequent admixture

via INTRODUCTIOX.

of Hebrew forms. The Aramaean of the Natsorceans (John's disciples, Sabii *) is a very degenerate dialect, but the vernacular Syriac of the present day is still more corrupt, c) The Hebrew, with which the Ca- naanitish and Phoenician (Punic) stands in close con- nexion.

These languages are now either wholly extinct, as the Phoenician, or exist only in a degenerate form, as the Aramaean among the Syrian Christians in Mesopotamia and Kurdistan, the ^thiopic in the newer Abyssinian dialects (Tigre, Amharic), and also the Hebrew among a portion of the Jews (although these in their writings especially study the repro- duction of the Old Testament language). The Arabic is the only one that has not only kept to this day its original abode, Arabia Proper, but also spread itself on all sides into the districts of other tongues.

The Semitic family of languages was bordered on the east and north by another still more widely ex- tended, which spread itself under most diverse forms, from India to the west of Europe, and which is called the Indo- Germanic, as embracing the Indian (Sanskrit), ancient and modern Persian, Greek, Latin, Slavic, and Gothic, together with the other German languages. In very early times, the Semitic came into contact, in various ways, with the ancient Egyptian, from which the Coptic is derived. Both have ac- cordingly much in common, but the relation between them is not yet accurately defined. The Chinese, the Japanese, the Tartar, and other languages have a fundamentally different character.

The grammatical structure of the Semitic languages has many peculiarities, which, taken together, con- stitute its special character, although many of them are found by themselves in other tongues. These peculiarities are : a) Among the consonants (which always form the body of these languages) are many

♦ So called from )^y^ as being ^aTrTiaral.

INTRODUCTION. IX

gutturals of several grades ; the vowels, having their origin in the three primary sounds {a, i, u), subserve more subordinate distinctions, b) Most of the ra- dical words consist of t/u^ee consonants, c) The verb has only tvjo tenses, but great regularity and analogy prevail in the formation of verbals, d) The noun has only two genders and a more simple indication of case, e) In the pronoun all oblique cases are in- dicated by appended forms [sufficed), f) Scarcely any compounds appear in verbs or nouns (except proper names), g) In the syntax is found a simple combination of sentences, without much artificial subordination of members.

As to the words themselves, the Semitic tongues vary essentially from the Indo- Germanic ; yet they appear to have more in common here than in the grammar. A great number of stems and roots re- semble in sound those of the Indo-Germanic class. But if we exclude terms that were obviously borrowed, we shall reduce the actual similarity, partly to words which imitate sounds [onomatopoeticci), and partly to those in which the same or similar sense follows from the nature of the same sound, according to a universal law of human speech. Neither of which can establish a historical affinity, which cannot be proved without agreement also in grammatical structure.

The Semitic writing had from the beginning this striking imperfection, that only the consonants (on which the meaning of the word always depends) were given in the line as real letters. Of the vowels only the longer ones, and even these not always, were represented by certain consonants used as vowel-letters.- It was not till a later period, that all the vowels were indicated by means of small signs attached to the letters (points or strokes above and below the line), but which were wholly omitted for more practised readers. These languages are written always from right to left. The ^thiopic is the only exception, but its deviation from the Semitic usage

X INTRODUCTION.

was probably introduced by the first missionaries who introduced Christianity into that country. How- ever dissimilar the Semitic written characters may now appear, they have undoubtedly all come, by various modifications, from one and the same original alphabet (of which the truest copy now extant is the Phoenician), from which also the ancient Greek, and through it all other European, characters were de- rived.

In regard to the relative age of these languages, the oldest written works are found in Hebrew ; the Aramman begins about the time of Cyrus (in the book of Ezra) ; the Arabic not till the earliest cen- turies after Christ (Himyaritic inscriptions) ; the ^thiopic version of the Bible in the fourth century; and the northern Arabic literature since the sixth century. But the Arabic was the longest to maintain the natural fulness of its form, being preserved quiet and undisturbed among the secluded tribes of the desert, till the Mahomedan revolutions, when it suf- fered considerable decay.

§ 2. History of the Hebrew as a Living Language.

This language was the mother tongue of the He- brew or Israelitish people, during the period of their independence. The name, Hebreiv language^, does not occur in the Old Testament, and appears rather to have been the name in use among those who were not Israelites. It is called by Isaiah language of Canaan (from the country in which it was spoken). In 2 Kings xviii. 26 (comp. Is. xxxvi. 11, 13), Neh. xiii. 24, and elsewhere, persons are said to speak Jnn^n^ {Judaice), in the Jews^ language, in accordance

with the later usage which arose after the removal of

* Jin^ll^ li^'?, yXwo-cra rwv 'EjSpat'wj/, e(3pdi(JTi.

INTRODUCTION. XI

the ten tribes, when the name Jew was extended to the whole nation.

In the writings of the New Testament, the term Hebrew (tf^pdicrri, ifdpaig ^idXeKTog) was also applied to what was then the vernacular language of Palestine, in distinction from the Greek.

In the oldest written monuments of this language, contained in the Pentateuch, we find it in nearly the same form in which it appears down to the Baby- lonish exile, and even later; and we have no his- torical documents of an earlier date, by which we can investigate its origin and formation.

The remains of this language, which are extant in the Old Testament, enable us to distinguish but two periods in its history. The first, which may be called its golden age, extends to the close of the Babylonian exile, at which epoch the second, or silver age, com- mences.

Although the different writers and books have certainly their peculiarities, yet we discover in them no such diversities of style, as will materially aid us in tracing the history of the language during this period. But the language of poetry is every where distinguished from prose, not only by a rhythm con- sisting in measured parallel members, but also by peculiar words, forms, and significations of words, and constructions in syntax ; although this distinction is not so strongly marked as it is, for example, in Greek. Of these poetical idioms, however, the greater part occur in the kindred languages, es- pecially the iVramaean, as the common forms of ex- pression, and are, probably, to be historically regarded partly as archaisms^ which were retained in poetry, and partly as enrichments, which the poets who knew Aramaean transferred into the Hebrew. The prophets, moreover, in respect to language and rhythm, are to be regarded generally as poets, except that in their poetical discourses the sentences run on to greater length, and the parallelism is less

XU INTRODUCTION.

measured and regular, than in the writings of those who are properly styled poets. The writings of the later prophets exhibit less and less of this poetic cha- racter, until their style scarcely differs from prose.

The second or silver age of the Hebrew language and literature, extending from the return of the Jews from the exile to the time of the Maccabees, about 160 years before Christ, is chiefly distinguished by an approximation to the Aramaean or Chaldee dialect. To the use of this dialect, so nearly related to the Hebrew, the Jews easily accustomed themselves while in Babylonia ; and after their return it became the popular language, exerting a constantly increasing influence on the ancient Hebrew as the language of books, in prose as well as poetry, and at last banish- ing it from the mouth of the people. Yet the Hebrew continued to be known and written by learned Jews.

The writings of the Old Testament, which belong to this second period^ and in all of which this Chaldee colouring appears, though in different degrees, are the following, viz.^ 1 and 2 Chronicles, Ezra, Ne- hemiah, Esther, Haggai *, Zechariah, Malachi, Daniel ; of the poetical writings, Ecclesiastes, and the later Psalms. These books are also, as literary works, decidedly inferior to those of an earlier date ; though this period is not wanting in compositions, which, in purity of language and poetic merit, scarcely yield to the productions of the golden age : e. g. several of the later Psalms (cxx. &c., cxxxvii., cxxxix.).

* Gesenius (who has been sufficiently answered by Hdvernick) includes the prophet Jonah.

FIRST HEBREW BOOK.

B

Chap. T. Reading and Orthography, § 1. The Letters,

1. The Hebrew Alphabet consists of twenty-four

consonants.

Nume- rical value.

Original signification of

the names (according

to Gesenius).

Ox

House

Camel

Door

Window

Hook

Weapon

Fence

Snake

Hand

The hand bent

Ox-goad

Water

Fish

Prop

Eye

Mouth

Fish-hook

Back of the head

Head

Tooth

Cross

a) Observe that Shin and Sin are distinguished by the posi- tion of the distinctive point above them.

b) To distinguish Samech from Sin, in Roman characters, it will be represented by an Italic s amongst Roman letters, and by a Roman s amongst Italics : so Teth will be t in Romans, t in Italics.

D«.-		Sounded	Repre-	Hebrew
toriu.	as	sented by	name.
il as 1st	K	A'leph	(mostly omitted)	^k
of -d)	n	Beth	b (bh)	m
	:i	Gl'mel	gfeli)	'PDS
	n	Daleth	d (dh)	•«• T
	n	He	h	^•7
	1	Vdv	V	11 T
	T	Zayin	z	l"!
	n	Kheth	kh	m
	D	Teth	t	JT'Z?
	i	Yod	y	TV
	D	Caph	c (ch)	c]5
	h	Lamed	1	^ii
	D	Mem	m	DD
	3	Nun	n	p'ii
	D	Samech	s	"^??
	V	A'yin	V	l'^
	£)	Pe	P(ph)	^3
	V	Tsdde'	ts	'1?
	P	Koph	.k	cjip
	n	Resh	r	^^1.
	tl}]	Shin ^	sh 1	V^]
	b]	Sin j	s 1	]''V\
	n	Tdv	t (th)	1r) T

Reading and Orthography, 3

The Hebrew characters were originally representations of the 2 objects which their names denote, as set down in the sixth column.

The names and order of the letters should be learnt by heart, 3 since these must be perfectly known, before a Hebrew Lexicon can be used with facility. They may be arranged in triplets, thus : —

A'leph	Beth	Gi'mel
hi	n	:i
Daleth	He	Vav
?.	n	T
Za'yin	Kheth	Teth
r	n	D
Y6d	Caph	Lamed
1	2	b
Mem	Nun	/Sa'mech
D	::	D
A'yin	Pe	Tsade
V	3	)i
Koph	Resh	Shin; Sin
P	"1	^ V

Tav

n

Chap. I. § 2. Division of the Consonatits,

1) Gutturals, A'leph, He, Kheth, A'yin. 4

i^ :■] n y

2) Palatals, Gi'mel, Yod, Caph, Koph.

• :i "» D p

3) Linguals, Daleth, Teth, Tdv.

4) Sibilants, Za'yin, Sd'mech, Tsade, Shin, Sin.

T D :i -t ):;

5) Labials, Beth, Vdv, Mem, Pe.

n 1 D 9

The liquids may also be considered a separate 5 class. They are, —

La'med, Mem, Nun, Resh.

^ D i 1 .

a) ^^ is the lightest of the gutturals, a scarcely 6

B 2

4 Reading and Orthography, [ch. i.

(6) audible breathing from the lungs, [b) ^ is nearly re- lated to it, and is " a sound peculiar to the organs of the Semitic race'^ (G). It had sometimes a com- paratively hard sound, which the Greek interpreters expressed by y (in Gomorrha, &c.) : in other words it was a gentle breathing, not expressed in other languages (Eli, Amalek^). It is now usual to pass it over in reading the language, and often in writing it in Roman characters. The Portuguese Jews pro- nounce it as gn at the beginning of a syllable, as ng at the end of one.

c) Resh (1) was pronounced with a hoarse gut- tural sound, and partakes of the peculiarities that, as we shall see, belong to the gutturals. 7 The consonants are also divided into, —

a) Servile letters.

b) Radical letters.

Servile letters are those which are used in the grammatical inflexions, and in the syllables that mark derivative words. Servile letters are, however, some- times radical ; though radical ones are never servile.

The servile letters are contained in the memorial words Mosheh, Eythan, Vecalebh (Moses, Ethan, and Caleb, n^^i ]Jl^^^ Ht^/O)-

Exercise 1.

a) Write down, in English letters, the names of the following consonants.

	1	2	3	4	5	6
1.	V	*)	b	'V	-1	K
2.	:	D	y	1	-T	•»
3.	D	n	:)	■7	>	1
4.	V	3	:i	10	^	V
5.	n	n	:	P	1	b
6.	t	K	r	12	1	:i

* 'HXt, y^^. 'AnaXU, p7Q^. Ewald indicates its presence

by the aspirated breathing ('), but says that its sound maybe best represented by gh : and in his Alphabet he prints G^ain.

§ 3.] Long Vowels, 5

b) Write down the Hebrew letters corresponding (7) to,

12 3 4

1. y kh h z

2. 17* a 5 k V

3. g ;i[ n J d ts

4. r -^ c J) m .. b „.

Chap. I. § 3. Long Voivels. Quiescent Letters. Syllables,

As long as the Hebrew was a spoken language, 8 no vowels were written, except so far as ") *> ^i were vowel letters. (See the Introduction.) The vowels, as now found in Hebrew Bibles *, are marks placed sometimes above the consonants, but more commonly below them. In the case of u (1) the mark is inserted in the middle of one of them [Vav).

Hebrew words are written, and must be read, 9 from right to left ; not, as with us, from left to right.

Long Vowels.'] 1) Long a and e are denoted re- 10 spectively by the marks t and •• , placed under the consonant after which they are to be sounded.

b T	T	T	b	9	5
Id	md	nd	le	me	ne

a) Long a is the true guttural a sound, as in father. h) Long e is the sound oFa mfate, or e in there. .

2) Long i (that is, the Enghsh e in me) is a dot 11 written under the consonant after which it is to be sounded, and followed generally by Yod, which is then said to be quiescent, that is, not sounded.

U mi ni (the i pronounced like e in me.)

* See the Introduction. B 3

6 Reading and Orthography, [ch. i.

12 3) Long 0 is a dot usually placed over Vav, which is then quiescent (11).

IS mo no

13 4) Long u (like oo in tool) is a dot placed in Vav, which is then quiescent,

^b -ID J):

M mu nu

14 Long i and o are sometimes found without the Yod and Vav. They are then said to be written defectively. When long o is written defectively, it is indicated by a dot placed over the left extremity of its consonant (or a little in advance of it to the left) ;

as y, S, h. 1, i h, *'?.— i = o, \=zvo*.—A defectively written u is identical in form with u {~) f. See 26.

15 Every syllable (with the exception of 1, u, — and) begins with a consonant ; for the consonant Aleph (an unaspirated guttural breathing [6]) was pronounced before an initial a, e^ i, o, or u: that is to say, every word that, if written in Roman letters, would begin with a vowel, begins in Hebrew with the con- sonant ^ZejoA ; which, however, does not affect the

16 pronunciation in any way that our organs can make perceptible.

J^ K ''K iK *)N

T •• •

- - A A A

a e 1 o u

17 The distinctive point of Shin (1, a) may serve also for the defectively ivritten o of the preceding conso- nant (14) : nti^D mb-sheh,

18 So the distinctive point of Sin is allowed to note a

* ^ may 1) = or, the dot representing a preceding Kholem (14, 19). ,

np {lo-veh).

2) = vo, p^ Oia-vbn),

3) = 0, I'l: {nod).

•\ \ was probably written, whenever the old language did not employ *) to express u. (E.)

§ 3.] Long Vowels, 7

defectively written b, to be pronounced after the Bin : (is) i^^V so-ne,

a) We have seen (11 sqq.) that Vav is quiescent^ after long o and u : and Yod after long i.

b) Yod ( *• ) is also quiescent after long e ( •• ).

c) Aleph (^^ ) is quiescent after any long vowel.

T ...

SO hi tse hu

In writing Hebrew words in Roman characters, i, 6, A will be used for long i, o, u, written fully : i, 5, u for the same long vowels written defectively (14): e will be written for *'—

(that is, for e followed by *>) ; a for J^— (that is, for a followed

by jf^). On the defective writing of i, o, u, see 14. ■/.

The names of the long vowels [See note on 65] are, — 19

Long a, Kamets (t). Long?, Khi'rek ( t).

Long e, Tse're (..). Long o, Kho'lem 0).

Long Uy Shu'rek (?) ).

fl) Observe that the vowel it stands for, occurs in the first syllable of each name.

h) The quiescent letters (i. e. those letters which are sometimes quiescent) are contained in the memorial word Ehevi CIIIK).

a) A simple (or open) syllable ends in a vowel or 20 quiescent consonant.

b) A compound (or closed) syllable ends in a con- sonant.

Examples and Reading Lesson, Open Monosyllables.']

:i 3 12 i^^ 1 1 1 15. 2 ra. 3 tsa.

T T

Closed Monosyllables.']

21

rb 3 ut 2	/^^^ 1	1 eth. 2 shem.	3 h6t.
15 6 DV 5	^r^V 4	4 i>6r. 5 yom.	6 chen.
m^b 9 p^ 8	V^^	7 i^ets. 8 lun.	9 lu^.
12 ^b 11	DiD 10	10 mo^. 11 sol.	12 tsin.

* It would be more correct to say, that the vowel-sign (or point) indicates that the following Yod or Vav is a vowel-letter, not a consonant.

8 Reading and Orthography,

(21) Dissyllables.']

[CH. 1.

]V^ 2	TT	1 sha-nah.	2 tsa-yon.
Nnp^4	Q'^P, 3	3 ka-mim.	4 kara.
T	XT	5 Sa-rah.	6 yo-nah.
DipQ 8	TT	7 va-ra^.	8 ma-kom.
TT	T4!? 9	9 me-i^ets.	10 ha-yah.
PD 12	"•b^ip 11	11 ko-li.	12 ma-gen.

Exercise 2.

22 «) Write in English characters (with the dissyl- lables divided into syllables) —

'"b 7 ••)^ 6 -lilii 5 ^ 4 1^:: 3 p 2 y I

p 14 •'IS 1 12 it 11 Si:) 10 Dp 9 ro 8

")V^ 20 Sip 19 p^ 18 -yi^ \7 p 16 ly 15

S^^ 26 ni^ 25 Di^ 24 tk 23 -)?):i 22 ^21 dhS 31 trDn 30 ]i^n 29 DH 28 S^:^i^ 27

D^Sl^ 35 Hi^iJ 34 'nVD 33 . TJ 32

T T T T •

b) Write in Hebrew characters —

1 ts6. 2 tsi. 3 tsu. 4 tsa. 5 tse. 6 tsa. 7 5a-nah. 8 sar. 9 i^ets. 10 i)a-ts^m.

11 tse-dah. 12 tsa-rah. 13 ra-tsuts.

Chap. I. § 4.

Begadchephath Letters. Dagesh, Short Vowels.

23 The six mutes, Beth, Gimel, Daleth, Caph, Pe, Tav, were originally pronounced with a hard (or slender) sound (as b, g, d, c hard, p, t) ; but they had also a tendency to receive a softer and slightly aspirated pronunciation (as bh [=: v], gh, dh, ch, ph [ = /], th). To mark the harder pronunciation, a dot, called Dagesh^ is placed in the letter; as, 3» i), "7, 3> D. /I. This mark is usually found in these letters at the beginning of words and syllables, when there is no vowel immediately preceding.

§ 4.] Short Voivels, 9

The letters which receive this Dagesh are contained in the (23) technical memorial word Begadchephath. The aspiration can ; hardly be made perceptible by English organs in d and g. In England, 2 {bh) is usually pronounced v : the Spanish Jews, however (and so Ewald and Hurwitz), pronounce it b. I shall print g, d for ^, ^7, except when the Hebrew equivalents of Roman letters are to be written by the pupil.

But when a dot {Dagesh) stands in a consonant 24 that terminates a syllable, it indicates that the conso- nant in which it is placed is to be pronounced double (and, if a Begadchephath letter, without aspiration) ; as 12l1 dib-ber.

The Dagesh that hardens the pronunciation of an 25 initial begadchephath letter (23) is called light Dagesh: that which doubles a consonant, hard or strong i Dagesh [Dagesh lene, Dagesh forte),

{Short Vowels.) 26

The short vowels are, — a - Pa'thakh.

e ••• Segol (but ••• is sometimes an obtuse a sound, as e in mere: especially in an accented penult followed by " ).

1 • Khi'rek Parvum.

o T Ka'mets Khatuph'.

n \ Kibbiits' (but \ is sometimes a defectively written

Sh6rek'[l4j).

a) It is a great imperfection in the notation of these vowels, that the sign for Kamets Khatuph (o) is the same as that for Kamets (a). The rules for distinguishing the two" cannot be given, till the nature of Sh'va has been explained.

Examples and Reading Lesson, a)

2^ 3	b2 2	pni	1 khiik.	2 bal.	3 gabh.
DhJ 6	1^^	D'i 4	4 dam.	5 ben.	6 eth.
n^9	DR8	]B 7	7 pen.	8 kum.	9 shuph
D> 12	V? ^^	"in* 10 V	10 tur.	11 mits.	12 yam

27

10		Reading and Orthography, [ch, i.
(27) b)	^bD 2	ntn 1	[25). 1 ha-zeh. 2 me'-lech (=:me-lech.
	^?? 4	^1^ ^	3 i^e'-rebh. 4 ne -phesh.
	V"?.^ 6	J^"].! ^	5 ze'-rai>. 6 e'-rets.
	D"?.i S	-H!/! 7	7 khay-yath. 8 ^e'-rem.
	niJ 10	ijr] 9	9 na-:^ar. 10 ne'-der.
c) ~ T	(Mixed.) 3 Y>ii 2 bb2 1 nVa^ 5 Y2t^ 4 ")Lpj2 7 ^^g 6	1 tsa-lal. 2 tsits. 3 a-sham. 4 sha-bhats. 5 shib-bo-leth. 6 ka^-^al. 7 kaf-^er.
•inr^? 11	iJibiy 10	•8 )>ur. 9 )^tiph. 10 :i^6-la-th6. 11 cat-to-hii.
	pin 13	7D^ 12	12 yim-mad. 13 kha-rak.
		Exercise 3.

a) Write in English letters —

28 riK 7 >B 6 C]J^ 5 D5 4 ^jr 3 DJ^i 2 Ht 1

Tj!)3 13 '^st 12 rm 11 'pip 10 riNt 9 jiNt 8 D'•^^k 19 Dm is y"in i7 ••ni*^ i6 ^isar 15 an? 14

T ' VV . T • - TT

Jin3 25 pD 24 'p^n 23 Din 22 n^i^D 21 is^^ 20

- T '- T . T T-

j)3r 31 DJ^ 30 t^niB 29 b\>i2 28 jiDn 27 didd 26

b) Write in Hebrew letters —

1 ten 2 pakh 3 pen 4 ben 5 pash 6 par 7 pum

8 na-ham 9 na-ghakh 10 pe-thi 11 co-pher

12 na-ghai^ 13 5a-phadh 14 i^a-lam 15 sha-kal

16 tse-bheth 17 giil-lah 18 mats-tsah.

Chap. I. § 5. Sh^vd.

29 Besides the full vowels (19, 26), the Hebrew has

§ 5.] SWva. 11

also a series of very slight vowel sounds, which may (29) be called half -vowels.

The shortest, slightest, and most indistinct of these sounds is the simple Sh^va ( : ), resembling an obscure half e (G). A consonant followed by this Sh'va is usually not considered to constitute a syl- lable*. It will be indicated by {') when the Hebrew words are written in English characters.

This Sh'va is called vocal (or initial) Sh'va, to dis- 30 tinguish it from silent (or final) Sh'va, which marks the close of a syllable. It is also called simple Sh'va, to distinguish it from the Khdtephs, or ' composite Sh'vas: See 36.

a) The place of vocal Sh'va is under the initial ^l consonant of a syllable,

b) Sh'va is final —

1 ) At the end of words, as i^K, at.

2) When preceded by a short vowel not having Metheg (48), as Vf^'li^, ar-mo n'.

3) When preceded by a long vowel having a prin- cipal accent, as HJlW, sho'bh'-nah.

(But there are many exceptions to the two last rules.) K^QD m'mal-le. (!)^P^tpJP =-) ^b^p^ kit-flA.

rh^V ko-flah. ^bbr^f ha-riu.

i\blD\);^ yik-^'Mt- b^m ha-m'shel§.

bbp k'tol. '^^bn ma-l'che||.

* Gesenius calls a consonant with Sh'va a half syllable.

t For •17'pn {hal-Vlu). X Here the first is silent Sh'va.

§ The interrogative Jl (which has Metheg) forms a syllable of

itself.

II If this word were to be divided thus, mal-che, the caph would take the Dagesh. " In these last examples the Sh'va sound is especially shght, on account of the extreme shortness of the preceding syllable." (G.)

12 Reading and Orthography. [ch. i.

32 If a word ends in two consonants, each of them takes a silent Sh'va, as "T'lJj, nerd,

33 A final "J or D {dageshed) always takes a silent Sh'va, as "^"jn"?. JJIN^-

With these exceptions, Sh'va is not placed under the final consonant of a word.

Examples and Reading Lesson,

34 rob^;* 2 T-jiim i bn^ 4 ij^^pj 3

nTnn s ^nin r

Tfspb 10 ni^v 9

mii; 12 ^p^n n

r^Q^hi) 14 mbV 13

"^rap 16 ^^pjl 15

D^Db"} 18 nip 17

n^n^ti; 20 ^n'pi^ 19

riDn 22 -Tj^b;;! 21

I v'ho-red. 2 yish-po^ 3 yim-loch. 4 b'dil.

5 bhin-^6-thi. 6 Tbha-nah. 7 har-khebh. 8 hir-khibh. 9 yo-l'dah. 10 cas-p'cha.

II khel-k'cha. 12 i?ebb-rath. 13 i?a-bhar-ta. 14 pith-ga-ma. 15 tsad-d'ko. 16 kin-n'nab. 17 k'neh. 18 r*cha-5im.

19 shiil-khan. 20 sh'lakh-nah. 21 tim-sh5ch. 22 turn-math.

Exercise 4.

35 a) Write in English letters and divide into syl- lables the following Hebrew words —

D?3^Q '''im DDD^D PP^iV ^V?

'?!	ns)	>-)?p	]??!	^19?	^?^?
ijnini!	''^P.	't>^	''DV}	VP^	'^n^Dp

b) Write in Hebrew letters —

1 mash-mi m. 2 m'sham-moth. 3 ne))-dar.

4 niph.ga)>, 5 niph-tal. 6 p'kad-ta.

7 yus-sad. 8 koshf. 9 hich-tabht.

§ 6.] Semi-vowels, 13

Chap. I. § 6. The Semi-voivels.

A semi-voivel, or composite Sh'va, is formed by pre- 36 fixing a /SA^z^a to one of the three short vowels, a, ^, 6;.

Hence we get,

-: • Khateph' Pa'thakh. ••■: Khateph' Segol. t: Khateph' Ka'mets. These semi-vowels will be denoted by a, e, 0 above the line of letters, when English characters are used. A semi-vowel is sometimes called concisely * a Khateph.' "l^DPf kh^mor (ass).

"ibi^ *mor {to say).

>7n kh°li (sickness),

• TJ

The composite Sh'vas stand principally, Khateph 37 Segol ( v: ) exclusively, under the gutturals.

Khateph Pathakh stands for a simple vocal Sh'va 38 (30), but without any fixed law : especially,

a) Under a letter doubled by Dagesh (for the doubling causes a distincter utterance of the Sh'va. See 39, b),

b) After a long vowel. (G.)

Khateph Kamets is less exclusively connected with 39 the gutturals, than the other two semi-vowels.

a) It stands for simple vocal Sh'va, when the syl- lable had an original 0 sound, which is to be partly preserved.

b) It is also used (as is also -:) when a strong Dagesh has fallen away. (G.)

Examples and Reading Lesson, 40

'•^'7^ 4 nrih 3 TTn/10 ubn 9

I ba-i)^^a-rah. 2 he-^zin. 3 khMhar. 4 "hah. 5 "dh5-ni-kam. 6 *ho-den-nu. 7 ^hi, 8 "^ra-phel. 9 khMom. 10 kh»zir.

II he-^rich. 12 ha-^ri-chi.

C

14 Reading and Orthography, [ch. i.

Exercise 5.

41 a) Write in English characters —

wrp^^ 13 ni3b; 12 n\:hp\ n ''D'pj^ 10 niij 16 D"'::im 15 nwi^ 14

b) Write in Hebrew characters —

1 md-dah. 2 niz-har. 3 hiz-i^'^ku. 4 til-mid.

5 sir-pad. 6 ar-mon. 7 ta-kh*leph. 8 ^sher.

Chap. I. § 7. On Syllables, Furtive Pathakh. Mappik, Makkeph. Metheg,

42 The general rule (20) is, that every syllable which has a long vowel, is an open syllable ; every one that has a short vowel is a closed syllable *.

Hence a Sh'va is usually vocal after a long vowel, and final (i. e. stands as a mere syllable-divider under the final consonant of a syllable) after a short vowel.

43 But a tonic accent enables a short vowel to stand in an open syllable ; a long vowel in a closed one. So that, when the syllable is the tone-syllable of the word, a following Sh'va may be vocal after a short vowel, and final after a long one.

44 W^hen a final guttural is H, ^f or rT (with Mappiky 46), this guttural has often a Pathakh under it, called Furtive Pathakh, because it steals in, as it were, before the consonant it stands under, as r^I^Q, Md-sM-akh

[Messiali).

45 A furtive Pathakh may also stand under one of the gutturals just enumerated, when such guttural is fol-

* When a vowelless consonant (which, as such, has Sh'va) closes a syllable, but runs on naturally with i\\e following con- sonant, Ewald calls the Sfi'va, " Sh'va medium^" and the (former) syllable "a half-closed syllable." Thus, ''1T> not quite 3/«/-c?e/

not ya-Vdej but, as it were, yaVde.

§ 7.] Mappik, Mahkeph, ^c. 15

lowed by a dageshed consonant with Sh'va, as I[^)l^B, (45)

pd-sha-a^t.

Mappik' is a point placed in the middle of a final H, 46 when it is not quiescent. (H will be represented by hh.)

Makkeph is a hyphen, which unites words so closely, 47 that a word followed by it loses its accent ; words united by this mark bemg considered as one word.

Tsere and Kholem are often changed by a following Makkeph into Segol and Kamets Khatuph respectively : as

bTr\^ for b^ nv^ Df ^^■^^ for dts* bb-

TV •• T T T T T

Metheg (or Byndle) is a small perpendicular line 48 ( I ) to the left of a vowel ; it is used to show that the vowel sound is to be extended. Metheg stands (G.),

a) Before a vocal Sh'va, which, without that mark, would be taken iov final Sh'va: as ^■^D^^, a-m'ru (not dm-ru).

: IT

b) Before a Khatepk (36) when immediately preceded by a

vowel without a following dagesh : as Jlin** ye-kh^reh.

vv:iv

c) In polysyllables, one or two syllables before the tone- syllable. If the last syllable has the tone, the antepenultima, whether long or short, has Metheg.

In speaking of the antepenultima here, we consider a (simple or composite) Sh'va to form a syllable.

Examples and Reading Lesson,

T ;|T T T T

•1K"]^\ 4

nb:f^p 6

T : 'it T : |T

nr\r\3 lo

niDT 3

T l T

T-:|T T •.. : |-

mn^ 11

: |T

nint^ri^n 12

T r

niDT 14 ni^i:^ 13

■»• : |T T : |T

r^Td? 16 ^^f* 15

T • : : I-

I c61=a-dara. 2 za-ch'ra. 3 zoch-rah. 4 yi-r'u.

5 yi-r'ii. 6 ka-flah.

7 ha-a-dam'. 8 ga-1'thah'.

9 ha-m'khul-lal. 10 ca-hnhah'.

II ya-th'hon.

12 ha-no-sha-bhoth.

13 sha-m'rah'. 14 za-ch'rah'. 15 yi-sh'nu. 16 I'mi-nahh.

c2

49

16 Reading atid OrthograpJiy. [ch. i.

Exercise 6. 50 a) Write in English letters —

XV|T ''IIT TT TT -"T •• : T|T • Tl" V T|":
b) Write in	Hebrew letters * —
1 hemmah. 4 harakiai^. 7 tha^nod". 10 i^^navim.	2 ronni. 5 bathstsiyyon. 8 tha:i^lim.	3 I'mi'nehem". 6 v'imse'n'cha". 9 i^al^ta*vath.

Chap. I. § 8. 0?z distinguislimg Kamets Khatuphfrom Kamets, and Long Khirekfrom Short Khirek.

51 Till the pupil is acquainted with the derivation of words, the following rules will assist him in distin- guishing Kamets Khatuph from Kamets ; both of which are indicated by the same mark ( ■*").^

52 I.) T is 0 in a closed (42), unaccented syllable. Such syllables are : —

a) An unaccented syllable in which the ^ is without Metheg, and followed by simple ShVa.

b) An unaccented syllable in which the t is followed by a letter with strong Dagesh.

An T r= 0 may have Metheg with it, if the syllable is the second syllable before the tone (i. q. principal accent). See 53.

c) When Makkeph (47) follows.

d) When the unaccented closed syllable \s final, (G.)

53 II.) T is 0 in open syllables.

a) When followed by Khateph Kamets.

b) When followed hy Kamets Khatuph.

c) In the two anomalous words XT'^'^D {ko-dd-shim), D''ti?"1t^

• t'|T • T|T

{sho-ra-shim.)

In these cases t is followed by Metheg, since Metheg always stands in the second syllable before the tone. (G.)

* In this Exercise (') marks the place of Metheg: (") the tone-syllable; (=) marks a Makkeph.

§.8.] Ka?nets Khatuph. 17

In the same way Metheg is of use in enabling 54 us to distinguish a defectively ivritten long Khirek from short Khirek : for Khirek is long, when it forms either an open syllable (whether accented or not) or a closed accented syllable (42). Now a Metheg follow- ing Khirek often shows that the syllable is an open owe, the Sh\a that follows it being initial, not final.

Examples and Reading Lesson.

riininQ i

tt; t

-:)■) 3 HDDH 2

•• T T ; T

•■••IT . T : T :

: ' T "tit;

^IDI 9 "ipip 8 : |T . T

Jiinn")n u '^2^1 10 a"inn 13 n^n^n 12

"t: t t t ; t

1 mo-kh°-ra-bh6th. 55

2 khoch-mah. 3 ron-ne.

4 c'dobh-ram. 5 bot-te-chera. 6 c'dor-la-i^o-mer, 7 kobh-ro. 8 kod-kod. 9 ra-ch'bhA.

10ts6r-ce-cha. 1 1 hor-kho-bhoth. 1 2 hor-kha-bhah 1 3 h6-kh°-rebh 14 hog-lath. 15 ribh.

Exercise 7.

a) Write in English letters — 56 1^^5 5 U12 4 t^ip> 3 n)nj>\ 2 ^^^[p> 1

b) Write in Hebrew letters —

1 y'komi^am. 2 m'shor-to. 3 nov. 4 nubh.

5 i^ozbhech. 6 i>*m6dcha.

Chap. I. § 9. Further Remarks on the Voivels. (G.)

Diphthongs,

The primary vowel sounds are A, I, U. 57

E is properly the diphthong AI contracted. O is properly the diphthong AU contracted.

c3

18 Reading and Orthography. [ch. I.

58 A more useful division of the vowels than that into long and short (or perfect and imperfect) vowels, is this (G.) :—

First Class, A sound.

59 For the A sound the Hebrew has three vowel marks ( ^ ), ( ~ )j ( " ) ; 2ill of which are written below the consonant with and after which they are to be sounded.

a) T a Kamets.

b) - a Patkakh.

c) ••• e or a Segol.

" is here an obtuse e- sound, Hke e in the French mere ; in our there.

60

/) 9)

Second Class, > T and T

I-.

I

e, e e

I and E sounds.

hong Khirek,

Short Khirek.

Tsere, with and without Yod.

Segol. Obtuse e. When accented, = e.

i)

61 Third Class, U and O sounds.

!) 4 Shurek.

— UyU Kibbuts. (1) u. a simple shortening of

Shurek. (2) u.

k) *) and J. 6, 6 Kholem.

I) ~ o Kamets Khatuph.

Also obtuse e ( • ) may be considered to belong to this class, as far as it springs from u or o.

62 When vowels are lengthened or shortened (for reasons to be explained hereafter), the change is usually confined to vowels of the same class. Thus d may be shortened into a or a (or e; that is, obtuse Segol) ; e into e ovt; o into o or u,

63 The only diphthongs that occur in Hebrew are,

ai (V), oi (^i), ui (>!)).

64 In V7 tt^6 Yod is usually considered quiescent, so that this combination is pronounced dv or dw; not aiv.

§ 9.] The Vowels.

Examples and Reading Lesson,

19

Q h) up 2 - 't	"T» 1 a) A T	a) 1 yad. 2 kam. b) bath.
	TJ^P. 1 c)	c) 1 me-lech (or m'dlech).
T V ;	TT2 • VT	2 ya-de'-cha. 3 g'le-nah.
iDJ^eJ	D'P.I^ ^)	d) tsaddi-kim. e) im-rao.
Dt^2	nui/)	/) 1 beth. 2 shem.
1^2	"13D 1 ^)	g) 1 se'pher. 2 shen.
n^T2h)	n]n3	3 kho-zeh. h) muth.
	•'JID 1 i)	i) 1 mii-thi. 2 gul-lah.
pn k) 21 2 ' T	b^pij)	j) 1 kol. 2 robh. A:) kh6k=.
0^2	-JINt* 1 /)	0 1 eth-. 2 atstem.
^ ''l-?^	n/is 1 B	1 Pa'-thakh f. 2 Tse'-re.
Db>in4	PTPT 3	3 Khi'-rek. 4 Kho'-lem.
V^^i? ^	p-)iti^5	5 Shu -rek. 6 Kib'-buts.
	T?i^7	7 Ka-mets.
^i:p 9 5i?)tDn ygp s	8 Ka-mets Kha-^uph. 9 Se'-gol.

* From /liX-

t The names of the vowels are almost all taken from the form and action of the mouth in uttering the sounds. Thus nnD signifies opening, ''"l^i bursting (of the mouth), p"T'r7

gnashing, U/^^\ fulness, from its full tone, p"l^ti/ properly (tv-

picrfiog, y^Itp closing (of the mouth) . This last meaning belongs

also to I^T^p ; and the reason why long a and short o (Pj^JOrT \t2p

Kamets correptum) have the same sign and name is that the Rabbins gave to Kamets the impure sound of o, like the Swedish a. Only Segal (^i^D [/i^D* E.'] cluster of grapes') appears

to be named after its form.

The names were, moreover, so formed that the sound of each vowel was heard in the first syllable : and in conformity to this, some write Sdghol, Komets-chatuph, Kubbuts. (G.)

20

Reading and Orthography.

[CH. 1.

(65) ^ibilS '»ii)2		1 ^do-nai.	2 goi. 3 ga-lui.
T T	V^J<" 4 X ••	4 e-lav.	5 )^a-lav.
H'^O 7	K?;::^ 6	6 so-ne(a).	7 M5-sheh.
U^D"}) 9	-)5'^ 8	8 sho-mer.	9 yir-pos.
]i:^2	n^> 1 D	1 l6-veh.	2 ))a-von.
Dp 2	"pip 1 E	Ik61.	2 kum.
Dp 4	ri'^ps	3 ko-loth.	4 kum.
•)5 2	lU F X	1 vav.	2 gev.
''i:i4	v^	3 khai.	4 goi.
	r-in^ 5	5 d'bha-rhav.

Exercise 8.

66 g) Write in English letters (dividing the syl- lables)—

^ni13 5 ^n 4 i'pii 3 >K^^]| 2 ^ D^3 1 JliD^DD 10 ^ti^iD 9 tl^l 8 Dn 7 "ijp^^ 6

^) Write in Hebrew letters —

1 i^am. 2 tamim. 3 m^akh. 4 i^amok. 5 i^^mukim. 6 orakh. 7 cathobh. 8 t'mim. 9 I'bhabhim.

10 i^^mukke. 11 tammah.

Chap. I. §10. On Verbal Roots and on the derivation

of Nouns.

67 The 7'oots or stem-words of the Hebrew language nearly always consist of three consonants, on which the meaning essentially depends.

68 a) A strong root is one that contains three firm, permanent consonants; a iveak root is a root that contains at least one weak letter [Aleph, He, Vav, or Yod).

b) Verbs whose first consonant is Nun, or whose

§ 10.] Derivation of Nouns. 21

second and third consonants are the same letter, are (68) contracted in some forms by the omission or assimi- lation * of one consonant, and are sometimes called contracted verbs. But these may, like the former, be called iveak roots, since they cannot maintain their full form throughout.

The various modifications of the primary meaning 69 of a root are expressed by the radical consonants with changed vowels, and sometimes with added conso- nants also ; which are sometimes prefixed, sometimes post-fixed.

a) A stem-word may be either a yioun or a verb ; 70 and usually the language exhibits both together (see

1, a, d in the following examples) : but it is cus- tomary and of practical utility for the beginner, to consider the third person singular of the Peyfect in the simplest conjugation (called Kal) as the root or stem- word, and the other verbal forms, nouns, and particles, as derived from it. (G.)

b) Sometimes no corresponding noun is found in the extant language : and sometimes a noun exists without a corresponding verb. The spoken language probably had, at least at some period, the missing forms, which are often found in the kindred dialects (e.g. in Arabic). (G.)

The verbal root, as just defined, generally has for 7i its vowels Kamets in the first, and Pathakh in the second, syllable. The verb that the old Grammarians used as their example of conjugating was 7^3 (pd)Jal) ;

and hence the first consonant of a verb was called its Pe ; the second its Ayin ; the third its Lamed.

Verbs whose first radical (their Pe) is Nun, Aleph, 72 or Yod, have, from the weahiess of those consonants, certain peculiarities of conjugation ; as have (for the same reason) verbs whose second radical (their Ayin) is either Yod or identical with their third radical;

* A consonant is assimilated to a following one, when the same consonant that follows is substituted for the preceding one : e. g. when np becomes pp.

22 Reading and Orthography, [ch. i.

(72) and verbs whose third radical (their Lamed) is He or Aleph. The presence of any other guttural in the root also necessitates some change in several of the usual forms.

73 A verb whose ^rs^ radical is Nun is called concisely *a verb Pe Nun:' one whose third radical is Alejjh, ' a verb Lamed Aleph;* and so on.

I shall designate (and indicate) those that have and have not such peculiarities thus : —

74 A. Regidar (or strong) verb (r)

B. {Verbs with gutturals).

1. Verbs first guttural

Verbs second guttural ... Verbs third guttural

C. Weak {contracted) Verbs.

Verbs Pe Nun

Verbs Double Ayin

D. {Other weak Verbs).

Verbs Lamed Aleph

Verbs PeYod

Verbs Ayin Vav

Verbs Lamed He

(usually indicated thus)

Verbs Pe Aleph

:iD

If

rh

If

(n) (d)

(a3)

(y)

(V)

(h)

75

Examples and Reading Lesson.

ly^ 2 -7:1:1 1 A

•7:12 4 ii:ii 3

T

TT^D 2 "rrb^ a 1 f>^\ 3

A 1 bagad, 2 boged,

he was deceitful. deceitfully.

3 bagod, 4 be'ged,

to be deceitful. deceit.

1 malach, 2 molech,

he reigned. he that reigns.

3 yimloch, he will reign.

§ 10-]	Classes	o/ Verbs. 23
(a^) [Pe Aleph']	- T	«^) 1 achal *, to eat.
^D«l	~ T	2 abhad, 3 asaph, to perish. to collect.
{g^) \Pe gutturaT]	-■ T	B (p^) i^amad, /o stand; to stay.
(g^) {.Ayin guttural]	— T	(g^ shakha^, to kill (animals).
(g^ [Lamed guttural]	■" T	{g^) shalakh, to send.
(n) [Pe Nun] tlH^ 2 - T	m: 1 c — T	C {n) 1 nagas, 2 nagash, to exact. to approach
"in:j4	n"T^3	3 nadar, 4 nahar,
~ T	~T	to vow. to flow.
(c?) [Double Ayin']	— X	(d) sabhabh, to go about.
(a^) [Lamed Aleph']	X T	D (a) matsa, to find.
(y) [Pe Yod] 1^ 2 — T	— T	(3/) 1 yashabh, 2 yalad, /o 5jY. to beget.
c)p;4	"TD''3 ~ T	3 yasad, 4 yasaph, to found. to add.
	yrs	5 yai?ats, to counsel.
(y) LJj/2n Vav]	D^p	(v) kum, to rise.
(A) [Lamerf He]	n^.^	(h) galah, to reveal.

(75)

,. Y Exercise 9.

a) Write in S»gli^ letters, and describe (both in 75 words and by the proper conventional letters [74]) the following verbal roots —

tsud, to he hunted: to hunt. khalal, to be wounded. mug, to melt. yakash, to lay snares.

zarah, to disperse. hagah, to meditate. nazal, to flow.

b) Write in English letters, and describe (both in

* I shall follow the usual practice of giving the English in- finitive as the radical form; though the pupil must remember that the Hebrew word is really the third singular m. of the Perfect.

24 Reading and Orthography, [ch. i.

(76) words and by the proper conventional letters) the following verbal roots —

■)D'' to instruct.

~ T

TIJ^ to curse.

— T

'?T3D to cover. ni7 to borrow.

/^i to fall J to wither.

— T

773, to mingle.

~ T

'y\'^ to return.

Chap. I. § 11. On the derivation of Nouns.

*J7 Nouns are either primitive (i. e. themselves roots) or derivative.

Derivative nouns are mostly verbals, that is, de- rived from verbs : some, however, are denominatives ^, that is, derived from another noun.

Many of the old grammarians acknowledged none but verbal roots, and considered all nouns as verbals.

78 a) Of verbal nouns some are strong, being formed from stro7ig roots, and retaining all the consonants of the root, with (usually) a change of the vowel points.

b) Others are iveak, being formed from weak roots, and usually by throwing away one of the radical letters.

c) Both strong and weak verbal nouns may be un- augmented or augmented. In the unaugmented nouns no addition is made to the verbal root. The aug- m,ented nouns are made by the addition of one or more of the servile letters ^ Ji ;3 Q K n to a verbal root.

These serviles being contained in the technical word He-e- man-ti, augmented nouns are called Heemantic nouns. Of these additional letters, Q is always at the beginning; n generally at the end; "^ and ^ sometimes at the end; r\ either at the be- ginning or end of the word so augmented.

79 a) A noun augmented at the beginning may be denoted by a, at the end by w ; at both by acu.

* That is, derived de nomine (from a noun).

§"ll-]

Derivation of Nouns,

25

b) A noun derived from a verb Pe Nun, Pe Yod, Sic, (79) will be designated by n, y, d, v, a, h, according to the letters given in 7Q, as denoting those conjuga- tions or forums.

c) If a noun is derived from a strong root, or is a root itself, or consists only of radical letters, it may be designated by r.

d) I shall include in nouns designated by r feminines in ah, derived from verbs Lamed He, though the h is in this case pro- perly servile : as n^'^i^, shanah (a year) from HJli^-

Examples and Reading Lesson,

T : T

|T"

T •

me'lech (r) (a king)

mishpa^ [a) {judgement)

khochmah (w) {wisdom)

dea)> (y) {knowledge)

moshabh (ay) {seat)

i^etsah' (w y) {counsel)

torn {d) {perfectness)

magen {a d) {a shield)

zimmah (w d) {wickedness)

t'phillah (awi?) {prayer)

A verbal noun, unaug- mented.

1^^

A verbal noun, aug- J^QJ^ mented at the begin- ning.

A verbal noun, aug- Q^PT mented at the end.

A verbal noun, from a {weak) verb Pe Yod.

A verbal noun, aug- mented at the begin- ning, from a {tveak) verb Pe Yod.

A verbal noun, aug- mented at the end, from a {weak) verb Pe Yod.

A verbal noun, derived from a contracted verb double Ayin.

A verbal noun, aug- mented at the begin- ning, from a contracted verb doMe Ayin.

A verbal noun, aug- mented at the end, from a contracted verb doiMe Ayin.

A verbal noun, aug- mented at both begin- ning and end, from a contracted verb double Ayin.

— T

2t'

~ T ~ T .

Dat

— T

malach {to reign)

shaphaf {to judge)

khacham {to be wise)

yadai^ {to know)

y ash abb {to sit)

yai^ats {to counsel)

tamam {to complete)

ganan {to cover, prO' tect)

zamam {to devise)

pillel {to judge) ; [in Hithpael, to pray J

D

80

26

Reading and Orthography,

(80) nil ger (v)

{stranger)

DipD makom (av) "*" {place)

]^^7 la-ts6n (w v) ^ (scorn)

iiy)^D t'bhunah(awv) ■^ • (understanding)

nD p'ri (h) • • (fruit)

]r\t2 mattan (an) "~ (a gift*)

rwBt2 mappalaht(awn) "^ "^ ~ (a ruin)

A verbal noun, from a {weak) verb ^?/m Fav.

A verbal noun, aug- mented at the begin- ning, from a (weak) verb Ai/in Vuv.

A verbal noun, aug- mented at the end, from a (weak) verb Ai/in Vav.

A verbal noun, aug- mented at both begin- ning and end, from a (weak) verb Ayin Vav.

A verbal noun, from a (tveak) verhLained He.

A verbal noun, aug- mented at the begin- ning, from a (contract- ed) verb Pe Nun.

A verbal noun, aug- mented both at the be- ginning and tbe end, from a (contracted) verb Pe Nun.

Exercise 10.

[CH. 1.

gur (to sojourn)

kum (to rise)

luts {to scorn)

Mn

(to understand)

parah (to be fruitful)

nathan {to give)

b^:i na

naphal (to fall)

II a) Write the following words in English letters, and describe their derivation according to the Table just given —

yni street.

Hi) /'D division (of priests).

"lipn a well.

i^i^p^ possession (especially '•' • * cattle). ]rT grace, favour.

D^ni^ love.

^ -J

* For mantan.

3n") to be broad.

— T

J)7B to divide,

~ T

1?)p to dig (for water). JlJp lo get; to bug.

t't

IJrr lo be gracious (to).

~ T

3(1^"^ to love.

" T

i^ZDH ^0 5/ip, ^o go astray.

T T

t For manpalah.

§ 1-2.]

The Accents.

27

^1 companion, friend. '^^'^ hunter.

tJDJ^D food. HDIJJ^ slumber.

tl^l to take delight in. (gl)

T T

"TliJ to lie in wait: to hunt.

^2i^ to eat.

— T

Q!)J to slumber.

b) Write the following words in Hebrew letters, and account for them as before —

shenah, sleep.

caph, the hollow of the hand.

makh^or, want.

i^ed, a witness.

torah, instruction.

musar, admonition, correction.

kalon, shame, disgrace.

y ashen, to sleep. caphaph, to bend. khaser, to want, to lack. ))udh, to testify. yarah, to teach (in Hiphil *). yasar, to admonish. kalah, to be lightly esteemed (in Niphal *).

Chap. I. § 12. The Accents.

a) The tone (or accent) of Hebrew words is on one 82 of the two last syllables.

b) As the tone-syllable is usually the last, it is suf- ficient for the pupil to know what classes of words have the accent on the penult (i. e. the last syllable but one).

c) Words with the accent on the final syllable are called Milra' (y)7Q) ; those with the accent on the penult, Milel'

(The following list will be useful for reference, though at 83 present several of the terms will convey no meaning to the pupil.)

The tone-syllable is the penult in, —

a) All dissyllable nouns whose last vowel is a Segol or

Pathakh.

b) Words whose final consonant has a, furtive Pathakh.

A conjugation so called. D 2

28 Reading and Orthography. [ch. i.

(83) c) Words with the dual ending a-yim (Q> — ).

d) Verbs of the Perfect tense with the personal endings

ti, td, nu (?)J, D, ^D).

T

e) Regular verbs of the Hiphil conjugation; and the con-

jugations Kaly Niphal, and Hiphil of verbs Ayin Vav and Double Ayin.

f) The demonstrative pronouns el'-leh (these), hem'-mah,

hen'-ndh.

g) Verbs that have the Vav conversive of the Perfect.

h) The accusative suffixes -dh, -kit, -nu, -ni, -kd, never have the tone.

84 Beside the accents that mark the tone-syllable of a word, there are others which serve the purpose of punctuatio?i, by indicating that a word is or is not to be taken in close connexion with what follows.

Such accents t are either separative or connective. Their names and shapes are J : —

85 Separative (or Distinctive) Accents

{Domini) .

Name. Figure. Name. Figure.

I. (Imperatores.) II. (Reges )

1 Siimk N i 1 t Segolta A

2 Athnakh K i 2 Zakeph Katon ji

' I . , , , , , < i 3 Zakeph Gadol J»}

3 *MerchawithMahpach ^^2 !

I 4 Tiphkha ^^

t These tables and remarks are placed here that the pupil who proceeds immediately from this work to any portion of a printed Bible may have some notion what is meant by the numerous marks with which the text is crowded. In the earlier part of the present work the tone-syllable, when it is thought ne- cessary to mark it, will be indicated by > ; as PO^p ikd-t'dl'-fd).

X Those marked with * are peculiar to the poetical books. Those marked with f are prepositive. Those marked with X are postpositive.

§12.]

Name. Figure.

III. (Duces.)

1 R'bhi'a K

2 X Zarka J^

3 X Pashta J^

4 T'bhir K

5 t Y'thibh K

6 * Shalsbe'leth K

7 t Tiphkha initial J^

The Accents, 29

Name. Figure. (85)

IV. (Comixes.)

v

1 Pazer i<i

IP

2 Karne Pharah J^

P

3 t Great T'lisba . . , K

t

4 Geresh K

//

5 Double Geresh K

6 P'sik (between the words) J^l

Connective Accents [Servi).

Name, Figure.

6 Mercha .-..- |^

7 Double Mercha K

//

8 Ye'rakh ben-yom5 .... J^

V

9 Tiphkha final K

Name. Figure.

1 Munakh K

2 Mahpach K

3 Kadma j;}

4 Darga >^

j5 Little T'lisha >^

10 * Mercha with Zarka. . _s^

1 1 * Mahpach with Zarka -J:±

a) Silluk occurs only at the end of a verse before (♦ ) Soph- 86 pasuk, which separates verses. Athnakh (== respiration) usually stands only in the middle of a verse.

b) Observe that Pashta (i^) and Kadma (J^) have the same form : they are distinguished by their position, for Pashta (as a separative accent) always stands on the last syllable, whether the tone-syllable is the last or last but one. If the accent is on

% % > the penult, then two Pashtas occur together, 5]D3n. Kadma

always stands on the^rs^ consonant of a word.

c) Y'thibh (i^) and Mahpach C^*) are also distinguished by

< <

position only : the former standing always before the first letter of the word, the latter under its vowel.

d3

30 Reading and Ortliography. [ch. i.

(86) d) Segolta (j^), Zarka (J^), and the connective T'lisha K'tannah {i^) always stand over the last letter of a word.

(Remarks on the Accents, G.) 1. As Signs of the Tone.

87 Words that are otherwise identical, are often dis- tinguished by the accent, e. g. -IJ^ ba-nu (they built),

•1^3 bdnu (in us) ; llDp kdind (she stood up), n!2p

kamd (standing up, fern.). So in English to contrast', a contrast : in Greek hjui, I am ; cl/ii, I shall go.

88 As a rule, the accents accompany the initial conso- nant of the tone-syllable. Some, however, stand only on the first letters of a word (prepositive) ; others only on the last letters (postpositive). The tone- syllable is therefore not discoverable by these.

II. ^5 sei'ving the purpose of punctuation.

89 Every verse is regarded in the figurative language of the Hebrew grammarians as a realm (diiio), go- verned by the great distinctive, or virtual /m// stop, at the end (imperator). According as the empire (i. e. verse) is large or small, varies the number of domini of different grades, which form the larger and smaller divisions.

90 Connectives (Servi) unite only such words as are closely connected in sense, as a noun with an adjec- tive, or with another noun in the genitive, &c. But two connectives cannot be employed together. If several words should be connected, Makkeph is used.

91 In very short verses few connectives are used ; sometimes none : for a small distinctive, in the vici- nity of a greater, has a connective power (servit domino majori). In very long verses, on the con- trary, connectives are used for the smaller distinc- tives (fiunt legati dominorum).

92 The choice of this or that connective depends on very subtle laws of consecution, with which the

§ 12.] The Accents, 31

learner need not trouble himself at present. It is (92) sufficient for him to know the greater distinctives, which answer to our period, colon, and comma; though they often stand where even a half comma would scarcely be admissible. They are most im- portant in the poetical books for dividing a verse into its members.

Reading Lesson,

[In the following Reading Lesson ** the names of the different 93 accents contained in it will be found by turning to the Table (85), with which the learner will do well to make himself familiar: otherwise, he will occasionally confound them with the \'owels, and, in many instances, be unable to determine whether Sh'va begins or ends a syllable, or whether the mark ( ^ ) be Kamets or Kamets Khatuph : and for this purpose we shall subjoin a passage in which the greater part of them is found." — Lee.]

JTT S' T " : J-

< T •• -«■•■:"':

<''. ' ~',\ T : a- T

]'2^ ]npv ^rhi^ y\2.\

T i • T V - : T • -

I T , '

A. 2 Kings i. 6.

Vai-yo-m'ru' e-lav, ish i>a-lah' lik-ra-the'-nu, vay-yo'-mer e- le-nu', I'chu' shu-bhu' el-ham- me'-lech ^sher-sha-lakh' eth- chem',v'dib-bar-tem' e-lav,coh' a-mar' Y'ho-vah', h^-mib-b'li' en-^lo-him' b'is-ra-^l' at-tah' sho-le'akh lid-rosh' b'bha'-)^al ! z'bhubh' «lo-he' i^ek-ron' ? la- chen' ham-mi^-^ah' *sher-i^a- li'-tha sham' lo-the-red' mim- men-nah ci-moth ta-muth.

32

Reading and Orthography, [ch. i. § 12.

(93)

B.

• v; T T • •• ;

1 T

T : I T V ; T T ; ' V I T T

nm

~ i ;

l^iDN"")

•|T-

B're-shith' ba-ra *lo-him' eth hash-sha-ma'-yim v'eth ha- a'-rets: v'ha-a'-rets ha-y'tha" tho-huva-bho-hu v'kh5'-shech i>al-p'ne' th'hom v'ru'-akh ^15-

him' m'ra-khe'-pheth i)al-p'ne' hara-ma-yim: vay-yo'-mer ^15- him y'hi or, va-y'hi-6r' : vay- yar" ^l6-him eth-ha-6r ci-^6bh vay-yabh-del *'l6-him ben ha-6r u-bhen ha-kho'-shech.

Exercise 11.

94 a) Write in English letters the following extract, and mark the tone-syllables —

vp'tsh '^^lOBti^Q ^3 1^^ ""D^P uvb nin>-Di<:3 h'^'^n ]:b

' ■.:\" • T : • J' A- : a- ' v: t : \; . - ^"t

• vjTT T VT|" • T :'• J"; •<;

b) Write in Hebrew characters the following ex- tract—

V'hannakhash hayah' i^arum mic-col khayyath hassadeh *sher i^asah Y'hovah ^lohim : vayyomer el-haishshah aph ci-amar *lohim 15" thochl'u mic-c5l i^ets haggan ?

CH. 2. § 1.] The Definite Article.

33

Chap, II. §1. The Definite Article.

The definite article is H ; its vowel is Pathakh 95 (-^5 a) ; and the following consonant receives Dagesh.

But since the gutturals and Resh cannot receive 96 Dagesh, a compensation is usually made for its omission by lengthening the vowel of the article into Kamets (t^ a) or Long Segol (••• [e =] e or a).

1) Khd.

2) Hd, ^d, when not tone-syllables, i 1) Hd, Vd, when tone-syllables.

n is used before

n is used before

2) Any guttural or Resh, except in the cases already enumerated.

Exception~\ . If, however, the vowel that follows is 97 not T or t:, words beginning with He or Kheth gene- rally take n for their article : that is, make no com- pensation for the omitted Dagesh.

Reading Lesson and Vocabulary.

I she'-mesh, 2 abh, gg

the sun. father,

3 em, 4 ish,

mother. man (vir).

5 re'-gel, 6 ^al,

foot. dew.

7 esh-col, 8 ba-nim,

hunch- of -grapes, sons,

9 he-chal, 10 ;Dam,

temple. people.

11 bar, 12 ha-rim,

mountain. mountains.

13 i?a-v6n, 14 khag,

guilt. religious feast.

nirr is ; ISkbo-akh, lekho-the'-metb,

I thistle. signet.

D*n 17 I 17 rum, 18 rophe", ^ height. physician.

(in pause) Q^^, Q^p 19 119 i^e'-lem; i?a-lem (in pause), ■•■ ■" ■•■ ■•■ i lad.

2ii 2 T	^'P!? 1
li/^N 4	Diji 3
^^ 6	bn ^
D^:i2 8 • T	bs:ipi^ 7
D'J 10 T	byn 9
onn 12 • T	"in 11 T
:\n 14 T	PP 13
nonh 16	mn 15 ^

j^Bi") 18

34

The Perfect and Imperfect of Kal. [ch. 2.

Exercise 12.

99 a) Write down the following words, with their meaning, in English letters —

jionhn 8 ninrr 7 :inn 6 ti^ptc^n 5

Q^OT 11 rx^yyn 10 Dnn 9

b) Write down in Hebrew letters —

1 the mother. 4 the foot. 7 the guilt.

2 the father. 5 the mountain. 8 the people.

3 the dew.

6 the mountains.

9 the man.

Chap. II. § 2. The Perfect and Imperfect o/Kal.

100 To enable the pupil to form complete sentences, I shall here give the two principal tensfes of the re- gular verb in its simplest conjugation; Kal (active).

101 The third singular of the Perfect of Kal is one of the simplest forms of the verb, and is usually con- sidered its root, or stem-form.

Perfect and Imperfect of the verb /^p, ka-/al, to kill.

102 Veriect {actio perfecta).

(Sing.) I

1. ^Phw ka-^al'-ti

• : i-'t i

j masc. phl^^) \ ka-^al'-ta "l ^' j fern. rb^) ka-/alt' ( masc. 7Z0p *ka-?ar

|-'t

fem. rhW ka-^ah'

Imperfect {actio infecta).

3. <

(Sing.)

bb\)rs

ek-^ol' tik-^ol' (m.) tik-^'ir (/.) yik-Zol' (m,) tik-tb\' (/.)

§ 2.] The Perfect and Imperfect of Kal,

35

(Plural.)

'masc. UpblQ'p ^* ^ fern. ]ri^^ip

3.

I :'|T

ka-Zal'-nu. k'^al-tem' ' k'fal-ten' ka-riu'

(Plural.)

(102)

nik-Zol' tik-flu (m.)

tik-^ol'-nah (/.) yik-fW {m.)

tik-tol'-nah (/.)

Observe that in the Perfect the persons are formed 103 by adding certain suffixes, or affirmatives {ti, td, &c.) to the third person or root.

a) These suffixes are fragments of the personal 104 pronouns ; ti, td, t, nil are added without any change

in the voivels of the root {kdtal-ti, -ta, -t, nu).

b) Before the suffixes tern', ten' (both accented), the first vowel of the root [Kamets) is changed into SWva [kHal-iem , -ten'). Before ah, u, the second vowel (Pathakh) is changed into Sh'va, the Kamets being retained.

The Imperfect (or, as many Grammarians call it, io5 the Future) is formed hy prefixing certain fragments of the personal pronouns to the radical letters, which are then pointed with Sh'va, and Kholem, nearly

always written defectively {Ftol, bb\)). The prefixes are for the singular (1) e- [X], (2) f-, (3) y'-, masc;

f-, fem. For the plural, (1) n'-, (2) t'-, (3) y'-, masc; f-, fem. And the second sing, fem., both second per- sons plural, and the third plural fem. have also a suffix: i (V) for thoti, fem.; u (1) for ye and they, masc. ; ndh (H^) for ye and they, fem. For the forms

that have the prefixes i, it, ^JOp is shortened into b^p;

The prefixes of the Imperfect (except Vi) properly io6

take Sh'va; but as two consonants standing together cannot both take vocal Sh^va, the Sh'va of the prefix is changed into Khirek. Aleph properly takes Khateph Segol (K) ; this is changed into Segol,

36 The Perfect and Imperfect of Kal, [ch. 2.

107 Tl^e meaning of the tenses will be explained when we con- sider the verb more regularly. At present the pupil is to ob- serve, that —

a) The Hebrew Perfect denotes a completed action, and is usually translated by our Vcrfect, or Perfect definite, or Plu- perfect: made, did make : have made; had made.

b) The Imperfect denotes an unfinished action, and is usually translated by the Future; sometimes, especially in general as- sertions, by the Present.

Exercise 13.

108 a) Write down in English letters the two following tenses of 1\jp pakad, to visit (with the English of

each person).

Perfect (or Preterite).

, ^ >

(Sing.)

; :'~ T

ip3

'-T

t'; t

(Plural.)

DmpD

•nra

thou (m.) thou (f.)

he she

we

ye (m.)

ye (f.)

they

Imperfect (or Future *).

(Sing.)

lpH)i^ npsji

ipS)^

(Plural.) "TpS)J

npH)!n nj-rpsn

I

thou (m.) thQU (f.)

he

she

we ye (m.)

ye (f.) they (m.)

they (f.)

b) Write down in Hebrew and English letters the Perfect and Imperfect of ")pti^ shamar, to keep; and

^J13 cathabh, to write,

- T

* Gesenius, after the old Grammarians, called it the Future. Dr. Lee calls it the Present; Ewald and Rodiger, the Imperfect.

§ 2.] The Perfect and Imperfect of Kal,

37

Vocabulary,

To be angry, ^)ip, ka-tsaph'.

To keep, to guard, to watch,

*1D^> sha-mar.

- T

To lie down, 2,^"^* sha-chabh'.

A king, *?T7D, me'-lech. To reign, '•\7l2f ma-lach'.

— T

To cease, to abate, pDU), sha-

thak'. To dwell with, ]2^, sha-chan'. To mix, to mingle, ^Vf2f nia-

5ach'. To pour out, to anoint, TTD^.

na-sach'. To cut off or down, /1"13, ca-

rath'. To spread, U^13, pa-ras'.

-T

To rage (tumultuously), ti^jn,

— T

ra-gash'. Pharaoh, ni^"lD, Par-^oh.

Discretion, counsel (in a bad sense, contrivance), nDTQ,

m'zim-mah (awd, za-mam, to devise).

Over -thee, TT**^^, i>a-le-cha. 109

Strife, contention, ^'nQ(av), ma-don (d^n, to plead).

Wisdom, nODrrCw), khSch. mah (kha-cham, to be wise).

Cunning, prudence, HDI^ (^)»

i^or-mah (i)a-ram, to be subtle).

Wine, ]*''», ya-yin. Upon, ^)J, TaX. Zion, pJi^J, Tsiy-yon. Twigs, D^^r^r, zal-zal-lim. A fool, ^>p3, c'^il.

Folly, rh^i^, iv-ve'-leth. A covenant, /T»12, b'rith. WhyF nD^?, lam -mah?

T T

Nations, Gentiles, D"*!])* go- yim.

Jl^'H^l D12y ^6 made a covenant, as refivuv opKia (Horn.),

• ; ~T

from the cutting up of the victims offered when a covenant was made.

E

38

The Perfect and Imperfect of KaL [ch. 2. § 2.

Exercise 14. no Translate the following sentences —

a) HDTD 2 : r^V'^B ^nip^ 1 T : - T ' V T : •

''/ijDii^ HD^n •'^^^ 6

• a;- T T : T • -;

a : |T TT '-T |T ; |T

"?I^D ^j;npp^ "':^5 lo : d;^:i

: nnBH

1 yik-tsoph Par-i?oh.

2 m'zim-mah tish-mor i?a-le- cha. 3 sha-chabh-ta. 4 yim- I'chu. 5 yish-tok ma-don. 6 *ni khoch-mah sha-chan-ti i?or-mah. 7 ma-5ach-<i. 8 ma-s'chah ya-yin. 9 1am- mah rag'-shu go-yim ? 10 ^ni na-5ach-ti me'-lech i)al- Tsiy-yon. 1 1 c'^il yiph'ros iv-ve'-leth. 12 nich-roth haz- zal-zal-lim. 13 ca-r'thu haz- zal-zal-lim. 14 ech-roth b'rith. 15 tish-mor hab-b'rith.

5) 1. I have mixed the wine. 2. We have made the cove- nant. 3. Ye (m.) have anointed the king. 4. I shall rage. 5. We raged. 6. We shall rage. 7. Why do ye (/.) rage ? 8. I shall keep the covenant.

Chap. III. §1. Gender of Substantives, Adjectives,

111 The Hebrew, like all other Semitic languages, has only two genders, the masculine and the feminine.

112 The masculine has no peculiar termination. The feminine terminations are —

«) H- (the most common).

b) Jl_ (unaccented) ; after a guttural /!_.

CH. 3. §1.] Gender of Substantives. Adjectives, 39

(Rarer forms; for reference.)

c) /!>-, Jl^ n\ 113

d) Jn_ often in proper names of the Phoenicians and

adjoining tribes.

e) Jl_ (almost exclusively poetical).

T

/) X_ (Aramaean for H-: chiefly in later writers).

T T

g) H— (weakened from H-) '> — very rare.

T

h) H— *" (unaccented).

T

*) HD- (in poetry).

T T

The names of countries and ^oz^^?25 are also usually 114 feminine, and the names of those members that are in pairs (as the hands, eyes, ears, &c.) .

Proper names are not distinguished by any peculiar 115 endings to mark the sex. Some feminines are formed from the corresponding masculines by appending a feminine termination ; but in the case of animals, the two sexes often have a peculiar name (as bull, cow in English) ; and many names of animals denote both sexes, as p'Q^ camel. &c. Even some names of ani-

^ T T ■'

mals with feminine terminations denote the male as well as the female : e. g. H^V (yonah), dove.

The adjective, when used attributively, follows its 116 substantive. If the substantive has the article, so has the attributive adjective. An adjective without the article following a substantive with one, is the predicate, the copula {is, was, &c.) being omitted.

So in Greek —

ri yvvi) r) Ka\r], the beautiful woman. 117

^ yvvr/ KoXr], the woman is beautiful.

Feminine nouns, both such substantives as have 118 corresponding feminine forms, and adjectives, are usually formed by adding H-, sometimes r\--, to

the masculine.

a) Masculines in H- form their feminine by chang- US

ing H- into 11-. Jl};i. nv'l (ro-yeh, ro-;^ah). E 2 ^

40 Gender of Substantives, Adjectives, [ch. 3.

(119) b) Those that end in Kheth or Ayin take the fern, in D-l (instead of Jl--i).

120 The changes made in the vocalisationhy appending the terminations cannot be explained at present: only observe —

1) a in the penult is changed into Sh'va when H— is added : ^n-l, nSlil (gadol, g'dolah).

2) The fern, from a noun with the vowels e'-e, takes a-a, "n /D. 713/6 (me'-lech, mal-cah) : the reason is, that the original form of (e. g.) 7tOp was 7J0p (with Pathakh).

Vocabulary,

121 King, ^bi, me'-lech.

Small, \i:ip, ka4an'. HiltDp,

k'^an-nah (/.)• To rule, b^!2, ma-shal.

— T ■ ',

A youth, lad, "T^J. na'-i^ar. Good, 2iZ0, tbhh. ■"'''

Father, ^^, abh.

T

Man, t£^>^^, ish. Brother, Hhi. akh.

T

Strong, liBIl, gib-bor. Sharp, "in, khad. TVin,

khad-dah (/.). Diligent, '^^^H*, kha-ruts.

n:ir)n> kh^r^-zah (/.).

Sincere, honest, D/n ())), tarn.

T

A (bright) spot on the skin, > JTin^l) ba-he'-reth.

White, ]n^, la-ban. H^lJ^,

I'ba-nah (/.). • Boy, nbl ye'-led;

Girl, ni?"', yal-dah (ya-lad,

to beget). iJerf, D'^^^, D*7^*, a-dom.

T T

Horse, D^D> stis; Mare, ilD^D) 5u-sah.

T

']''3li^, sac-cin.

^Arm/e-j j^'pj^Q (aw), ma-

w "che'-leth. To cut, "1T2), ga-zar.

— T

To grow, bl^, ga-dal. Scholar, l^fQ^jn (a), tal-mid.

nTD*?;^, tkl-mi-dah (/.). T • ; ~

To slaughter, ^r\1l}» sha-kha^.

Properly sharpened, fr. y^n.

§ 2.] Formation of the Plural,

(Eng.) The boy is good.

Ul) The boy he ,900c?. vneD.;|^2) The boy good.

He J^rin, hu«. She NM, hi».

41

122

Exercise 15.

«)-)^|n2:]^jj Kin i^'ii 1 112:1 Kin n^n 4 :pr

T T ""T

V V ~ ~ T ' T

V V — T 't V V T T ;

n^^_^ 11 ob^ in r?"^ 10

1 hay-ye'-led hti" ka-tan. 123

2 han-na'-i>ar hu" ^obh.

3 ha-abh h^" zaken. 4 ha-akh hu" gib-bor. 5 ha-ish tarn.

6 hab-ba-he'-reth I'ba-nah.

7 ye'-led ka-^an. 8 hay-ye'-led hak-ka-ian. 9 hay-ye'-led ka-^an. 10 sac-cin khad yig-zor. 11 yal-dah k'/an-nah ^ tig-dal. 12 tal-mi-dah kh'ru-ijp tsah til-mad. 13 ma-*che'-leth khad-dah tish-kha^

b) 1. The little girl will mix wine. 2. The red wine. 3. The *wine is red. 4. The knife is sharp. 5. They grew. 6. Ye ^{pl.) will grow. 7. The diligent scholar. 8. The scholar is diligent.

Chap. III. § 2. Formation of the Plural.

A. Masculine nouns form their plural by adding D"*-^ 124 [im') to the singular f-

a) Nouns in H- [eh] throw away this termina- tion before the D**- is appended.

* The Imperfect of an intransitive verb has usually Pathakh for its second vowel, instead of Kholem, in its dissyllabic forms.

f The plural termination is sometimes written defectively, as in Gen i. 21 : DJ^^-TI {tan-ni-nim).

E 3

42 Foymation of the Plural, [ch. 3.

125 B. Feminine nouns form their plural by adding JIT

{6th) to the singular.

a) If the singular ends in ath, eth, ah (/l- jn_, pf-), these terminations are changed into D") {6th).

b) If the singular ends in Uh {Pi\), the plural ends in iy-yoth (Jl'lV)*

c) If the singular ends in Hth (Jl^), the plural ends in uy-yoth (Jl*)"-).

Examples,

126 Singular. Plural. Meaning. Singular. Plural. A. D^ID D^D'ID 1 horse siis sus-iva.

a) n^ti^D D''i^D ' double, mish-neh mish-nim * • ' I second

b'er b'e-roth

t'hillah t'hil-loth

ig.ge'-reth ig-g'roth

<ab-ba-rath /ab-ba-i?6th :i^ibh-rith i)ibh-riy-y6th

mal-chuth mal-chuy- yoth

127 The addition of the plural terminations causes cer- tain changes of such vowels as are mutable; of which the following principal changes will be sufficient for the pupil at present.

a) a or e o( the penult (whether long or short [t, -, ", or v]) is usually changed into simple Sh'va, or, after a guttural, into Khateph Pathakh (-:), when the word becomes a trisyllable.

This arises from the transfer of the accent to the final syllable, which causes the antepenult to be pronounced short.

B. -INB

a) riynr\

T • ;

Jinny

Plural.	Meaning.
D>p!1D	j horse
D^^i^p	! double, second
rinh^n	well
D)br(r\	\ i hymn (of praise)
nnili;^	letter
ni^rn^	ring
nvnao^	Hebrewess
m:ibr2 \ : -	kingdom 1

§ 2.] Formation of the Plural, 43

b) a or e {- or •••) in the final syllable of a word is (l27) changed into d (t),

He„ce(by«,6)wehave{j;|'|,.k;taUm.

(Nouns of these forms are of very frequent occurrence. Observe that their plurals are alike.)

c) So nouns ending in *•--, from verbs Lamed He,

change Khirek into Kamets, and end in d-yim [pHi,pHd-yim).

d) Feminines with e short { ••• ) in the penult, change it into d (t) in the plural.

(In other respects the feminine undergoes little change in the formation of the plural, because the necessary vowel changes have already been made on appending the femi- nine termination.)

e) Nouns in d'-veth, d'-yith (DI-j •'^y? contract these syllables into (Jl% IV-) 6th, efh, before appending the plural termination im,

f) Nouns defective from verbs with double Ayin, dagesh the final consonant before im is added, and shorten the preceding vowel ; changing d, e, o into a, e, u respectively.

g) Vowels that have their homogeneous vowel-letter quiescent, are amongst those that are immutable, and therefore remain in the plural : e. g. a, e, i, o, u

Singular.	Plural.	Examples, Masculine. Meaning.	Singular.	Plural.
nan T 1*	Dnnn • T •	word	da-bhar	d'bharim
DDri	D^QDn	wise	kha-cham	kh»cha-mim
VS^	d^:d^	neighbour	sha-chen	sh'che-nim
•• T	D^'p;^y	sluggard	i>a-tsel	)>nse-lim
T ••	D^J^:	a cluster of grapes	)>e-nabh	i^'na-bhim

128

44

(1.28)

Formation of the Plural,

Singular.	Plural.
i?\
"^y^	any: • T •
jn;^	• T
Ai	Q'-O'?.
^^^^♦(av)	D^ii'pD
prjt(ad)	• • T
It^Ud)	U]^t
rycd)	Dny
n5 (h)	• T '
m^^Q	D^^I^p

'tt ;

nkpiicoiy)

T-;

n^it

w I

(a;) n'ln^^^

Meaning. king

lad house

olive

inn

shield

tooth

goat

a kid

double, second

Feminine, justice

handmaid counsel crown

coat remnant

Singular, me'-lech

na-i)ar ba-yith

za'-yith ma-16n ma-gen

shen

g'di mish-neh

ts'da-khali

shiph-khah

i)e-tsah

X'^'-te-reth

c'tho'-neth

sh'e-rith

she-rith

[CH. 3. Plural, m'la-chim

n'i^a-iim ba-tim

ze-thim m'lo-niin

ma-gin-

nim**

shin-na'-yim

i^iz-zim

g'da-yim

mish-nim

ts'da-koth

(righteous acts) sh'pha-khoth

i?e-ts6th

ys^-t^-voih.

cut-to-noth sh'e-riy-yoth

129 a) Some masculine substantives have a plural of the feminine form, in 6th; and (^), vice versa, some feminines a plural of the masculine form^ in im. In both cases, however, the gender of the singular is usually retained in the plural. Such, for instance, are —

* p7, \im, to lodge.

X l^ti^j sha-nan, to sharpen.

~ T

II Yy>, ya-i^ats, to counsel. ** Obs. a in antepenult.

t ]Ji), ga-nan, to cover. H li^Ii^j sha-ar, to remain.

§ 2.] Formation of the Plural.

45

father	abh
name	shem
voice	kol
word	mil-lah
dove	y6-nah

a-bhoth she-moth ko-loth mil-lim yo-nim

130

Some nouns have both a masculine and feminine 131 termination in the plural, as —

n^^ I u^r}V, ri\r\v 11 '*^^ 11 ^^th li^it-tim, i?it-t6th.

In adjectives and participles the plural endings im and 4th are 132 confined to the masculine and feminine genders respectively. D^^iJO <6-bhim (boni), good (masc.) : JIOIIO ^6-bh6th (bonae),

good (fern.)'

So in substantives from the same stem, when the terminations 133 denote the different sexes : D''J2 ba-nim^ sons; JliJ^l ba-noth,

daughters.

Exercise 16.

Write down in Hebrew and English letters, the plural (with and without the definite article) of the following nouns —

A way,

A child, A lie, A fool,

A vineyard, A part, A proverb.

^'T] de'-rech.

"h^ ye'-led.

^T3 ca-zabh.

7^1 na-bhaU

T T

>

D13 cS'-rSm. \hn khe'-lek. 7*^Q ma-shal.

A cluster "\ of grapes,}

22^ i^e-nabh.

T"

A hypocrite, t]^r7 kha-neph.

Afool, ^03 c'-sil. 134

A tongue, ]Wp la-shon.

A garment, TwD^ sim-lah.

A lamb.

People, nation.

'^l? ce'-bh6s. D^(d) i^am.

A thresh-^ old, step \ ^^... V. t, before a[ ^P^^^ ^^P^' door,

A bear.

"J

A nest, a cell.

]

n^(d) dobh. ^[p(d) ken.

46

Participles of Kal.

[CH. 3.

Chap. III. § 3. Participles of Kal with their /em- nine 2ia& plural forms.

135 The verb in Kal has two participles : one active, in o-e ; another passive, in d-ui as ko-tel, kd-tul.

136 Their forms for gender and number are (to take the participles of kd-tdl as examples) —

Active.

Sing. ^lOp rhhh {orD^^h) ko-te] ko-^e'-leth

Plur. D^7Z0p D'bW ko-riim ko-t'loth.

Passive.

Sing, bmp nh)::i\)

ka-^ul k7<i-lah k'/u-lim k'/u-16th

137 The participle is often used as a predicate to ex- press (usually) the Present tense.

138 A participle, alone or with the definite article, is equivalent to he who — with the verb (like 6 jSouXo- ILLevog =: he who wishes, in Greek) ; but it may denote any tense : (73j no-phel = he that falls, or he that

has fallen, or he that will fall), though it has most frequently the meaning of the Present.

Vocabulary.

139 Counsel, H^tQ («'«'), m'zim-

T • ;

mah. Herd, oxen, ^p^,, ba-kar.

'tt

River, inX na-har. To rule, 7^0, ma-shal.

— T

Wives, U^WI (/• with m.

• T

term.).

To judge, tOBti^, sha-pha^. A judge, I03iti^, sho-phe^ Light, luminary, 'y\i^'0, ma-6r,

T

pl' rh^'O, m'o-roth. To surround, ^^D (d), 5a-

~ T

bhabh. Garden, ]]) (d), gan.

7ti^iD or 7ti^D, mo-shel, ruling: ruler.

§ 3.] Participles of Kal,

Exercise 16.

• T ; ~ ' ; • ' V V ~

T - ; • • T -

nmn 12 :]bi!) "^^^^l:D^ n

T T — 't T —

Qn^> 13 tiin niDPr

U'T'^v 15 :npS;*D^ijnn D^'^: 16 :r\\T Dnri

47

1 ham-me'-lech yim-loch. 140

2 ham-m'la-chim. 3 ham- mal-cah thim-loch. 4 ham- mS-shel yim-shol. 5 ham-mo- she'-leth tim-shol. 6 hara- mo-sh'lim yim-sh'lu. 7 hash- sho-ph'/im yish-ph'/u. 8 hal- la-bhi" yl^r6ph. 9 ham-ma-6r' hag-ga-dol'. 10 ham-m'o-roth' hag-g*d6-lim. 11 ham-ma-6r' ka-^on'. 1 2 han-na-har' ha5- 50-bhebh hag-gan'. 13 y'la- dim k'^an-nim yig-d'lu. 14 tal-mi-dim h"-riits-tsim yil-m'du. 1 5 sac-ci-nim khad- dim yig-z'ru. 16 na-shim tam-moth.

a) 1. Write down the plural of-

141

1p3, ba-kar, herd; oxen.

'tt

in J na-har, river: pi. both

■^ "^ im and 6th.

7p^ she'-kel, shekel. ]2| gan (d), a garden.

b) Translate into Hebrew (using both Hebrew and English letters) —

1. The sharp knives will cut. 2. The gardens are small. 3. The small gardens, 4. The shields are large. 4. The knife is sharp. 5. The knives are sharp. 6. The rulers.

c) Write down the Perfect, Imperfect, and the two participles with /em. s. and plur. m. and/, of shathal, to plant.

f^ The th (Jl) will become t {rS) when a consonant imme- 142 diately precedes it.

d) \. The great rivers. 2. The rivers are great ("ones). 3. The clusters are small. 4. The great cluster. 5. 'J'he dogs. 6. The

48 The Dual Number. [ch. 3.

(142) little lambs. 7- Gardens. 8. The gardens are large. 9. The rivers which surround the gardens.

Chap. III. § 4. The Dual number,

143 The Dual number of substantives (to which that number is confined) denotes two of the things in question. It is formed from the singular by adding ayim; but the final H of a feminine noun is changed into D before the termination is added. The SI of the termination D- remains.

144 The Dual number is nearly confined to natural or artificial objects that exist in pairs; or either are, or are conceived to be, double : e. g. the two legs, hands, ears, eyes of the human body : a pair of scales, shoes, &c. ; (the space of) two years {— biennium). It is also found in the numerals 2, 12, 200, &c.

145 Substantives in _!. (i. e. segolate substantives)

now and then take the same vowels in the root as the plural does; that is, Sh^va and Kamets (-r)? but usually contract the two syllables with Segol into one with Pathakh,

Vocabulary,

146 Sing.	Dual.
T
DV	d;dv
	• - : \ :
n.^	D'^IPl
	D>^Sp \\
br^	o:^n
"^n	^tiv.i

Sing, yad yom

sa-phah n'kho'-sheth

ke -ren

rS'-gel

Dual.

ya-da-yim yo-ma-yim

s*pha-tha'-yim n'khiishta'-yim

kar-na-yim "] k'ra-na -yim /

rag-la-yim

na.i>»la-yim

Meaning.

hand; two hands.

day: two succes- sive days (=biduum).

lip: two lips, fetter: two fetters.

horn: two horns, foot: two feet, shoe ; pair of shoes.

§4.]		77ie Dual Number,
^n^^		6-zen	6z-na'-yim (83, c) "] !
1?.^^	D^^mb	mo-zen	moz-na'-yim j
"\v:	Q'^'-t?	i^a-yin	)^e-na'-yim
"^ll	D'?1?	be'-rech	bir-ca-yim
^^*	D]?^	aph	ap-pa'-yim
	D^nj^^pt	mel-kakh	mel-ka-kha'-yim
	• - T		sha-ma-yim

49

(^the two) ears. (h6) pair of scales, eye; {the two) eyes.

knee; {two) knees, nose; nostrils, tongs; snuffers, heavens.

Weak, nS)") (ff' (131) ra-pheh.

V T T T

Straight, '-)t'' (fr. '^]D\ to be

T T ~ T

straight), ya-shar. Pan; spoon, C]3 /. (d), caph.

Evil; bad, yi, with distinctive

accent p"l (/. n^"l), rai>, (partcp. Kal).

T T T

ra-)^ah.

Exercise 17.

. — -J. y. ,- .. y

D^DJDDH 12 :Jli^li)

. - 1- • . - .

Breeches, DJDD («)> mich-nci5. 147 Black, '^fvi)i sha-khor.

T

To be in pain, ^^^^, ca-ebh.

•• T

Pained; inpain, ^J^i3, c6-ebh

1 hayyad raphah. 2 hare'- 148 gel y'sharah. 3 hashshen

coe'bheth, 4 haccaph k'^an- nah. 5 haaph g'd5lah.

6 hayyadayim raphoth.

7 haragla'yim y'sharoth.

8 hashshinna'yim co'bhoth.

9 haccappayim k'^annoth.

10 hai^enayim rai^oth. H haappa'yim g'doloth. 12 hammichnasa'yim sh'kho- roth. 13 hammelkakha'yim g'doloth. 14 hashshamayim m'sapp'rim.

6) 1. The knees. 2. The evil eyes. 3. The evil eye. 4. The eyes are evil. 5. Black breeches. 6. Weak hands.

* For P)^St fr. C]i^^. t From npb, to take hold of.

50 The Construct State. [ch. 3.

Chap. III. §5. The Construct State {Status constructus),

149 When one substantive modifies another without being in apposition to it, it is placed in the relation of a genitive case. In Hebrew, the genitive case of a substantive is like the nominative, but the substantive it modifies (the governing substantive, as we should call it in most other languages) undergoes some change of its mutable vowels.

150 ^^W The governing substantive is said to be in construction, or in the construct state.

151 The general rules for the change of vocalization produced by the construct state are these : —

A. In the singular.

152 a) Kamets (a) in the penultima is changed into

Sh'va ; in the ultima, mostly into Pathakh.

b) Tsere [e) in the penultima is mostly changed into Sh^va when the ultima has Kamets (a). In the ultima it is generally changed into Pathakh, but usually retained after -, and in monosyllables.

c) The feminine termination Jl- (ah) is chaqged into D- (ath) : the other feminine terminations T)-, r)\, jy\, -Hi {eth, ith, nth, 6th) are immutable.

B. In the plural and dual.

d) U\, U\- [im,ayim) are changed into *'- (e).

153 There is often a further vowel-change in the con- struct state of the plural, and a contraction of a semi-syllable (with Sh^va) with the following syllable.

154 Two very common forms of verbal derivatives re- quire particular attention : those in -.p-^ (da-bhar), and (segolates) in __!_ (me'-lech). Their changes are given in the following Table ; —

§5-]

The Construct State.

51

Singular.

Absolute.

T T

dabhar me'lech

Construct. d'bhar me'lech

Plural.

(154)

Absolute. d'bharim

• T ;

m'lachim

Construct. dibhre malche

Dissyllable feminines in H- which have a mutable 155

Kamets or Tsere in the penult, change that vowel into SNva by the general rule (153), and take the termi- nation ath (/!-). In trisyllables of this kind with

initial Sh^va, there is a contraction of 1 « into one syllable in t ; as ts'dd-kah, construct tsid-kdth : pi. ts'dd'koth, construct tsid-koth^.

The complement ■\ of an adjective or participle also 156 causes the governing ?idi]eci\\Q or participle to assume the construct state. Thus, in such combinations as would express in Hebrew, ^ the pure in heart,' ' void of understanding,' 'fearing the Lord.'

T

TThB to-rah

T

ini dabhar

T T

^B pe'-leg

TTI^ de'rech

Tj; i^ed (V)

b'^m 1DM2 T : ~

m^5ar hascel

torath Y'ho- vah

dibhre kh"- chamim

palge ma'yim

de'rech] jna'- darche veth

)^ed *meth

the instruction of 157 wisdom.

the law of Je- hovah.

words of wise men.

brooks of waters.

(the) way | ^f

death.

ways

awitness of truth.

* Compare this with ttitttw, yi'yvo/ictt, which arise from tts- 7re-ra>, yt-ys-vojuai.

f i. e. a substantive that is connected with it objectively, to complete its notion.

X D^D only in plural from obsol. '•Q. In constr. ''D.

f2

52

The Construct State.

[CH. 3.

(157) r]9]i^ ivve'leth U^bV^ D^i^

T T

• T ' ;

ivve'leth c'si- m the folly of fools. lim j

i^"shan hayir | the smoke of the city.

i)*dath tsaddi- ; ^Ae congregation kira 1 1 of the just.

A dependent genitive may have another genitive dependent upon it, as niH'' JlH^ tili^, Cron b'rith Y'hovah), the ark

of the covenant of the Lord.

158 As a general rule the article does not stand before a substantive that has a dependent genitive^ since that genitive sufficiently defines the word.

159 Eden, pj;, i^e'den.

Flute, organ, 2,^)^, i^ugabh. Jubal, by\\ Y^bhal. Wilderness, I^IIQ («), mid-

bar. Judah, T}1)T\\ Y'h^dah, Hair, '^^'^, sei^ar.

T ••

Esau, Vti;^, i^esav.

Palace, temple, T'DTIj hechal.

Sanctuary, ti^'^pD («)* mik-

dash. Brother, J^i^, akh.

T

Side, '?r"T', yarech (lit. thigh). Altar, HHTD («)» mizbeakh. Shoulder, P)in3 (constr. P)r)3) catheph.

Vocabulary.

Blessing, JlDIB (w)> b'rachah. -4 c?w^, n"ll?p (w)> k'i^arah. Silver, P)D3> ce'seph. Cffue, nn^D* («wv), m'i^arah. Machpelah,' phBDD, Mach-

pelah. Corpse, rw22f(.(^)> n'bhelah. Fear, n")')IlD («w), m'gorah.

T ;

Wicked, ^:^"|, rasha^.

T T

Jeremiah, ^n''D"lS Yirm'yahii.

T ; ;•

0/c?, ]pT, zaken. "j

The elders, D''JpT, z'kenim. | City, -)>:i7, )^ir. * House, TV^, bayith(c5/r.JT'3,). Court, l^jrij khatser.

t 73 J> nabhal, to fall of.

§5.]

The Construct State,

53

Exercise 18. «) :mn^ na"7 2 t^-TV "in: l l n'har i^eden

rani 12 -b™ TOpn'ii

np^ib '19 ' :"i7Ji^ *'"?.l!^^^"^ :nVn >j|pr 20 ' -h^i'^'n n>;rr 22 ' -.mrr '':5t^"2i

2 d'bhar 160 Y'bovah. 3 musar Y'hovah. 4 i^ugabh Yubhal. 5 mid- bar Y'hudah. 6 I'bhabh ish. 7 s'i^ar i^esav. 8 hechal

hammikdasb. 9 esheth

heakh. 10 ye'rech hammiz- beakh. 11 kbochmatb adam. 12 bircath Y'hovab. 13 ka- i?^rath ce'seph. 14 m'i^arath hammachpelah. 15 nibhlath ish. 16 tsidkath adam.

17 dibhre Yirm'yahii.

18 nab*re i^e'den. 19 mu- sare heabhoth. 20 zikne hal^ir.

21 sh'chene habbayith *.

22 kh^tsere hammikdash.

23 birce haish.

h) 1. Rivers. 2. Rivers of the earth. 3. Words. 4. The words of the king. 5. The law of Jehovah. 6. The knees of a man. 7. The eyes of Esau.

Chap. IV. § 1. Suffixes deflating Possession.

The Hebrew language possesses a very peculiar I6i way of denoting the possessive pronoun^ which is this : —

a) Short suffixes (which are abridged form's of the personal pronouns) are attached to nouns in their construct state, with which they cohere so firmly, that the noun with its suffix forms a single word.

h) From the frequent occurrence of these forms, and the changes of vocalization which they sometimes occasion, they may be considered as belonging to the declension of Hebrew nouns.

* a for a, from the effect (to be explained hereafter) o{ pause.

f3

54 Suffixes denoting Possession. [ch. 4.

162 The possessive suffixes in their most usual form are : —

I. For Singular Nouns.

m.

My

Thy TJ_ His-her *)

m. f.

i

ech ahh

— cha

m.

/.

Our ?)J

Your UD ID

Their D- ]-

m. f.

Tit

chem chen

am

an

II. For Plural Nouns.

•>_

My

Thy Tf''- •^;_

His-her V- Jl^

ai

e-cha ayich av e-ha

Our !)^'»_

Your uy- ]y-

TheirUr}'^- PV

e-n^

e-chem e-chea

e-hem e-hen

163 The suffixes are divided into grave (or accented) suffixes {chem', chen, hem', hen) ; and light (or un- accented) suffixes.

164 Masculine Noun.

Singular. D^D ^^Sy 0, horse. ''D^D su-si, my horse. "^O^D su-s'chsi, thy horse.

^O^V su-sech,

thy (f.) horse.

iD^D su-so, his horse.

HD^D 5u-sahh, her horse.

T >

•I^D^D su.-se'-nu,our horse.

DDDID 5u-s'chem', '•■ • your horse.

pD^D «u-5'chen', " • your (f.) horse.

DDJ)0 5u-5am, "^ their horse.

^ their (f.) horse.

Feminine Noun. *

Singular.

HD^D 56-sah, a mare.

T

''ilD^D 6'u-5a~thi, my mare.

• T

^JID'ID 5-u-5a'-th'cha,

• '"^ thy mare.

"^DDID 5u-5a-thech,

" ^ ^% (f.) mare.

iilDID 5^-5a-th6, his mare.

T

n/lDID su-«a-thahh, her

\ "^ ware.

•IJJID-ID 5^-sa- the'-nu,

" ^ owr mare.

03/^D.')D 5u-sath-chem',

" • ~ your mare.

"prW^D sn-sath-chen' ,

■*■ • ~ your (f.) mare.

DJID^D 5u-5a-tham,

'" "^ their mare.

]J1D1D 5u-sa-than,

■^ ^ Meir (f.) mare.

§!•]

Suffixes denoting Possession.

55

Plural.

D^DID 5u-5im, horses.

>D1D 5u-5ai, my horses.

>

^''D^D 5u-se-cha,

thy horses. >

lyD^D su-5a-yich,

thy (f.) horses.

VD^D «u-5av, his horses.

T

n''D')D 5u-se-ha,

"^ ■' Aer horses.

>

•1^''D1D 5u-5e'-nu,

owr horses.

DD'^D-ID «u-5e-chem', " ■■ your horses.

]D''D^D *u-5e-chen', ■•■ ** your (f.) horses.

DIT'D^D su-5e-hem', • " their horses.

IIT'D^D 5u-se-hen', '" " their (f.) horses.

Plural.

JliD^D 5^-50 th, mares.

''Jl'lD^D 5U-56-thai, my mares. > ^^JliD^D 5u-s6-the-cha, thy mares. >

'^''JliD^D 5u-56-tha'-yich, thy (f.) mares.

VJniD^D 5u.-s6-thav, "^ ^is mares.

n"'Jl')D^D 5u-56-the-lia, "^ " her mares.

^Try\D^D su-so-ihe'-nu, our mares.

DD''JliD1D 5u-56-the-chem', " " your mares.

P''JliD^D 5u-56-the-clien', " " your (f.) mares.

DrC'JliD-ID su-5o-the-hem', " *" their mares.

]n''/liD1D 5u-56-the-hen', • " their (f.) mares.

165

The changes in the form of the plural suffixes arise from the 166 blending of >— (e), the termination of the construct state, with

the proper suffixes.

a) Nouns in eh (PF-) throw away eh, and for 6, 167 his, have e-hu pn-) : as j^a-le-hu, his leaf (^Twy).

b) Nouns in i with Yod quiescent {^-), from verbs

in ah {Lamed He), sound the Yac? before a suffix with initial vowel: ,as HB, p'n, fruit ; i^'lSj

pir-yo, his fruit. ^

c) The plural termination 6th (Di) takes e (y after it to support its suffixes.

56 Suffixes denoting Possession. [ch. 4.

[Additional Remarks on the Suffixes [G.] *). 168 I. pers. anu- (^J_) is sometimes found (for e-nw) in pause.

T

II. pers. -chdh is found, rarely, and chiefly with short words, for 'chd (HD- for ^-)-

(fern, sing.) dch sometimes, but only in pause, for ech C!J_ for n_).

e-cheh for ech (Nah. 2, 14), (HD- for "?[_).

e'-cht is found now and then, but only in later writers (e. g. Ps. cxxxvii. (j), CJ for ^_).

III. /?er5. 1) sinff. m. ho (sometimes), e-hu (rarely), for d

(n, J)n_ for )). I"

2) fern. sing. Jl- for n_ (sometimes) : i.e. h loses its

T T

guttural pronunciation f .

3) plur. ahamX for am (QH for Q_).

d'-mOf only in poetry, for «m§ (iD_ for D_).

T T

fem.) 'hen' but rarely, with a consonant preceding, and the tone (e. g. Gen. xxi. 28, Vbhad-d'hen'

pin"?).

a-K'ndh antique (n^H ) for an.

a'-A'wa^, e-«a^, both a few times for a» (JUH— , ilJ— )•

T ; |- T|V

* These are only placed here for future reference, t In later writers even written J^_.

X In pause cul-ld'-ham (DH^S), 2 Sam. xxiii. 6.

-|T\ § Occasionally in very small words (as prepositions) for 0 (his) : e. g. '\1±> for i':^.

§'•]

Suffioees denoting Possession,

57

Examples.

T

T T

T

T T

rbyo (f.)

T \ ;

da-m^cha, thy (m.) hlood. d'bha-ri, my word. d'bha-rai, my words. shu-i>a-16, his fox. z'ke-nech, thy (f.) old man. z'ke-ne-cha, thy (m.) old men. z'ke-ne-nu, our old men.

siph-rahh, her book. mo-th'chem', your (m.) death. g'mal-lam, their camel.

n"jH)p

T - ;

''Jli^-DD s'gul-16-thai, my treasures.

169

03n^^ na-)^*re-chem', your (m.) youths.

•IJ^b sal-le-nu, OMr basket,

^ybv 5al-le-nu, our baskets.

"•Jl^^D cal-la-thi, m^/ bride.

• T -

VJliJti^ sh'no-thav, his years.

P^/llDti^ sh'mo-the-chen', your (f.) names.

]n''Jn')"lir> to-ro-the-hen', /^eir (f.) /aw5.

The vowel changes, produced by the alteration of i7o accent which the appended suffix occasions, will be fully given in the Paradigms of the declensions : we will at present only consider two important classes :

g) dissyllables with a

1

l^'l, da-bhar.

^ l^for each vowel "^

b) dissyllables with e [^"^ '^'*^" vuvvcij ,_Lj^^ me'-lech (penacute).

(It will be sufficient to give one example of a grave and one 171 of a light suffix.)

58

171)

a) Sing.

Plur.

li) Sing.

Plur.

a) Sing. Plur.

b) Sing. Plur,

Suffixes denoting Possession.	'en, 4
Absolute.	Construct.	Light suffix.	Grave suffix.
T T	'^^l	nil ,	D5"in^
Dnn'7	ni-i	~ T ;	DDnn"i
#	'U	'^^bt^	^^t>^
	ob/*;:		^?'t>^
da'bhar	d'bhar	d'bhari	d'bharchem'
d'bharim	dibhre	d'bharai	dibhrechem'
me'lech *	me'lech	malchi	malc'chem'
m'lachira	malche	m'lachai	malcechem'
	Vocabui	lary.

172 Way, 1J-}"rf, de'rech.

Pleasantness, D^^» noi)am. Thou, ^il^^J attah. Glory, "Ti^D, cabhod.

T

Bach, 2^ (r), gabh (<v Lat.

gibbus?). Palace, ~\ Temple,^"^?^' ^^'^^^•

Everyman,-^ ^,^^ .^^ (lit. Each {one),] ^^^^

A sack, r\nDt2i^> amta- - )- ; - khath.

Commandment, HliiD («)> mits-

vah.

Statute, npn, khukkah.

't \

Law, min («)j torah.

Upon, bv* i^al.

To keep, "^OVJ, shamar.

~ T

A rite, 'IQ^D («), mishmar.

T ; •

To open, HJIB. pathakh.

- T

To plough, ^nn>' kharash. Mountain, "lHj bar.

T

Silver, l > Money, p?^' '^''^'^^- Tongue, pt^'?, lashon. Dog, 2b3, ce'lebh. Weight, bptD («), mishkal.

't I '

Song, *T>^, shir.

To put on (« dress) or be clothed ivith, t^37, labhash (fut.

- T

yilliash). Priest, iris, cohen.

Testimony, JllV' i^edah.

* The e' {-^) to be pronounced with the obtuse a sound of e in mhe, or e in there.

§'■]

Suffixes denoting Possession,

59

Exercise 19.

a) :''r)-1^'^ i3-)"7 1

~ •• : ~ T V T :

•inns 5 *: ?T Jip '^D^n 4

nbiir> 6 : innjppN^ ^''^^
	'0''^?*	^hnai^p
•1 T	^zr^j; 7	T •
^^^^1	•^T^Jii^ 8 1 ., -. ,	:*D>t^-|rT
?f^;ii npt^,^ 9 ,	•Pli
DH'on-Di'io	• '0'"?^
	•-'niv nn^^

1 darco shamarti. 2 d'racheha 173 darche-noi^am. 3 attah Y'h5- vah c'bhodi. 4 hechal kod- sh'cha. 5 path'khu ish

amtakhto. 6 yishmor mish- marti, mitsvothai, khukkothai, v'thorothai. 7 i^al-gabbi kha- r'shu khor'shim. 8 coh^necha yilb'shu tse'dek. 9 yTshm'ru bhanecha bh'rithi. 1 0 gam- b'nehem yishm'ru )>edothi.

b) 1. Write down in Roman characters, and give the English of —

nOI^ 15 n3-T^ 14 DOII 13 •'3-)^ 12 D3T1 u

2. Translate into Hebrew —

1. The mountain of his holiness. 2. Thy (m.) ways have we kept. 3. We will keep the ways of Jehovah. 4. Our sacks. 5. Your (m.) money. 6. Its (m.) weight. 7. Our money. 8. The tongue of thy dogs. 9. Your (m.) songs.

My silver. His silver. Their silver. Your (m.) silver. Thy (/.) silver. Their (m.) silver. Our silver.

Dogs. The king's

dogs. My dog. My dogs. Their dogs. Your (/.) dogs. His dog. ^ Her dogs.

Proverbs. The pro- verbs of Solomon f . Her proverb. His proverb. My proverb. My proverbs. Their proverbs. Your (/.) proverbs.

* tC^lirfj kho-resh (partcp. act. of kha-rash=), one who ploughs, a plougher.

60 .. Relations of Case. [ch. 4.

Chap. IV. § 2. Prepositions denoting the Relations

of Case,

174 Dative]

a) The relation of the dative case is expressed by the preposition 7 prefixed to a noun, and co- hering with it.

b) Sometimes the preposition 7^, el (of which 7 is an abbreviation), is used: D")IlX~7h^5 (el- Abhram).

175 Accusative] The accusative is either —

a) Hke the nominative, and therefore to be known (as in EngUsh) only by the structure of the sentence ;

b) denoted by (n^^ or "ilN^) eth or eth- (with Mahkeph) : before suffixes also jlii^, 6th,

These prepositions are not used before the ace, unless the noun is defined either (1) by the article, (2) or by being in construct state, or (3; by a suffix, or (4) from being di. proper name.

c) The ace. of the place towards which motion is directed, has often its original termination H-

(which sometimes denotes the place where). The preposition b is also sometimes prefixed

to it.

d) The accusative alone sometimes denotes in Hebrew both the place ivhither, and the place where.

e) The person to whom motion is directed has usually the preposition 71^ {el) prefixed, as the

place whither sometimes has.

f) Both the ti?ne when and the time hoiv long are also denoted by the accusative; which also denotes relations of space (how wide, how deep, &c.) and other adverbial relations : e. g. such

§ 2.] Relations of Case. «61

as are expressed in English by as to; in respect (i75) of; according to ; in.

(See remarks on the use of 3 in the next §.)

Ablative Relation] \>jq

a) The ablative relation is generally denoted by ]Q.

from [of 1= some of; ex], which, however, is usually abridged, either into D with a compen- sating Dagesh in the initial consonant of the word ; or, if this is incapable of receiving Da- gesh (i. e. is a guttural or Resh), into Q, 7ne. '" But f2 may stand before H : as JO'inD (Gen. xiv. 23).

b) The ]t2 is seldom written at length as a separate word, except before the article.

c) The relations denoted by in, at, with, are also expressed by the prepositional prefix ^.

Expression of genitive relations by ?]. The relations 177

of belonging to or being possessed by, proceeding from, and the like, are sometimes expressed by the pre- positional prefix (of the dative) 7. This occurs par- ticularly

1) after an indefinite governing noun, when its indefiniteness is to be marked ;

2) after a noun in the construct state which has already one dependent genitive ;

3) when the governing noun has an adjective with it;

4) after specifications of number.

The 7 denoting possession is also sometimes pre- 178

ceded by the relative pronoun ^Ii^^5, ichich. Thus :

rT'Ili^? IV'^ \ik'i7\, hatstson »sher I'abhiah \_grex qui patri

ejus: sc. erat'\y (lit. the flock which [was] to her father =) her father's flock.

With respect to the pointing of b', V,

a) Their regular Sh^va is changed into Khirek, when 179

the initial consonant of the vowel to which they

are prefixed has Sh'va.

G

A

62 Relations of Case, [ch. 4.

(179) b) Before an initial vowel with a Khateph^ they take the vowel with which the Khateph is com- pounded.

c) Before monosyllables or penacute * dissyllables they (as Vav also does) often take Kamets.

d) Before the article, they usually displace it, and . take its pointing.

e) Before D\'i7i^ they take Tsere (the J«^ becoming quiescent) \ and before ^1^^ Pfl^^fl^^; because the Jews

T ;

did not pronounce this sacred name, but that of "»^*7J^

instead ; to indicate which they gave to its prefixes the Pathakh which the prefix of Adonai would have.

180 Rule c does not ahvays hold good. These prefixes take Kamets (1) before infinitives of the above-mentioned form (except before the genitive) ; (2) before many pronominal forms, and (3) when the word is so closely connected with what precedes, as to be disconnected from what follows.

181

T V T

n"jnn

Examples.

I'da-vid, to David.

eth ha-a-rets, the earth.

ethsha-ra-ki'-a)^, the expanse.

ne-tse" has-sa-deh, let us go out into the field.

beth a-bhi-cha, in the house of thy father .

ba-bhe'-lah, to Babylon {^omQ A

times : in Babylon). \T\ localis

ha-ha-rah, to the mountain, f (local He).

be-thah y6-5eph, into Joseph's house (where obs. that it follows a noun in Stat, constr.).

li-sh'6'-lah, to Sheol.

hay-yom, (the =) this day : to-day.

i^e'-rebh, at evening.

* i. e. those that are Mitel; i. e. have the accent on ihe penult.

§2.]

niwn nphri]

VT- .'-:v {

Relations of Case, 63

she'-sheth ya-mim, (during) six days. ( 1 8 1 ) hac-cis-se", in respect of the throne, peh e-khad, with one mouth. min ha-a'-rets, from the earth. mits-ts'bha, out of the host. me-kha-zak, from the powerful. ben I'yi-shai, a son of Jesse's.

khel-kath has-sa-deh l*bho-i?az, a portion of the field of Boaz.

ben e-khad la-*khime'-lech, one of the sons of Ahimelech.

ba-kh*mish-shah la-kh5-desh, on the fifth of the month.

bam-mish-pa?, in the judgement (=b'hara- mish-pa^.

lam-me'-lech, to the king. V"1K / la-a'-rets, to the earth.

' V T T

Y1>}21 ba-a-rets, in the earth.

To create, KHS,* bara *.

TT

Heavens, U^iyi), shama'yimt.

• - T

To love, ^ili^j ahabh.

- T

Dainty meats, | D^ZpD(«)j nia^

Dainties,

i^am, a, (ta- 5>am, to taste.)

Stone, pX, S'bhen. Place, DpD (av), makom

Vocabulary.

Master,'^

Lord. Jl^^^«("),ad6n:.

To collect, gather, DJ^j canas.

Camel, '^D-l, {but pLW^bt^^i), T T • ~ ;

gamal.

No, ]'>iji, gn.

Men {pi), U^MJ'^'^y "nashim. There, Q^, sham.

T

>

Grave, l^p, ke'bher.

182

* Verbs that end in a {^) take t for their second vowel. ■\- A noun of the dual form : no singular in use. X D^n, to govern: others say, aden, a base.

g2

64

(182) Simple, ^JlH), pethi, jaZ. D''>r)2) or Q"'J>^jnS, p'thayim or p'tha-im.

Garland,!

Crown, Jn;^^,llvyah.

Grace, "j

Head, ti^NI, rosh. Mother, QJ^, em. Eternity, D/i^j )?61am*.

T

Isaac, Esau.

' T : • T ••

Relations of Case. [ch. 4.

Mercy, "TDn* khe'^ed.

Par^, ^iece, "Itil. ge'zer (ga-

zar, /o cm/)' To cut, to divide, 1ti)> gazar.

— T

fSea, Q'', yam. Red Sea, PjlO'D**? yam-siuph:

1

= sea of weed.

Inheritance, rOH^^ na kh'lah' T-:|-

(nakhal, to acquire, Sfc). Rebecca. Jacob.

Exercise 20.

D'':;nh^, D,:!i3 7 •. u^ ir^r\

U'^iy^b ]r\^ 8 ": nap^

: • ~ TIT

' A • • • ' •• — • •

1 ^lohim bara eth hash-

shama'yim ( jo). 2 Yitskhak.

ahabh eth i^esav. 3 Ribhkah

nath'nah eth-hamma^i^am-

mim. 4 Ya::)^kobh lakakh

meabhne hammakom.

5 ^lii^e'zer lakakh migg'malle

^donav. 6 en ish mean'she

habbayith sham. 7 cones

"bhanim I'kibhro. 8 nathan

liphthaim i^ormah. 9 torath

imm'cha livyath khen I'ro-

shecha(^). lOhod^layhovah,

* L'i>6-lam =in sascula sseculorum {for ever).

•f 'loMm takes a singular verb.

X For □''l^li^n, from its being in pause (i. e. at the close of

the sentence), the effects of which will be explained in the chapter on the regular verb. It will be indicated by (/>). § Give ye thanks (an Imperative).

§ 2.] Relations of Case, 65

ci-fobh, ci Ti^olam khasdo. (l83) 11 hodii I'gozer yamsuph ITgzarim. 12 nathan artsara I'nach^ah.

b) The heavens of Jehovah. 2. From the heavens of Je- hovah. 3. For thy (m.) dog. 4. For thy dogs. 5. I loved Rebecca. 6. From the place. 7. For the place. 8. For the camels. 9- Stones. 10. The stones. 11. He took stones of the field. 12. He took stones of thy field. 13. He took of the stones of my field.

Chap. IV. §3. Other prepositional Prefixes. Vav,

1. C (3) is a prepositional prefix meaning like, 184 as, according to f.

(The rules for its pointing are the same as for 2I> 7. 179).

V^ (1) is and; its usual pointing is Sh^va. 185

But v' [a) becomes u (-I) before labials {Beth, Pe, 186 Vav, Mem) and words whose initial consonant has Sh'va,

b) Before monosyllables^ penacutes, Elohim, and Y^hovah, v' follows the same rule as V, b' (7* ^),

179.

When two events are connected^ the second, which 187 denotes the further continuation and pi^ogress of the events narrated, is usually expressed by the Im~ perfect with Vav, then called Vav consecutive. This Imperfect will be construed by the English Perfect, when the preceding Perfect is so construed.

(See more under the account of the Tenses.)

Sometimes, when there is a connexion with an 18S earlier event, the narrative, or a section of it, begins with an Imperfect with Vav consecutive : this is very

* Supply the copula, ' it is.* f From 13.

g3

66 Other Prepositional Prefixes, Vav, [ch. 4.

(188) commonly the case with ^11)1, va-y'hi (icai lyiv^ro),

and it was (so) ; and it came to pass.

189 Vav consecutive takes Pathakh with strong Dagesh in the next consonant. Before X (which is incapable of receiving the Dagesh) Kamets is used.

190 A Perfect that follows an Imperfect (in the sense of a Future) is also changed by a Vav prefixed into the meaning of a Future, and must be construed by that tense in English. This Vav conversive is pointed like the simple copulative Vav. (See 185, 186.)

Vocabulary .

Under- garment,

Garment,

191 Brother, ^^^J akh (irreg. with

T

suffixes Tfh^)-

• T

Choice things,^ j^;^^'^^^^ ^-^g_ Valuables, J ^andth*. Wife, nWi^, ishshah (Dti^,

T • V ••

esheth, constr.). .> J1JFI3.- cutt5'neth ••• \ (absoL).

fjl^h^, c'thoneth

(nearly always con- struct).

Gleaning, ^p7, le'ke^.

Distressed,')

Needy, | •<

Stranger, ")i) (v), ger (1!)2|).

To give, ]jni, nathan.

To hide, "{DZOj Hainan.

To rise up, rhy> ^alah f.

T T

To make, HW' i^asah f-

Dainty meat, QJ^tOQ* maii>ara. Also, D^, gam.

Bread; DH/, le'khera.

Slothful, sluggard,") 7^^, i?a-

Lazy, { tsel.

7%e woow, nT'j yareakh. - ..1-

Star, :i3i3 (:?), cochabh.

T

ThicTc cloud, 2,V (v), i^abh.

T

PaZm (o/^ <Ae hand), 5]3 (i?), caph.

Bowl, k^DZ?' tsallakhath.

^ nn3. cathabh.

To engrave, j "* - t '

Unleavened bread (or ca^e), n^D. matstsah.

T —

To kill, ^^p, ka/al.

— 't

Skin, liy, )^6r.

* Plural of mig-da-nah, not in use.

t Verbs ending in h have Kamets for Pathakh in 3rd sing, perf.

§ 3.] Other Prepositional Prefixes. Vav.

67

Exercise 21.

: • ; TT ; T T

T •• r - T V V -

1 ^lii^e'zer nathan I'akhiah 192 urtmrnahh migdanoth.

2 Y'hovah i^asah I'adam ul'ishto chothnoth )>6r. 3 hal- le'ke^ lei)ani v'lagger. 4 Ribhkah nath'nah eth-ham- ma^i^ammim v'gam eth-hal- le'khem. 5 #aman i^atsel yado bhatstsallakhath. 6 Y'hovah i?asah eth-hay- yareakh v'chochabhim. 7 hin- neh-)>abh k'^annah ch'chaph- ish i?5lah miyyam. 8 vay- yichtobh M5sheh eth col- dibhre Y'hovah. 9 ush'mar- tem eth-hammatsoth.

b) Translate —

1. Like a dog. 2. And I killed [after a Perfect]. 3. And I will kill [after an Imperfect]. 4. Isaac and Eliezer. 5. David and Solomon. 6. Like the mountain of ray holiness. 7- Like a thick cloud. 8. And the thick cloud. 9. And they shall keep my statutes [after an Imperfect = Future].

Chap. V. Modes of expressing the Comparative and

Supei'lative.

The comparative is expressed by prefixing the 193 particle ]'0 {min), or D [mi) with follow^ing Dagesh

(D before gutturals), to the object or objects with * Active partcp. of Kal from Tv)'^ : it has this form -—- in

TT

the construct state.

t Suppose a Perfect to have preceded.

X Suppose an Imperfect (= Future) or Imperative to have pre- ceded.

68 The Comparative and Superlative. [ch.

(193) which the thing in question is compared. The ad- jective remains in the positive :

Q^pr^2)Q nhilj ga-bho-ahh mic-colsha-i?am, taller than any

T T T • ~ T

of the people.

194 This V2 {=ex) denotes distinction or removal from (or se- lection out of) the mass of objects with which the comparison is made. — Compare the Latin ablative with the comparative, and the adjectives ex-imius, e-gregius: also Homer's t/c rcavriov /ia- Xiora. (G.)

195 The superlative is usually denoted by the definite article with the positive, which thus marks out the object in question as pre-eminently the possessor of the quality. The objects follow with ]12 (D, t2) or ^•

196 The superlative of eminence (i. e. answering to our very with the positive), "TKD (m'od). It is sometimes

denoted by a repetition of the positive : ' Good, good it is,' &c. ; ' very good it is,' &c.

197 A sort of superlative is sometimes formed by the construct state of the positive before a plural genitive :

D'^ti^lp ^"Tp> ko-desh k^'da-shim {the holy of holy things), the holiest of all.

198 A comparison of equality is made by 3 (or 3, 3) :=:

as, like,

199 If the 3 is expressed before each member of the comparison,

it indicates a reciprocal similarity : just as in English, " like master like man " = the man is like the master , and the master like the man.

Vocabulary.

200 Sweety piJlD* mathok. Precious, ID"', yakar.

'tt

Profty r\i^^2D{a<^), t'bh^ah.

T ;

Excellent, 1)13^, mbhkhar

T ; •

{partcp. Niphal of bha- khar).

Floor, threshing -floor, ]lil,

goren.

Honey, ]i}yiy d'bhash. Pearls, D''^^JS, p'ninim (al.

red-corals, E. B. rubies). Gold, V^'^T^, kharuts.

Pure gold, 13, paz. > Chamber, room, 1in> khe'der.

Little, young, T'^if, tsai7ir.

5.1

The Comparative and Svpey^aiive.

69

Handsome, fair, beautiful, n3\

VT

yapheh. Always, I'^'QDy tamid (lit.

• T

perpetuity). Dry, ^^'^, yabbesh.

Potsherd, )i^'y^, khe'res.

Moon, n^l^, rbhanah (lit. (200) the white one, f. of ]2,7, white).

Sun, nSrij khammah.

T ~

Pure, -):a (/. nni), tar.

- TT

Life, D'"'n> khayyim (pi.)

Exercise 22.

• T ; T • ' T •• • : •

Dyn 8 : ii;nn3 ty^ 7

T T V V - "T

••rrDns rn:i nn^D ns^ 10

T T • —

1 mathok midd'bhash. 2 y'ka- 201 rah khochmah mipp'ninim. 3 ^obh piryi mekharuts umip- paz, iith'bhuathi micce'seph mbhkhar. 4 lo fobh anochi me^bhothai. 5 anochi hats- tsai^ir b'bheth abhi. 6 chith- bh^ath goren. 7 yabhesh

cakhe'res. 8 hai^am caccohen. 9 cai?am caccohen. 10 ya- phah chaH'bhanah barah ca- khammah. 1 1 tobh. kha^d'cha mekhayyim.

h) 1. Wisdom is very good. 2. Wisdom is better than silver. 3. My rooms are better than yours. 4. Your room is very good.

Chap. VI. § 1. Numerals. 1. The ten first Cardinal

Numbers.

1. The Cardinal Numbers from 2 to 10 are sub- 202 stantives with an abstract meaning (like triad, decad, TTcvrac) ; but they are also used adverbially. Only "HINI, one (ekhrid)^ fem. nriK^ (akhath), is construed

as an adjective. The other numbers have each a masculine and a feminine form, which are identical in point of meaning, but distinguished in use by the

70 Numerals, [ch. 6.

(202) arbitrary custom of employing the feminine form with masculines, and the masculine withfeminines.

203 It is only in the dual form for two, D^I^ (sh'na'-yim),

fern. D^^ip^ (sh'ta'-yim), that the gender of the nu- meral agrees with that of the object numbered.

204 The numerals from 1 to 10: —

Masculine (which after 2 are fern, iwforni).

1	K
2	n
3	J)
4	1
5	n
6	1
7	r
8	n
9	12
10	>

Absol.	Constr.
	im
e-khad	a-khad
	1 ''^P
sh'na'-yim	sh"ng or
	. sh'nem
T •	rs'pbt
sh'lo-shah	sh'l5'-sheth
T T J —	W5")N^
ar-ba-i^ah	ar-ba-i^ath
T]fm	ntm
kh^mish-shah	kh'^me'-slieth
	nm
shish-shah "	she'-sheth
n^n^	wn^
shibh-)>ah	shibh-i^ath
ilpp	r\^M2t
sh'monah	sh'mo-nath
r^ypr)	nv^rs
tish-i?ah	tish-i^ath
TT — ;	^^M.
)^*sa-rah	:i^''se'-reth

Feminine.

Absol.

T V

e-khath sh'ta'-yim

Constr.

n™

a-khath

sh'te or

. sh'tem

^b\^	tbp
sha-losh	sh'losh
^?"1^	Pn-IK
ar-bai>	ar-bb
•• T	tgn
kha-mesh	kh^mesh
m	m
shesh	shesh
^^^t	V2p
she'bhai>	sh'bhai>
•^^.'^?^	n±p
sh'moneh	sh'm5-neh
yPd	V^r\
te'-shS:^	t'shai^
'^W	-)ly^
i^e'-ser	i^e'-ser

§ 1.] Numerals, 71

The other Semitic languages exhibit the same pecuharity in 205 respect to the genders. The explanation of this is, that these numerals, being ox\g\\\?X\y abstract substantives {\\\iQdecas, trias), had both the masculine and feminine form. The feminine, as being the favorite form for abstract notions, was the principal form, and as such was connected with words of the masculine gender; so that the other form, without the feminine ending, was used with words of the feminine gender. Usage made this a settled law in all the Semitic languages, the exceptions to it being very raie. (G.)

{Syntactical Remarks [G.]). a) The numerals from 2 to 10 stand either 206

1) in the construct state before the substantive (so that the object numbered is in the ge- nitive), D"'D"' H^yp, three days, prop, triad

of days ; or

2) in the absolute state before it (the thing num- bered being then considered as in the accu- sative or in apposition), D**J2 tlU}7py three

S071S ; or

3) in the absolute state after it, as in apposition with the object numbered (a usage of the later books, where the adverbs also are so constructed), li^wli) Jlto, three daughters,

1 Chron. xxv. 5 *.

The numerals from 2 to 10 are joined, with very 207 few exceptions, with the plural.

!1) sh'losheth banim. 2) sh'loshah banim. 3) banim sh'loshah (late and rare).

"When a numeral is used absolutely (i. e. without a sub- 203 stantive, the masculine is regularly used (i. e. the feminine form for the numerals after two. 202).

. * In like manner the constructions H^^ ^^^Q. Gen. xvii.

T T T ••

17, and n^^ ilNQ* XXV. 7, 17, a hundred years, are equally

TT

common.

72

Numerals,

[CH. 6.

Vocabulary 209 Sony n (i?^- D''i:i» constr.

• • • T

■•J^l)? ben (banim, b'ne,

irreg.). Daughter, Jl^, {pi. H)'!'!,

constr. /l')i3l), bath (banoth,

b'noth, irreg.).

Branchy y^^'D, sarig (sarag ;

• T

in Pual to be interwoven). A day, Q'l"', yom {pi. yamim). ifO/ n^rr* blnneh.

Stalky ^'yo, kaneh.

v't

Perchance, haply, "'7')^i, ulai. Battle, war, TlDTwt^ (^.w),

T T ; •

milkhamah (lakh am, to con- sume).

Leahy jli^ A Leah.

T ••

Week, ^)2U}, shabhua)^ {pi.

\ T

BuUocky *^3, par (/)/. parim).

Exercise 23.

210 a) no^n^ f)":) *^"7'?5!1^ nti^'?^ u'^^y)]^^ r\u}bp 2 :-r™ n:3^:i in'bv wb^p

T • -; - •• T T : •

niih nib^ D^n mt 6

T " T : T • T T •

"iSDii n^^rnt:^ nvn^ 7

TT -;•• 't • T

1 vayyivval'du? 16 f shibhi^ah bhanim v'shalosh banoth.

2 sh'losheth hassarigim sh'lo- sheth yamim hem ". 3 hinneh" shebai) shibb°lim i?6l6th X b'kaneh ekhad. 4 ulai yim- mats'un § sham i^^sarah.

5 arbai^ah m'lachim i>asii || milkhamah eth hakh*mishshah.

6 shishshah banim yal'dah Leah. 7 shibi^ah shabhuoth ti^por. 8 sh'monah pharim hikribhu. 9 ^nochi tohh lach mei^^sarah banim.

b) 1. The three baskets are^ three days. 2. Four kings. 3. Three men. 4. Two sons. 5. Five men went. 6. Eight stalks.

* ' And there were born.' § ' There shall be found.' if ' They offered.'

t * To him.' X ' Came up.' II * Made with {eth).'

§2-1

Cardinal Numbers,

73

Chap. VI. § 2. The Cardinals continued. Ordinals.

To express the numbers from 11 to 19, the units 21 1 stand, without the copulative conjunction, before ten (in the form "IV)^ masc, TTj^DV fern.). In such as are

masculifie in form (and therefore used with /em. nouns) the units stand, at least from 13 upwards, in the construct state, which here indicates merely a close connexion between the notions, not the relation of the genitive. These numerals have no construct state, and are always used adverbially.

11	K^
12	n^
13	T
14	i>
15	lIDt
16	V
17	r
18	n"-
19*	10*'

Masc.

T T T ; *

Fem.

rrsw nm

212

20

Dn^

The te?is from 30 to 90 are expressed by the plural 213 forms of the corresponding units (so that the plural denotes tenfold the singular) ; except that tiventy is expressed by D**"!^]^, plur. of "iW, ten.

^p" They are of the common gender, and have no 214

construct state.

•> * Unusual forms are "^'^j; D'^DH, fifteen, Judges viii. 10 ;

"1^'V /1-3bti^, eiyhteen, Judges xx. 25. Here the masculine too

T T — ;

has the units in the construct state.

t Used because H'' begins the sacred name.

H

74 Cardinal Numbers. [ch. 6.

215 When units and tens are written together, the earlier writers commonly place the units first (e. g. two and twenty^ as in Arabic) ; but in the later writers the order is almost invariably reversed [twenty and two, a^ in Syriac). The conjunction is always used.

[Common gender.)

216 Twenty, DH'^y, i?es-rim.

I . . ...

Thirty, W^tht, sh'lo-shim. Forty, D'';;:i"lj^, ar-ba-i^im.

Fifty > W^V:Jtyi^ kh'^mish-shira.

,. • -: I

Sixty, D"'ii^^j shTsh-shim.

Seventy, Q^y^^j shTbh-i)im.

Eighty, U'^yyi), sh'mo-nim.

Am ty D'^y^-Tlj tish-i)im. |- : •

The remaining numerals are : — 217-4 hundred, Jli^^D* me-ah.

constr. Jlhi^, m'ath.

|- :

Two hundred, DTliSD (for □^n^^D), mi-tha-yim. .,- -r T r :

A thousand, P]7^^, e'-leph.

Two thousand, CB^i^, al-pa'-yim.

Ten thousand, 1122")^ Plur. ^\^'2,11, r'bha-bhah; Plur. ri-

|Tr : -; •

bh^-bhotb.

Ni2") or inn, Plur. J^^^^^2-] or jiu"), nb-

bo ; Plur. rib-bo-oth or rib-both. a) Examples of the other hundreds.^

218 :J^i^<D pn"ii^ (n) 400 ••ji'ikd ^bt (w) 800 : n^m tp nn) 600 : jiij^p t^^n (pji) 500 :'D jipp {nn) 800 :'D :?2p (\^n) too

: 'D );pn ipnn) 900

§ 2.] Ordinal Numbers, 75

b) Examples of the other ^^ow5aw^5.] (21 s)

: U'^bi^ ntht (i) 3000 •u^'tht^ ^VH-l^5 (i) 4000, and

• T - ; ■•" : ■ T - : T X ; -

so on. : ni^n '^nt. or D^Jlin"), or t^^ On'W 20,000

: 5]^K Ii\m m 6*00,000, and so on. * "

2. Ordinal Numbers,

a) The ordinals after the ^ first' (which is derived 219 from '^'^1 [rosh], head) are formed from the cor- responding cardinals by appending '^-, and also

usually inserting another ''- in the preceding syl- lable.

b) The feminines have the termination D\ {ith), less commonly H" (y-ydh); and also denote such a part (or fraction) : but besides these there are other forms to .'denote fractional parts, such as ^^H (kho-

raesh), the fifth part; ^IT and ^51. (robhaiT and re'bhai^),. the fourth part,

220

Masculine.	Feminine.
The Sing.	Plur.	Sing.	Plur.
1st ]Wi^-)	D'';r^i^-]	T •	r\'\2^i^'i
2nd •'^j:^	°''^?^	mt	r)v:^p
3rd •'i:^"'^^^	D^t^^i^ !	D'p'bp
4th ^^"^21	D^aS	^T^l
5th >:i;>DrT	i	D'p'pn
6th v^^-^		mp
7th y>2p		m'2p
8 th ^^''oi;		m'f^ip
9th ^y^I^jjl		ny'pn
10th n''';:^v		D'^'W

The rest of the Ordinal Numbers are made by the terras ap- 221

H 2

7& Ordinal Numbers. [ch. 6.

(221) propriated to the Cardinal ones: as, TVS'V)^ DrTb^Il HTii^n,

••;••• — - T T T ~

the eleventh year ; so, QV 1't^^ 71^2,^, the seventeenth day.

T T T ; •

[Syntactical Remarks [G.]).

222 a) In the cardinal numbers, the tens (from 20 to

90), when they precede the substantive, are regularly joined with the singular (in the ac- cusative), and when they follow it, in apposition, with the plural. The first is the more frequent construction.

The plural may be used in the first case, but the sin- gular never occurs in the second.

The numerals from 11 to 19 are joined to the singular form (in the accusative) only with certain substantives, of which the numbers are very frequently stated, as day, year, man, &c. (comp, our ' six pair of stockings,' *four head of oxen j' e. g. Q'|'» li'l^}^ nj^2L"1h^> prop. /oMr^ecw

T T T T ;-

day, Ex. xii. 6. With this exception, they are joined to the plural : and in the later books then stand after the substantive.

b) Numerals made up of tens and units (like 21, 62) take the object numbered either 1) after them in the singular (in the accusative), or before them in the plural, as in the later books (Dan. ix. 26) : or 2) the object is repeated, with the small numbers in the plural, with the larger in the singular (Gen. xii. 4; xxiii. 1).

c) Beyond 10 the ordinals have no peculiar forms, but are expressed by those of the cardinals, which then stand either before the object num- bered, or after it as genitive. In the latter case, the word tl^U) is sometimes repeated. In

numbering days of the month and years, the forms of the cardinals are used, even for the numbers from 1 to 10.

223 Rem. 1) The numerals take the article when they stand with- out a substantive, and refer to subjects mentioned before, as D^Jwi^n, the two, Eccles. iv. 9. 12.

§ 2.] Ordinal Numbers. 77

2) Some substantives denoting weights^ measures, or space of (223) time, are regularly omitted after numerals : e. g. shekels, ephahs, loaves. Thus an Hebrew spoke of ' a thousand of silver,' 'six

of barley,' 'ten of bread.' 'A hundred (&c.) cubits' is often ex- pressed thus : ' a hundred by the cubit ' (^D^<3, Hi^Q)-

T - T T ••

3) Numbers are expressed distributively (nearly as in English) by the repetition of the cardinals, but without "). Two two =

two and two {W^^p D^Jl^)- Once is inj^ D^D, pai^am ekhad

(lit. a step); twice, U^6'JB; three times, WDVB ^\bl^' Also

by the feminine forms of the cardinals, JlPTh^ (akhath) once;

W^PiU}, twice; VS^^, thrice (poetical). The ordinals are em-

ployed in the same way.

Vocabulary.

9 Evening, ^"1p, i^e'rebh.

Morning, Ipil, boker. Sabbath, r\2l^, shabbath. Euphrates, JT13, p'rath. Wives, D"'^J. nashim (with

• T

masc. termination : irr. pi.

of nm).

T •

Cubit, HQi^j ammah.

T ~

Length, "T^lj^, orech.

■^rk, r]2D, tebhah. Breadth, ^nhj rokhabh. Height, HDip (w), komah. Flood, b)2D {a y), mabbiil

(yabhal, to flow *). Month, t:^"rn, khodesh (kha-

dash, to make new).

To become dry ; to be dried up, ^2\ yabheshf.

••T

Waters, D^D> mayim (irr.).

224

* So Gesenius. Others derive it from nabhel, to drop off {pi leaves, &c.) ; and make its primary meaning, delapsus pluvicc. Simonis.

t Intransitive verbs often take (••) for (-) in ult. of 3rd sing, perfect. In the other persons they are conjugated regularly.

H 3

78

225 a)nm Di''

Ordinal Numbers, Exercise 24.

''p'Dn nv '^wpri Di^

mn"*^ nw "'rnti^n Di^ 2 'mi "imn 3 * :Trt^i^

in-in-Dti^ 5 : ]')]:}^B "inkrr

TT - .. ' . T V T

XT- •• ' .... —

T T - '•.••.•• ... -

Dii; D^t^: "rii:^ "^ip^ )b

T : - V - T •

n^N jiiKD ]Dbp 10 :D^:ii

T - • • -: T •• - ' V

U'W u'W 11 ■ :n/Tbip Dv D^:;i-)K n-'H 'piJajDn 1^2

• T ;- TT

. .. _ V ~ ' VT T -

' V T T T : 1 T

1 vay'hi- i^e'rebh, vay'hi- h)ho'ker

[CH. C. § 2.

Cyom ekhad yora sheni yom sh'lishi yom r'bhii^i yom kh^mishi

yom hash- . shish-shi. 2 yom hashsh'bhii'^i shabbath

layhovah ^lohecha. 3 han-

nahar hayah Parbai^ah rashim.

4 shem haekhad Pishon.

5 shem-hannahar hashsheni Gikhon. 6 shem-hannahar hashsh'lishi Khidde'kel.

7 hannahar har'bhii^i hu" P'rath. 8 lakakh 16 Le'mech sh'ti nashim, shem haakhatb. i^adah v'shem hashshenith Tsillah. 9 vayyoled Noakh sh'l5shah bhanim. 10 sh'losh meoth ammah orech hatte- bhah, kh^mishsbim ammah rokhbahh, ush'loshim ammah komathahh. 11 sh'nayim

sh'nayim bau el-Noakh el- hattebhah. 12 hammabbul hayah arbai^im yom yal-ha- arets. 13 bakhodesh hash- sheni b'shibi?ah v'i^esrim yom lakhodesh yabh'shah haarets.

' And evenintr was and morning was = and the evening and morning were (E. T.). CA. 188. ^ hayah (== was) followed

by b {to) ■=. became. Here: ' was divided into. ^ *= ' And Noah

begat.'

^ went.

e e\=zto ; into.

CH. 7. § 1.] The Pronouns. 79

b) 1. And the evening and the morning were the seventh (225) day. 2. Three and twenty sons. 3. Forty-two years. 4. One hundred and three days. 5. vSixteen sons. 6. One thousand two hundred and eight years.

Chap. VII. The Pronouns. § 1. Personal Pro7iouns,

1 I

*ni

T

a-no-chi

2 Thouim.) nn.^

T —

at-tah

3 Thouii.)

Nominative.

6 We

226

4 He

5 She

11 Me

kt Kin

hu"

hi"

^n^^ 6-thi

7 You (m.)

8 You (f.)

9 T% (m.) 10 They (f.)

*nakh-nu, nakh-nii

DriK

at-tem at-ten

on, nan

hem, hem'-mah hen, hen'-nah

Accusative. 16 Us

227

12 T/iee (m.) Tjjpj^ o-th'cha

13 TAee (f.) "JJ/IK o-thach

14 Him 'IJIJ*^ 6-th6

15 Her HJIK o-thahh

•IJJIK o-tha'-nA

T

17 You (m.) DpriK eth-chem

18 You (f.) pJlK eth-chen

19 Them(m.) Qji^ o-tham "

20 T/«m (f.) ]jni^-o-than

Other relations expressed by prepositions and 228 pronominal affixes : —

To

21 Me

22 Thee(m.)

1>

li

Tcha

(To, towards) 'bif (^!?K) SI- (Me) ' >biji' e-lai TJ-'^K e-le-cha

80

(228)

(To)

23 Thee (f.)

24 Him

25 Her

26 Us

27 You (m.)

28 You (f.)

7%e Pronouns.

•Tf^ lach

i^ 16

n'? lahh i

T

^y) la'-nu i

T

DD7 la-chem

V T

\j) la-chen

[CH. 7*

29 Them{m.) Urh la-hem

V T

30 T/«m (f.) ^n*? la-hen

V T I

From ]D

31 Me >^aD mim-men'-ni

32 Thee (m.) '^y^D mTm-m'cha

33 Thee (f.) "TJi^D mim-mech

34 Him ^^DD mim-men'-nu

35 Her H-^DD mim-men'-nah

T V •

36 C/s ^ilDD ' mim-men'-nii

37 You (m.) D3D mic-cem

38 FoM (f.) pQ mic-cen

39 Them{m.) DHD me-hem

40 TAem (f.) ^HQ me-hen

With m eth

51 Me >rl^^ it-ti

52 TAee(m.) Tf^lK it-t'cha

53 Thee{i.) Iirij*^ it-tach

T •

54 Hiw ^rst^ it-to

55 Her ^-^^^ it-tahh

T |V

I""

In 2,

41

42

43

44

45

46 47 48

49 50

e-la-yich

e-lav

e-l^-ah

e-le'-nri. 4e-chem 4e-chen - *le-hein ^le-hen

bi

b'cha bach bo

bahh

pi

ba'-nii

ba-chem

ba-chen

j- D^ [bam,

[Dil2 |_ba-hem

[ inil [ba-hen,

[ ]n^ ^[^ba-hen

With 56 U5

•liJlJ^ it-ta'-nA

T •

57 You (m.) DD/nhJ it-t'chem

58 FoM(f.) '{i3r)^^ it-t'chen

59 Them(m.) Q^l^^ it-tam

60 ThemiD ]Di^ it-tan

§1.]

As

The Pronouns. As

SI

3 0D3 * : here ID = HD,

'what,* used as a rel. con- junction: '■that,' 'quod.' E.)

61 / ''yQS ca-mo-ni

62 Thouim.) ?|iQ3 ca-mo'-cha

63 Thou{f.) •?|iD3 ca-moch

64 He !)nb3 ca-mo -h<i

T

65 She nQ3 ca-mo'-ah

T > T

66 We ^^iD3 ca-mo'-nu

T

Examples of Prepositions with a plural (construct) form before Suffixes.

(228)

67 You{ia.)	D33	ca-chem
68 You{i.)	1??	ca-chen
69 Theyim.)	D03	ca-hem
70 Theyii.)	1C5	ca-hen

after (lit. the hinder jycirts).

under: instead of (lit. the under parts).

heticeen {\\i. \ocSi\ , interval).

(usque ad) as far as (b).

before suffixes.) upon.

"^^ni^

(plur, only witb />/2<r. sv'ffiv).

TT

. ^^

' V T X T

a-kh*rai, after me. 229

a-kh*-re-cha, after thee (jr.). a-kh'^re-chem, after you (m.).

takh-te-hem, under them.

takh-tai.

be-ni, between me.

be-ne-chem, between you (m.).

i^a-dai, {up) to me. X'^a-dav, (up) to him. ^a-de-chem, {up) to you (va.). i>a-]ai, upon me. i?a-le-cha, upon thee (m.). )>a-lav, upon him. i?*-le-hem, uj)on them {va.).

* iD3 is always used before the lighter, not before the

heavier, suffixes. Some of the poets use it with 7, 21 also, but

only before monosyllabic (rarely dissyllabic) prepositions. (E.) t But this (observes Ewald) is from a root Lamed He, and

82

The Pronouns.

[CH. 7.

230

Remarks [for future reference). 1^^ The forms in parenthesis are rare; those withp poetical.

1 m

2 Thou, ID.] 4, 5, He, SAe]

6 PTe]

8 You, f.]

22 To ;Aee, m.]

28 To you, f.]

29 To ^^em, m.] 31 From me]

In pause, '»JJ^.

Also (J1^^). In;?azf5e, H^li^.

T - T T

«) The J^ was perhaps heard at the end as a sort of half-vowel (G.). b) In the Pen- tateuch J^^n stands also for she : it is then usually pointed like ^^^^ (i. e.

J^in); but this is merely an ortho- graphical anomaly.

T

C^Jn^^, in four passages). ClPi^, once).

T .. - > .. -

(p) ^iirj, ip) >JD.

231 The prepositions and other very short a^^ri^ec? particles take the longest possible pronunciation before suffixes. Thus (I) they constantly take the foretone d: (2) prefer the longer for- mations; e. g. 0117 (not D7), &c., though ^^ is found, but

V T T T

often DH^l- (3) They take a instead of e as union-vowel of the

V T

suffix : so much so that this a expels even the e of the suffix of 2nd fern. sing. TTJl, &c. (4) So also 73 {every, all) has as-

T

sumed some pronominal peculiarities from its quasi-pronominal notion: -IjS^), ciillanu, we aZZ/ ^^3 or TT^S, cullech or ciillach,

thou entirely (E.).

232 Sometimes two prepositions precede the same suffix : as Vi^njlD. mittakhtav (from-beneath-him=)from his place ;

'^l^j?, I'neg'di (ad-coram-me, to be/ore me =) over-against me, so has the termination "»_ (e) from its origin. So "7i>^ and

by.

* With collectives it is used apparently only.

§!•]

The Pronouns.

83

in my presence, Sfc. J "T^^? in the presence of ; '^'~\S)^'2. (in-adhuc- (232) me =) while I am still alive, while I have my being.

Vocabulary.

Mouth, HBj peh (irreg. See

list). Destruction, HDVID («)>

T • J

m'khittah. Aiso, Q^, gam. Calamity, ■7'^^J, ed. To laugh, pH^, shakhak. To toil, ^Oy, i^amal.

— T

To build, n^3,. ban ah.

T T

In vain, ^^1^, shav.

To perish, l^i^, abhad.

To recompense, to reward, 7Di)>

- T

gamal. To say, HDi^^ fimar.

~ T

To pour out, "?TH)Ii^. shapliach. Counsel, TO^ (y w), i^etsah (Vy, to counsel).

Sound wisdom, tl^]l)^D (a oi y), 233

T •

tushiyyah (H^''. to subsist,

T T

to be firm). Understanding, Jl^^^l (w), bi-

T •

nah. Strength, Hl^a:) (w), g'bhu-

T ;

rah. Morsel, r\B (i>), path. I^ry, ^in, kharebh. Quiet (subst.), r]')bll}, shalvah. Sacrifice, victim, H^tj ze'-

bhakh (dec. 6). Strife, contention, ^''"1, ribh. Blood, D1, dam.

T

> >

Memorial, ^3f or I^T, ze'cher

or ze'cher. i/; DK; no;, J^b (im; -16).

Ewercise 25.

a) n'? nnnn ^''DD ''B l , l pi chVil m'khittah 16. 234 T • : • : • I

:pnZ^i^ DDTi^a "'^i^'DH 2 I 2 gam-'^ni b'ed'chem es-

:*"^r^i^ r\]^lP yD'y^ J^^n 3 khak(jo). 3 hu" yoshebh labhe-

n^2 n^l^"i^7 nin"*'DJ^ 4 l ^akh Ittakh. 4 im-Y'hovah 16-

03 tVJ^n l7lD;^ i^lti^ I yibhneh bayith, shav i^am'lu

T ; T I T :

* In 'pause for ^jlji^.

t Partcp. Act. of Kal, nJIJl (verbs in H take ••• for ••), pi' D-ii:!, with suffix V:iB.

84 The Pronouns, [ch. 7.

(234) "T2i^ 6 :*:T^ 21201 T")ti^N 5 I bonav bo. 5 ashrecha v'/6bh — T T ; •* ! ~ 1

*^2l iniOn'' 7 : n?3n DIDt f lach. 6 abhad zichram hera-

- T T ; •• : *• :

''^'^^ •^1'^^^ -T^l^^ '^

T • : T •• • T |T

mah. 7 yibh^'khu bh'cha yod'i^e sh'me'cha. 8 Y'hovah gamal i?alai. 9 shaph'chu da- mam cammayim. 10 amart' layhovah *donai attah. 1 1 li- )?etsah v'thushiyyah, 'ni bhi- nah, li g'bhurah. 12 tbhh. path kh^rebhah v'shalvah-bah mibbayith male zibhkhe-ribh.

h) 1. Thou (m.) shalt hide ray commandments with thee. 2. I wisdom have dwelt (°with) prudence. 3. My mouth is destruc- tion to me. 4. Prudence dwells with them.

Chap. VII. § 2. Demonstrative Pronouns. Demonstrative

235

Sing.

rra. nr, !)? 1

[f. J1KT, IT J

rm. t-»n, nt'^n,

same 1 f. i<^\"irT

Plur.

]nrr

Sing.

rm.

V-

Cm. i m.

!/•

and Interrogative Pronouns,

Sing. Plur.

zeh, zu "I

_ , ^ ' el-leh, el zoth, zo I

hal-laz, hal-lazeh

With

As

To

From

m.

f.

V T :

ha-le-zu

ha-h^"

ha-hi«

Plur.

V •• T

ha-hem ha-hen

* ' Those who know.' Partcp. Act. of Kal, ^T {to know), in Stat, constr. "^

§ 2.] The Pronouns, 85

The demonstrative zeh, nt (also ^^, IT), is also (es- 236

pecially in poetry) used, like our that, for the relative pronoun : ' the place that (ilT, zeh) you intend for me/

Thus : Uhe city that you live iti' might be translated literally in Hebrew, except that instead of m we must use in Hebrew in-it (of. 246). E. g. Ps. civ. 8, to the place DH^ DID'' HT tvhich thou hast destined for

■* V T T : - T

them. It is even employed (like ""shei^) to give a re- lative sense to another word. (For an instance, see the last Example in the Exercise on the Relative, p. 92.)

nt is used adverbially, a) for there, HT H^n, see there ! and 237 then merely as an intensive particle, especially in questions, as nt IlD^j «^^*y then? (prop, why there?), b) in reference to

V T T

time, for now, as DTJ^B TW> now (already) twice.

The inteiTogative pronoun is mi Cp), who ? for 238 persons; mah, mah- (HD, "HID), ivhat ? for things. ^^'^^ ^D signifies who is he ? KTl ^12 who is she ? But J^in n?D (z^A«/ he), J»^''n"nip (^i^Aa/ 5Ae)j signify what is IT? In the same way, H^Nt ^D, zi^Ao «re /Ae^e (joer- 50W5) ? but nJpK HD i<;Aa/ are these {things) ?

The interrogative ''Q may be used in reference to 239

2i plural, also in reference to things; but only when the notion of persons is implied, e. g. Uyi) ^D, mi

Sh'chem? who are the Shechemites ? ''D may also stand

in the genitive, as *'p D3, ivhose daughter? and mi

and mdh, without interrogation, for ' any.' iFor HQ

in this sense we have also the specific term PID^J^^D

(from ^\t2^ HD, quidquid). G.

HD is also used in the sense of how, as an exclamatory par- 240

T

tide.

The pronoun of the third person i^T\ (^^''^, 11^11,241 they, in, r\y^, is, ea, id; ii, ece, ea) may also be joined

I

86 The Pronouns. [ch. 7.

(241) to substantives, and then takes the article, if the substantive has it ; K^HH D'-'J^n. is vir; K^HH Di^n,

eo die (G.).

242 The article is sometimes omitted, from the natural definiteness <^f NIH; especially when the noun is only defined by a suffix

V " ' V T ~:

When employed in this way, J<5irT is to be distinguished from the demonstrative JIT; for ^] {= ovTOQ,hic)y this, points

to an object present or near, but X^IH (= avrSg, is) indicates (like the article) an object already mentioned or known [the former answering to this, and the latter nearly to that']. G.

Vocabulary, [For the Declensions, when referred to, cf. App. I.]

243 To be clean, *iniO, ^aher.

•• T

To collect, C]D^^. a^aph. To bind, ^"1^, tsarar.

-T

Sin, Di^^^iT], kha^/ath (KtOH,

T - T T

to stumble; to sin). Wailing, >)i^, 6i. Poverty, misery, *''inN> *bh6i

(ttTT. tip.).

Strife, contention, '{''ID* mid- yan (deck 2 : a, p"?!).

Complaining, murmuring, Tl'^'lV, siakh.

A wound, ^"j^B or J?iJD, patsai> or petsai) (deck 6).

Without cause, Diin> khin-

T •

nam.

Wind, r\T), ruakh.

Fists, D''JH)n (dual, of 13n,

• - ; T

inus.), khophnayim (deck

8, c).

Garment, Jl^Dli^, simlah (w^

Pdm. 12, 6). Measure, iVlt2, middah (deck

T •

8, «) ; mD, <o measure.

— T

FFor^, nii^^D («), maJL^-'seh ... _.,-

(deck 9, a); TVD^y i^asah,

T T

^0 make. To dream, Q^n. khalam.

~ T

A dream, Uw'H, kh"16m. Mountain, in (d), har. End, limit, Vp (d), kets (deck 8, b).

§2.]

The Pronouns,

87

Exercise 26.

«) ^riirr^ *")DS^-"'D 1

nn"5)pNt ^p 3 q^^rf'^jr ■D^'iitDi iD'/"nQ n'pDt^i

T ; ' vT T T : : •

:iD^ l2i^^ n^D' •'DD h

. - T : T - T

•.mh'' TWD ^'^irnD 12

T ; I ... -;- ;t -

1 mi-yomar, /fiharti mekha^- 244 ^athi. 2 I'mi 6i ? I'mi ''bhoi ? Trai midyanim ? I'mi-siakh ? I'mi ph'tsai^ira khinnam ? I'mi khachliluth i^enayim? lam'a- kh^rim i^al-hayyain {p.). 3 mi asaph-ruakh b'khoph- nav ? mi tsarar-mayim bassim- lah ? mah-sh'mo ? umah- shem-b'no ? 4 mah hakh^lom hazzeh'sher {which) khalamta? 5 mi-elleh ? 6 mi-zeh me'lech haccabhod? 7 Y'hovah ^do- nenu, mah-addir X shimcha b'chol-haarets ! 8 Y'hovah mi- yishchon b'har kodshecha ? holech tamim. 9 Y'hovah mi-chamocha ? mah-yakar khasd'cha ^lohim ? 10 hodi- i?eni Y'hovah kitstsi umiddath yamai mah-hi". 11 mathai yiimuth v'abhad sh'mo ? 12 mah-gad'lu mai)*secha Y'hovah !

h) 1. Who will bind the winds ? 2. How ^reat is thy glory, Jehovah ! 3. I have dwelt on the mount of holiness. 4. What

* * Will say.'

f Epg. Trans, 'redness/ 'dimness' (G.); 'fierceness' (L.). X (To those tarrying =) to those who tarry (or linger^). § Is-hecome-glorious ; is glorious : from ■^'^^^, to become glorious. Perf. of Hiph. ""^

II Make-me-know ; cause -me-to-know.

I 2

88 The Relative Pronoun. [cH. 7.

(244) is your (m. pi.) name? 5. This river. 6. Those rivers. 7- This boy. 8. This girl. 9. Whose daughter is this girl ?

Chap. VII. § 3. Relative Pronoun.

245 The relative pronoun is "1^^^ ^sher [who, which) indeclinable; for which the prefix ^ (less com- monly '^) with following Dagesh is also used (but chiefly in rabbinical Hebrew).

246 Cases of the Relative] The indeclinable relative pronoun "^^^^ virtually assumes different cases by

taking after it the cases of the personal pronouns —

m. f. m. f.

Nom. "It^J^ "II^J^ ''sher «sher

Gen. (noun with pron. suffix) I^J^ {as masc.)

Dat. '')^ •)Ii^^i r]b Ipi^^ *sher 16 ''sher

'" • "^ " "• lahh {to whom)

Ace. ]Di^ '')]i}i^ nni^ ")t:;i^ ^sher otho, ^sher

" ~' ^ * "• othahh {whom)

247 Just SO in the plural: DH? 1^^!?, ""sher-lahem,

to whom, &c. One or two words are generally inter- posed.

Thus : *ID^^) immo, his mother.

iDi^ "^Ii^^^> ^shev immo = whose mother (i.e. who

his mother),

248 Just SO the relative "sher converts demonstrative adverbs of place, time, &c. (1= here, there, then, &c.) into the corresponding relative adverbs : as

Dti^ sham, "*" there.

TV^VJ sham'miih, ■^ "^ thither.

Q*^^^ mish-sham, ^ * thence.

Q^ -)^J.^ ^sher sham,

"^ '■" "• where.

HD^ "1*^i^ "sher sham'mah,

"^ "^ " • whither.

U'^l^ ")^i< ""sher mish-sham,

"^ * " '• whence.

§ 3.] The Relative Pronoun, 89

In this way a relative force may be given to the 249 obhque cases of the first and second persons : as, thou, Jacob, ivhom I have chosen, '^'^r}ir\3. '^ti^^^» ^sher

b'kharticha, i. e. whom I -have -chosen -//^ee (suffix of 2nd person added to the verb).

The ace. ivhom may be expressed by 'yp^^ (^sher) 250 alone ; as in Exod. ii. 2.

The antecedent personal or demonstrative pronoun 251 is often omitted before "sher ; and nearly always when a prepositional prefix stands before it. The preposition is then to be construed with the implied pronoun, the expressed relative taking the case re- quired by the construction of its own clause. Just so in English, from what, of what, &c. : e. g. thou shall drink from what ("^Iil^^^D, me^sher) the young men

tvill draw (Ruth ii. 9).

Sometimes such a general notion as time or place 252 must be supplied: as, "1^>^^, harsher {in the place

where z=.), where; "^^^??J me'^sher [from the time

when ^,from when.

As in English, the relative is sometimes omitted, 253 the relation being implied by the position of the relative clause, which stands as a sort of apposition to the word it is to modify. This happens (especially in poetry) —

a) When the relative would be in the nom. or ace. 25i (without aj9rej9. *). Thus, ^ he has fallen into the pit he made' would be expressed exactly as in English. Cf. Ps. viii. 2.»

* In a relative clause serving as a further description of a substantive, the relative may be omitted when a pronoun is ex- pressed, if it be a closely subordinated idea : e. g. the way they

should walk in, ,12 IDT TTnilljExod. xviii. 20. T :i"

i3

90 The Relative Pronoun, [cH. 7.

(254) b) So especially in general specifications of time: at the time the offering began, 7vys^T\ 7nn W^-

c) When the antecedent personal or demonstrative pronoun is also omitted: ^ Sheol shall carry away •IJ^ZDH (those who) sin.^ The omitted antecedent

T T '

may also be a general notion of place or time^ so that a clause stands apparently under the government of a preposition. Thus, whereas in English we can say, Ho where I have prepared for him^ in Hebrew we may go further, and say, ' to I have prepared for himj' r> ^JliJ''pn"7Nt

(el-h^chinothi 16).

255 When the implied pronoun would, if expressed, be in the genitive, the preceding noun takes the stat, constr. Thus, ' by the hand of him thou wilt send^ TxT'^TS "PB, b'yad [stat. constr.) tishlakh.

256 Such relative clauses as more specifically describe a substantive, may also be added to a preceding speci- fication by the copulative conjunction: the orphan {T? "ijy ^''1)5 v'lo ];ozer 16 (and there is no helper to him =:), and one who has no helper.

Vocabulary,

257 To forsake, 2tp, i^azabh.

~ T

Way, n^i^. orakh, pi. *ra-

khim, constr. Jlin"1i^, or-

khoth. Uprightness, "lti^\ yosher (ya-

shar. to be straight).

Perverse, ]^p^, i?ikkesh (i>a-

kash, to convict of perverse- ness).

Ant, rO'dl (w), n'malah.

Leader, prince, ]''!iip, katsin.

Magistrate, 120^. sho/er

(partcp. act. of Kal, from [sha^ar] to write).

Ruler, 7^12, moshel (partcp.

act. of Kal, mashal, to rule).

Also, even, Q2), gam.

Welfare,'

Peace,

Against, 7^, i^al. Heel, ypV, :i^akebh.

UV^, sbalom.

§ 3.] The Relative Pronoun.

Holy, I^np, kadosh.

't

Excellent, 1^'^^i, addir. Desire, yBH, khephets. Blood, Q^, dam, for adam

(ish-damim, man of blood = bloody man, blood-thirsty man).

Inmost part, or recess, '^pTlt^ (a), mekhkar ([npn]» to ex- plore).

Wealth; treasure, ^]^B^^D (« w),

T

toi^aphoth.

Wicked device ; wickedness, HDT. zimmah (deck 10).

91

Joseph, PjDV, Yoseph (lit. ad- (257)

ding). To sell, "13^, machar. Egypt, DHJiD, Mitsrayim.

im^, padah. To redeem, \ l77^ -^^ \P^^y gaal.

(1) Enemy, ~|

'•nv tsar

(2) Adversity, i^ '•?' ^^ '

To obtain, acquire, H^p, kanah.

His right hand, )y*!2'^, y'mino, for ^yty 1% yad y'mino, hand of his right side (^"'D^ the right).

Not, ]''i^, en, is the construct state of "j^J.^, ayin (nothingness, nought), used adverbially. With 7 governing personal pronoun, it signifies, I (you, Sfc.) have not a — {have no — ).

Exercise 27.

0) ^f^ rwr\'^ D^nr^^n i

. I. , V •• ; T V ~;

1 hai^dz'bhim'orkhoth yosher, 258 *sher orkhothehem' i^ikk'shim.

2 lech el-n'malah i?atsel, "sher en-lahh katsin sh5/er umo- shel. 3 gam-ish s'hlomi ^sher- ba/akhti bo ochel lakhmi hig«

* Go (thou).

t '^Dw'^'^'^i^y ish-sh'lomi, * man-of-my-peace,' i. e. 'my

friend' (who, whenever he came, inquired after my health, &c.). X lit. eating = who ate. Partcp. act. of Kal, from '^3i^, to eat. ' ''

(25S)

92 The Relative Pronoun. [ch. 7. § 3.

'- ^PV 'hv * b'^^^n dil i^alai ^akebh. 4 likdoshim, '" T - T •: •

' V T T V -; • •; •

:t t:it: •

: i:\t:"' njiYp^n? in s : -):J

• ; T ;'t V — T

bm r\bD) nin> "pnii bi^ 9

T ; - T V ' •

"5^er-baarets hemmdh, v'addire col-khephtsi-bhara. 5 anshe damim *sher bidehem' zim- mah. 6 *ni Yoseph ^khichem "sher-ia^chartem bthi Mits- ra'y'mah. 7 lo-zach'ru eth- yado, yom "^sher padam minni- tsar. 8 bar zeh-kan'thah y'raino. 9 el gadol Y'hovah ume'lech gadol i^al-col-^lohim "^shcr b'yado mekbk're arets, v'tho^aphoth harira 16 ; *sher- 16 bay yam. 10 gaalta har- Tsiyy6n zeh schacanta bko.

h) 1. (He) whose son said. 1. The man whose bread I have eaten. 3. The men whose bread I have eaten. 4. Men who have no ruler. 5. The man who trusted me. 6. The men who trusted them. 7. Thy covenant which I observed.

Chap. VIII. The Regular Verb. § 1 . Derivation of Verbs. The Conjugations.

259 Verbs, like nouns, may be divided, in respect to their origin, into three classes.

260 a) Primitives.

b) Verbal derivatives^ derived from other verbs.

* Has lifted up. Perf. of the form called Hiphil.

t As for the saints. The prefix 7 with pi. of li^ilp (kadosh), holy.. Decl. 3.

X lit. Egypt-wards =■ into Egypt. The final ^^=zwards, to- wards, into, of motion to, or into. "^

§ He-redeemed-them. Suffix of 3rd pi. raasc.

CH. 8. § 1.] The Regular Verb. 93

c) Denominatives, or those derived [de nomine) (260) from a noun: which appear to be of later origin than the two preceding classes (G.).

The noun, from which a denominative verb comes, 261 is generally a derivative: e. g. p'? labhan, to be

white, hence HJ^?' I'bhenah, a brick (from its colour),

and hence again, |l7, to make bricks; from T]yi>

dagah, to increase greatly, yi, dag, a fish ; and

hence again, Jl'n, dug, to fish (G.).

A peculiar kind of denominatives, of rather late 262 formation, are derived from augmented nouns, so that one of their radical letters w^as in the noun a servile : e. g. r}')}, nuakh, to rest, to set oneself dotvn; hence,

the noun, JlPf^, na'khath, a setting down; and hence again, S1T]2, nakhath, to descend (G.). *«%

Conjugations or Species of the Hebrev) Verb.'] The 263 original signification of the root receives various mo- difications of meaning, according to a regular analogy, by a specific change of form: e. g. ID?, to learn; "7D7, to cause to learn, to teach; 22"^, to lie; y^^pH, to cause to lie, to lay.

In other languages such words are regarded as new derivative 264 verbs: e. g. to fall, to fell; jacere, to throw; jacere, to lie; yivofxaiy to be born; yewdu), to beget, to bear. But in Hebrew, where these formations are beyond comparison more regular than in any other language, they have been called conjugations * and parts of the same verb.

The changes consist partly in varying the vowels 265 of the root, or doubling one or more of its letters

(bzSip, ':'^i^ ; ^r?ip, big'^p -, bbl!:\), b:£lbl^\^ ; k'itte\, kuttal ;

ko/el, ko/al; ki/lTd, k'^al/jH ; com\i. to lie, to lay ; to fall, to fell); partly in prefixing formative letters or

* Hebr. D''J''i3.. buildings, more correctly species, modifica- tions of the ground-form.

94 The Regular Ver^b. [ch. 8.

(265) syllables (^pipj, ^'r?i?n, nik/al, hik/il ; comp. speak, bespeak ; count, to recount ; bid, forbid) ; sometimes in a change of each kind^, as /^pJIH, hithka//el.

266 The conjugations that are in common use are —

Kal or light, because not burdened /ZDp (3rd sing. masc.

with any accessory meaning, or with any formative addition or doubled letter.

Niphal, properly reflexive, sometimes passive: n prefixed with i, and Sk'va under the first radical. (The full prefix, as we shall see, is hin.)

Piel, mostly intensive; to act with diligence, earnestness, or frequency. Second radical doubled by dagesh : vowels, I, e.

Pual, passive of Piel. Second radical doubled by dagesh : vowels u, a.

HipMl, mostly causatioe : h prefixed with i (with a in other forms), and z (with Yod) for the second vowel.

Hophal, passive of Hiphil.

Hithpael, an intensive reflexive; the syllable kith prefixed, and (like Piel, from which it is formed,) a strong dagesh in the second radical.

of perfect), ka- ta\, to kill.

/ZOp^» nik^al, he killed • ' himself.

7tDp5 ki^/el, he killed many ; he mas- sacred.

7J0p. ku^/al, he was ^' killed violently, Syc.

/'^IDp'n, hiktil, he caused ' • ' to kill.

b:^pn, hok^ai. b:::ivnn, hithka^ei.

267 The names of the Conjugations are the actual tenses of the old Paradigm b^B, payal, bVB^, bVB, &c.

The selection of this verb was unfortunate, because from having for its second radical a guttural which is incapable of receiving dagesh, the name is not an exact type of the usual formation of the tense for strong verbs. Kdtdl is now generally used for the Paradigm, and has the advantage of clear distinct sound, but the disadvantage of stating forms that have no existence ; for none of the forms but Kal occur in Hebrew, and even that is rare, and confined to the poetical books.

§!•]

Conjugations »

95

As compared with Kal (= light)^ Piel^ Pual, and 268 Hithpael are called heavy conjugations, having their middle radical loaded with dagesh.

The persons of the derived conjugations are formed, 269 as in the perfect of Kal, by appending to the tense- root (3rd sing, masc.) the suffixes ti ; td, t ; ah; \ nu; tem , ten ; u.

Since the terminations that begin with a vowel 2/0 (ah, v) are added to the root in the same w^ay, one of them may serve as an example for the other ; and so, for the same reason, one of the persons wdth a ter- mination beginning with a consonant, may serve for the rest*; only the pupil must remember that, since tem', ten are accented on the penult, a Kamets in the first syllable of the root will be changed into Sh^va (or, if the initial consonant is a guttural.) into a Khateph.

Thus:

Niphal

Till

Pual

HipMl

Hophal

Hithpael

271

Perfect. {Tense-root.) 3 m.

nik^al

1 sing. mk/alti ki/^alti kuttahi hik/alti

• J ~ . T

hok^alti hithka^'alti

knttal' hik/il

bwn

- '; T hok^al

hTthka*//eI

3/.

nb:^p2

mkriah

r^b:::ip

T I '

ki^flah

kuJ'l'ah

T • '; •

hik^rlah

nbtgpn

hSki'l'ah

r]b:::ipnn

hithka^^'lah

* These model (or normal) forms are marked in the Paradigms with an asterisk.

96

The Regular Verb.

[CH. 8.

272 Observe that in Piel, the characteristic e is dropt in the other persons ; in Hipkil, the i is retained in the 3rd fem. hiktilah (and therefore in 3rd plur. kikiilu). The pu})il will find no difficulty in filling^ up the other persons (nik^alti, nik/alta, nikfalt, nik/al, nik^'lah, | mk^alnu, nik/altem, nik^alten, nikriu).

Vocabulary,

273 Word, -)D^^, otner (decl. 6, b). To divide into jioe, ^DrT>

khimmesh (khamash,^ye). Plenty, ^2''^, sabhai>.

T T

Year, H^yi), shanah {pi. sha-

T T

nim and shanoth. To let go, ^c, ^OD'^, shamai*. To learn, 1u7, lamad f.

— T

To break: to break in pieces: to afflict, 13^, shabhar.

- T

Affliction, sorrow, *13ti^» she'- bher.

Hail, 113, barad.

T T

Rock, y^^p, selaj) (decl. 6, b). Tree, fV' ^^ts (decl. 7, a). To flow, 1tOD> ma^ar|.

- T

To visit, 1p3, pakad§.

- T

To destroy, [IQti^], [shamad],

— T

used in Hiphil. A city, T'^i;, i>ir. To steal, 335. ganabh.

-T

To bless, 113. barach |1.

- T

To walk, "rjSl, halach*U.

Exercise 28.

a?1T 3 : 0^^:31 ni3b^ 2

1 nilcadta bh'imre phicha.

2 nilc'dah raglam. 3 ze'rai? tsaddikim nimla^. 4 limmadti ethcem torah. 5 khimmesh eth-e'rets Mitsra'yim** b'she'- bhai> sh'ne hassabhai^.

* In Niphal, to be thrown down.

f In Piel, to teach. ,

+ In Hiphil, to cause to flow: to rain (trans.).

§ In Hiphil, to cause to visit: to order to inspect: hence to place a person over: to make him a manager, &c.

II In Hithpael, to bless oneself: think oneself happy, &c. % In Hithpael, to walk: to go about (also of a course of life).

** Egypt.

§2.]

. . |T -r -

T T ~ •• • V T - ••

T ; • ; • T

. - . ,.

■ nm Ty 7:1? '-T>"}^OT 12

Kal. 97

6 nishm'/ii bhide-se'lai^ (274)

shoph'^ehem. 7 eth-c61-i>ets hassadeh shibber habbarad. S nishb'rucol-m'ah''bhayich*.

I i^al-she'bher bath-i^ammi hosbbarti. 10 )?amasa [Amasa] lo-nisbmar f ba- khe'rebh *sber b'yad-Yoabb.

II 15 him^ir Y'hovah ^lohim i^al-baa'rets (p.). 12 him^arti i^al i>ir akhatb. 13 hishmid etb-bakhori ;|: mipp'ne-bem. 14 Po^ipbar hipbkid otho b'bhetbo. 15 Noakh hats- tsaddik hithhallecb etb-ha- ^iohim.

b) 1. Thou art taken, O Babel! 2. I am broken-hearted. 3. I was stolen from the land of the Hebrews. 4. They divided- the land -into-five. 5. The kings have placed- him -over the land. 6. The righteous (pi.) walked with God. 7. He blessed-himself in his heart. 8. You (pi. m.) have placed- us -over your house.

Chap. VIII. § 2. On the ground-form [or Conju- gation) Kal (G.).

The forms of the Hebrew verb are the Perfect (1); 275 the Infinitive (2); the Imperative (3); the Imperfect [often called the Future'] (4) ; the Participle (5).

If the forms are taken in this order, and the Conjugations in 276 the usual order Kal {I), Niphal{2), Piel{3), Pualij^), Hiphil (5), Hophal (6), Hithpael (7), the combination of two numerals will

* Thy lovers. A Participle Piel, nrTN?D (decl. 7, b), with pronominal suffix. " ~ •

t Niphal. of ')12'2} (= (pvXdTTeaQai), to be on one's guard against. ~ ^

X The Horims.

K

98

The Regular Verb,

[CH. 8.

(276) supply a ready means of shortly denoting the mood or tense and conjugation of any form. Thus 2, 5 {=^ second form of the^^if^ conjugation), i. e. the Infinitive of HipMl ; 3, 2 {=. third form of the second conjugation), i. e. Imperative of Niphal.

The Short Paradigm of Kal.

277

iKal

1 Perf. ka^al

2 Infin. constr.

k'^ol

3 Imperat. kVol

5 PaHcp. act.

kofel

Q Past

partcp.

ka^ul

>78

4 Impel f. y'lktdl

Perfect. — {a) The third singular of this tense is considered, as we have seen, the ground-form or root. Besides the usual roots with vowels a — a, we also find the vowels a — e, a — 0, usually confined to in- transitive verbs denoting states and qualities.

b) Verhs whose vowels are a — a, a — e, a — 0, are called respect- ively. Verbs Middle A, Verbs Middle E, and Verbs Middle O.

279 Verbs Middle E are conjugated exactly like Verbs Middle A, except in the 3rd sing, of the Perfect. Thus from cdbhed we shall have cdbhadti, cdbhddtd, cdbhddt, cabhed, cdhWddh^ &c.

280 The exceptions to this rule are (1) Verbs Lamed Aleph, and (2) the remaining persons of the regular verb when they are in pause [See 282], Thus, 3rd sing. HpHlf becomes np31 in

't ; T 't" t

pause.

281 In Verbs Middle 0 the Kholem is retained in inflexion, where it has the tone; and changed into Kamets Khatuph, when the tone is thrown forwards.

2&2 On 'Pause' and its ejects^'], — The tone-syllable of the last word of a sentence, or principal member of a sentence, is said to be in pause. This syllable is marked with one of the great distinctive accents (es- pecially AtJmakh [a] and Silluk [1]), as ^^^'^, Dprj.

2S3 a) When the syllable in pause has a short vowel, it becomes long; as bw, ^rop; U'12, D\'D ; Pbw^ n^^p;

- T At't •- -/kT T : -'t T ;|t't

This rule respects principally Pathakh and Segol. Segol

* The pupil need not study these rules, till he is referred to them.

§ 2.] Kal. 99

is, however, strong enough to be retained in pause, when (283)

the syllable closes with Dagesh forte, as ^iD^JOp'''

{Pathakh is sometimes adopted in place of Segol, and even of Tsere.)

b) When a final tone-syllable begins with two consonants (as

PtblDp), the vocal Sh'va under the first gives place to a

■»• : It full vowel ; a more fitting position is thus secured for the tone, which is moved from the last syllable to the new

penultima : e. g. nbl^^p, h'^LDD ; TMUbD, HHir^ ; •l7:Dp\ T : ')T T at't t : |t ta*"t : : •

•l^bp''* The vowel selected is always that which had been

dropt from the same syllable, in consequence of the lengthening of the word. Vocal Sh'va in pause becomes Segol, and a Khateph gives place to the analogous long

vowel, as ^^'t^, ^iv^; ^^U, "'^H. • ~: 'AT • t; -a

c) This tendency to place the tone on the penulfhna in pause shows itself moreover in several words which then regu- larly retract the tone, as Oj^, Oj^}; r\Di^, Hi^i^ ;

• T -AX X - T /,T

7ir\V> njli^ ; and in some other single cases.

The forms that end in ti, td, mi, are penacute 2S4 (Milel) ; the others are oxytone (Milra). [a) By pause (as just described) the accent is, in several persons, shifted back, and the original vowel of the second syllable restored, [b) Vav cotiversive of the Perfect moves the accent forward one syllable.

Infinitive or second ground-form of each Conju- 285 gation]. — («) The shorter infinitive, or infinitive con- struct 6b)P, k7ol) is the more usual ; and is the form that is necessarily used with prefio?ed prepositions.

b) The longer infinitive [infinitive absolute) is used, when the action of the verb is stated independently by itself; it is of common occurrence in a frequent Hebrew idiom, by which it is either —

1) placed before a finite verb, to denote intensity (or strong asseveration) ;

2) placed after a finite verb, to denote continuity (a lasting action).

k2

100 The Hegular Verb, [ch. 8.

286 Thus i^SpD!) ^DD^, nich^oph nich^aphta (thou ear- nestly longedst) ; 20i3^ ZODti^''], vayyishpo^ shapho/, he ivill be playing the judge.

287 A sort of gerund is formed by the infinitive con- struct with 7 : e. g. /iD\)7 for killing \interficiendo, ad

inierficiendim{\ . It may be followed by a substantive (which, strictly speaking, stands in the genitive re- lation to the gerundial infinitive).

288 The 7 is here so closelv connected, that it constitutes part of the grammatical form /JOp A lik-^6l ; 7Di A lin-pol (with

dagesh lene) : just as the preformatives of the Imperfect (e. g. in yik-tol). But ^ (in), ^ (from), are not supposed to be so

closely connected ; hence a hegadcephath letter (as 2nd radical) would not take dagesh lene : 7H)J^, bi-n'phol (wo? bin-pol).

289 Imperative.'] — (a) The chief form of the Imperative 7Zi|p (/^fp) is the same that lies also at the basis of

the Imperfect, and which, when viewed as an In- finitive, is likewise allied to the noun. It expresses only the second person, but has inflexions for the Feminine and the Plural. It has no form for the third person, and even the second must be expressed by the Imperfect, when a negative precedes, as /ZDpJn 7^J, do not kill; lit. thou shall not kill \ne oc-

cidas] (not blh\) b'^).

b) The proper passive conjugations have no Im- perative, but the reflexive Niphal and Hithpael have.

290 The inflexion is exactly similar to that of the Im- perfect.

291 Imperfect.'] — The final 6 (Kholem) is ovi\y tone-long (as in the Inf. and Imp.). Hence, a) it is very sel- dom written fully, b) Before Makkeph it becomes Kamets-Khatuph. c) Before the affbrmatives ^- and

T it becomes vocal Sk'va. d) In a very few passages it is changed into ^ before these afibrmatives, but

§ 2.] Kal 101

only when it stands close before the pause: e. g. (291) •IZOIBIi^), yishpu/u, they will judge,

a) Intransitive verbs {middle E and 0) take a (Pathakh) in 292 the Imperfect, as 71]), to be great, Imperf. 7"^^^; IJOp, to

be small, Imperf. ]tOp"'-

b) Sometimes both forms exist together ; the Jw^er/". with 0 is then transitive, and that with a intransitive : but now and then both occur without any difference of meaning. In the irregular verbs, the feeble e (Tsere) is also found in the final syllable, as ]ri^ for ^iU**. These three forms

of the Imperfect are called /mper/ec^ 0, Imperfect A, Im- perfect E *.

c) In the Pentateuch ] {no) occurs m place of H^, especially

T T

after Kfli? conversive.

d) For !) (m) the fuller ending ]!) (un) is not uncommon

(mostly with an obvious stress on the word at the end of a

period), the vowel of the second syllable being retained, as

i^Till^j yirga'zun, they tremble f. AT :•

In like manner vtDpn has a longer form with final ] : 293

In pause [282], the vowel of the second syllable, if it had be- 294 come Sh'va, is restored, and takes the tone, as ''7L0pjn, ^^[DP''.

* For the 3rd plur. fern. il^bbpD is substituted in three

instances, to distinguish it from the 2nd pers., the form

n^^bp'' (etymologically more correct), as in Chaldee and

Arabic ; and in several instances Il^/bpn seems to have been

used improperly for the 3rd pers. singular.

t This original ending ]) is common in Aramaean and Arabic. Of the Imperfect with J^, i«^V^J\ Jer. x. 5, is the only example.

T •

X This is also common in Aram, and Arabic (probably in imitation of the plural ending V). G.)

K 3

102 The Regular Verb. [ch. 8.

[Learn the Paradigm of Kal, iathe Regular Verb, Appendix D.]

Vocabulary.

295 To seek, to require, ti/ll, da-

~ T

rash. To be great, 7I5, gadal. To anoint, "^JDJ? na^ach. To write, 3.n3> cathabh.

— T

To take hold, of; take, seize, handle, i^H)D> taphas.

~ T

To rage (tumultuously), '^y^,

— T

ragash. Tofiee, rflU* barakh.

~ T

To observe, "1^^, natsar.

~ T

To wink {mulieiously or craft- ily), y^T), karats.

To devise {evil), 1^^*111. kharash

~ T

{toplough; to fabricate, ^c). To forsake, ^t^. i^azabh. To go on, ")Ii,*^^, ashar.

— T

To slay (especially animals), raiD, ^abhakh.

— T

To mix, to mingle, 'T[D^3. n^a-

sach. To arrange, to prepare, TT"!!?,

i^arach. To inhabit, ]Dt^, shachan. Very, Ij^D, m'od (lit.

strength). An accusation, H^IO'V (w), si^-

nab (saifan, to oppose). Baal, byil, bOal.

A prophet, i^'^21 nabhi* (deck

3, a), [riabha% to announce'^.

Holy, Ten, khasid (deck 3, a).

• T

A commandment, riXj^'D («)» mitsvah (tsavah, to set up).

A covenant, /T'nil* b'rith.

Between, "j''^,, ben.

Seed, ^^T, ze'ra)) (zara)?, to

scatter, to sow).

Time, season, J"]]^, i>eth, (c. deck >

8, bj contr, for JIT^, from

m^r, to go by). A victim, PTIIlDj ^e'bhakh (see

to slay, above). When? ''JID, mathai.

— T

How long? >nQ""7J/, i?ad-

mathai. Harp, lyre, "11^)3, cinnor. Numerous, 133. cabbed. To be able, 73"') yacol {verb

T

middle 0).

A prison, Dn^DH D''3, beth

ha^urim (lit. house of the bound; contr. from jy^l

I^Di^. a prisoner; partcp.

T

of HDKj ^sar, to bind.

~ T

To go forth, ^^"^1, yatsa.

§2.]

Kal

Exercise 29.

103

a) :^1h^-n^* '^r^t'n i

T T •• : • T ; T T T

: nbt:^> vi^Dn ^11^ 8

''^'bV iDpi^ n^TD 9

T •• ; • •• ' 'v T • — • ;

•• T ; T

- X •■ T : X T : •

• X ; T X ; •., ■''IT

*n^n ^^?)^ ^*nv is :'^l7^?

^DjrnJ:^ tob*^^ '^i)^ ^p 19 n^iLD 20 * : n-rrr in^n

' : • TT • ~

1 darashti eth-Y'hovah. 296

2 gadalta m'od. 3 va^ni na^achti malci i^al-Tsiyyon.

4 cath'bhu si/nah i?al-y6- sh*bhe Y'hiidah. 5 tiphsu eth- n'bhie haBBa))al. 6 lammah ragh'shu goyim ? 7 Hagar bar'khah mipp'ne Sarah.

8 v'de'rech kh^sidav yishmor.

9 m'zimmah tishmor i'^alecha.

10 n'tsor, b'ni, mitsvath abhi- cha. 11 zoHh b'rithi ''sher tishm'm beni ubhenechem' ubhen zar'i^^cha akli^recha.

1 2 :>ad-mathai ;L^atsel tishcabh'?

13 adam B'liyyai^al Tsli a'ven, korets b'i'enav, khoresh rai? b'chol-))eth. 14 i^izbhu ph'thaim v'ishru bh'de'rech bhinah. 15 ^abh'khah tihh- khahh, mas'chah yenahh, aph i^ar'chah' shulkhanahh.

16 r'shai?im lo^ yishc'nu arets (p.). 17 v'ach eth- dimchem' I'naphshothechem' edrSsh. 18 Yubhalhu^hayati* *bbi col-tophes cinnor v'i^ugabh. 19miyach6llishpo^ eth-)^amm'cha haccabhed hazzeh ? 20 mibbeth hasurim yatsa limloch.

Was.

104 The Regular Verb, [ch. 8.

(296) b) Translate into Hebrew —

1. I will seek Jehovah. 2. My children, seek ye the Jehovah. 3. Why did he fly from the face of Abraham ? 4. I will keep this thy covenant, 5. They will write an accusation. 6. How long shall we dwell in the land? 7- Thou shalt keep my covenant. 8. We will keep their covenants.

9) Write down the Perfect, Imperative, and Imperfect of shdmar through all its persons.

10) Write down the Infinitive {absol. and constr.) of ddrash.

11) Write down both Participles of ndtsdr.

Chap. VIII. §3. Niphal.

297 The full characteristic of this conjugation is the preformative syllable hm QH). It appears only in

the Inf. constr. "^ipprT (by assimilation from 7l^\>)T\). With the Inf. are connected, in form, the Imper. /lOpn and the Imperf. 7lDP\ contracted from /ZOpH^

In the Perf. the (less essential) h has been suffered to fall away, and only n remains as the characteristic, hence /Zpfpi (niktal). The Participle is distinguished

from the Perfect only by the long (t), as bl^\)^, fem. rh'l^y^l or rh'i^^y The inflexion of Niphal is per- fectly analogous to that of Kal. [See Paradigm D in Appendix.]

298 Hence the characteristics of Niphal are (1) for the Perf. and Partcp. the Nan prefixed; for the Imper., Inf., and Imperf. Dagesh in the first radical.

299 The same marks are found in the irregular verbs, except that where the first radical is a guttural, Dagesh forte is necessarily omitted, and compensation made for it by lengthening the pre- ceding vowel.

300 Significations of Niphal^ Niphal resembles the Greek middle voice, and hence,

301 a) It is primarily reflexive of Kal; often in verbs

which express passion or feeling.

b) It frequently expresses reciprocal action —

1) primarily, when the action is done to one another (to each other), or by one with another;

§ 3.] Niphal 105

2) secondarily, when two or more are concerned in the (sOl) same action in opjoosition to each other (B. a, 6).

c) It also, like Hithpael and the Greek Middle, denotes an action done to or for oneself,

d) It is often also passive of Kal, but also of Pi'el and Hiphil, when Kal is intransitive or not in use ; and in this case its meaning may again coincide with Kal (H'^'n, Kal and Niphal^ io be

sick), and even take an accusative. Examples of denominatives are : i21/J» cor datum fieri, from 302 ^22 /> hearts 130, to he born a male, from Ut, a male.

The older Hebrew Grammarians consider Niphal as the proper 303 Passive of Kal. This is decidedly incorrect ; for Niphal has not the characteristics of the other passives. According to the usage of the language, the passive signification is certainly the predominant one ; but it was first derived from the reflexive. The prefixed hin has (like the hith of Hithpael) the force of a reflexive pronoun.

The Inf. absol. 7iopJ (nik^ol) connects itself, in form, with 304

the Perfect, to which it bears the same relation as 7iZ5p to

bl^p' The i in the final syllable (which is essentially long) is

only found in the Inf. of Piel and Pual.

a) In pause [282], Pathakh often takes the place of Tsere in 305 the final syllable.

b) In the 2nd and 3rd plur. fern, the form with Pathakh is more common than that given in the Paradigm : e. g. nJ"llDTn (tizzacharnah), they shall be remembered, Isa.

Ixv. 17.

c) When the Imperf., or the Inf., or the Imper. is imme- diately followed by a monosyllable, the tone is mostly drawn back upon the penult, and consequently the final syllable, losing the tone, takes Segol instead of Tsere: e.g.

n3, 7^3'' (yiccashel bahh), he stumbled at it.

T " T •

d) In a few words, this form with the retracted tone is the only one in use.

e) A frequent form of the 1st Pers. is 7Z0pJ^ (ikkafel).

106

The Regular Verb.

[CH. 8.

The Short Paradigm of Kal and Niphal.

306

1 Kal

2 Niphal

\Perf.

ka^al nik^al

2 Injin. constr.

hikka^el

3 Imjjerat. \ 4 Imperf.

k7ol hikka/el

yik^ol yikka^el

5 Partcp. act.

ko^el

nik^al

6 Past partcp.

ka/ul

Eooamples of Verbs in Niphal,

307 Kal.	Niphal.
shamar, to keep.	nishmar	to keep oneself = (1) abstain from: (2) take heed, beware [cf. (pv\daaiaQai],
sathar, to hide.	("l.npp nistar	to hide oneself: to lie hid: to be hidden.
shapha^, to judge.	nishpa^	to contend (in a suit); to liti- gate (recipr.) : i. e. to place oneself with another at the bar of a court (E.).
lakham, to devour: to consume.	nilkham	(to consume one another =) fight \_naxt(yOai],
[bahal, to tremble'].	nibhhal	to tremble: to be terrified: to flee: to make (eager, trem- bling) haste [after, 7].
[thaJl^abh].	nithi^'abh	to be abominable.
[ma.\3it,to be smooth; hence to slip away]. [chalam, to wound, pierce].	nimla^ nichlam	to deliver oneself: to escape: to be delivered. to be insulted: to be shamed: to be ashamed [aio-xuMfcQai] .
[shai^an].	nishi^an	to rest oneself : to lean upon: to confide in.
[tsamad, to bind].	nitsmad	to bind oneself {to) ; to be at- tacked or adhere to.
[radam*, to snore].	nirdam	to sleep heavily : to fall down astounded.
* An onomatoei	lie word.	Cf. ^a^-Qdvh), dor-mio (G.).

§3.]

[shakaph, prob. to lay over; to cover. ~\

[camar, to warrn].

Niphal.

107

nishkaph

(to lay oneself over [e.g. a win- (307)

dow-sill] for the purpose of

looking out-=z) to look out;

to behold; to havg over (of a

mountain) ; and fig. to impend.

X^J(a^) to show oneself a prophet j to naba'" ^"^^^^^^^-

1Q3^ to be warmed J fig. to burn, to

. ~ 'S yearn.

nicmar ^

Vocabulary, [The forms in crotchets do not occur in Kal.]

To destroy, ["TQI^'], shamad I Before, in the sight of i;)^, 308

(in Niphal). To cut off, [Pi)], garaz. To cast out or up, [^1^)], ga-

-T

rash (Niph., to be cost or tossed up J to be agitated, troubled).

To separate, IHD, parad.

To break, "lH'iiT, shabhar.

— T

To bury, 12p, kabhar.

To hold, hold iipj to acquire, TJOJ^, tamach.

To take; to catch, IJ?, la-

chad *. To gather; to collect, Y^p,

kabhats. To stumble, 7'yi^3' cashal.

~ T

To burn, ^^V, saraph. To be pure, [H^p], kanah (Niph., to be unpunished).

ne'ged. From before, TfJliiD' Therefore, ]3"7^, )^al-cen.

■>

Suddenly, ^/13, pe'tha)^.

Remedy, -j KD"1D (a, a^),

Deliverance, ( ™^[P^, to heal).

^NSng (a, a-;,

y marpe" (rapha, to heal).

Grey-hair; old age, r^y^^DM,

sebhah (sibh, to be grey- headed).

Cord, ^2,h, khe'bhel ([kha-

bhal], to bind). A treacherous person, TillB* bo-

ged (partcp. Kal of [bagad]

to cover).

> Garment, 1^^ (decl. 6, a),

be'ged.

Harvest, ")^^p, katsir (decl.

• ' T

3, a) ; katsar, to reap.

* Also * to take by lot ' [Xayx^vu ?]

108

The Regular Verb,

[CH. 8.

[^0^) FrowardnesSy^'nyBT\r\, ta Deceiti

\ h^phuchah I (only in plur.), J haphach.

Wickedness, TV\r\, havvah.

T-

Righteous, p^"^2k> tsaddik. To write; to number , ")S)D.

~ T

5aphar.

Multitude, ^^.n (d), robh (ra- bhab, to become numerous).

Famine, 3yi, rai^abh (rai^ebh,

T T

to be hungry).

The bowels (fig. compassion), Uni, rakham (decl. 6,/).

Exercise 30.

309 a)

T ; • JT- • T : |t;

T^^ "^yf^ vrk W^^ ^ :np^^^ Dn:33 nr]^ 12

• T V T -: I - : : •

• 2pv;_ ^J^ •'i:>'ni^n 17 :iTO'' n'vm h^n 18

"T • • T : ••

* For ninsacti.

1 nigrazti minne'ged i^enecha.

2 v'har'sha))im cayyam nig- rash. 3 J?al-cen pe'thai? yishshabher', v'en marpe".

4 tikkabher b'sebhah <6bhah.

5 b'kbabl^ kha^^atho yitta- mech. 6 nishm'dah miBBin- yamin ishsbah. 7 b'de'rech khochmah 15 thiccashel.

8 b'gadav lo thissarapbnah.

9 mei''61ara nissacbti*. 10 nir- dam bakkatsir ben mebhish f .

1 1 I'shon tabpuchothticcareth.

12 b'havvath bog'dim yilla- chedu (jO). 13 yad I'yad % lo-yinnakeh rai^, v'zera)^ tsad- dikim nimla^ {p). 14 gain- damo hinneb nidrash {p).

1 5 l6-tbiccareth haerets bara- i>abh. 16 nicbm'ru rakh^mav el-akbiv. 17 hikkabh'tsu b'ne Yai^-'kobh. 18 beth r'sbai^im yisbsbamed.

f * That maketh ashamed/

X * Hand in hand' = * though hand be joined in hand.'

§ 4.] Piel and Pual. 109

h) 1. His brother was taken-captive. 2. Thy seed shall not (309) be numbered (for *) multitude. 3. The treacherous man shall be taken in his wickedness. 4. The wicked {pi.) shall not be unpunished. 5. And they separated (themselves) from each other. 6. My clothes are burned. 7- And I shall be destroyed, I and ray house. 8. The kings have been anointed. 9. Our queen will be anointed. 10. His garment is burnt. 11. He will be buried, 12. The land shall be utterly destroyed. 13. Gather {pi.) all Israel: and they were gathered. 14. (In the-being-gathered-together of the nations =) In the nations being gathered together and the kingdoms. 15. Those who-are- gathered {pi. partcp.) to thee.

16. Write down the short Faradigm of "TQIi^ in Niphal.

17. Write the Hebrew of— ~ "^

1) To be buried. 2) Ye {fem.) shall be buried. 3) Being buried {fem. sing. ^ fem. plur.).

Chap. VIII. § 4. Piel and (its passive) Pual.

^p° The characteristic of this conjugation is the 310 doubling of the middle radical.

In Piel, the Imperf. (fep^, y'ka//el) and the 311 Partcp. p^'p^, m'ka^^el), whose preformatives take Sh'va, are formed, according to the general analogy, from the Inf. and Imperat. 7i^p_. The Passive (Pual)

has more obscure vowels, and its Infinitive is of the same form with the 3rd sing, of the Perfect. In other respects the Active and Passive follow the same analogy. In the Perfect of Piel, Pathakh takes the place of Tsere in the first and second persons, which, properly, have for their basis the form 7Z0p. See

(and learn) the full conjugation of Piel in Para- digm D. The 72, which in this and the succeeding conjugations is the 312

characteristic of the Partcp., may be derived from '•Q, who? in the sense of some one.

The characteristic Dagesh in the middle radical is omitted 313 only in the following cases —

a) When this letter is a guttural.

* Q. How pointed before Resh ?

L

110 The Regular Verb. [ch. 8.

!13) h) Sometimes, though rarely, when it has 5A'«?a; the omission is then sometimes indicated by a Khateph under the letter that ought to be dugeshed. ^^ In the Imperf. and Partcp. the Sh'va under the pre- formatives may always serve as a mark of these conjugations.

Significations of Piel.~\

314 a) It denotes intensity and repetition^, and that

the action is performed upon many. This sig- nification of Piel is found with various shades of difference. With the eager pursuit of an object is connected the influencing and urging others to perform it. Hence,

b) It has a causative signification (like Hiphil), and may be resolved by to make, cause, or let; to declare (a person to be what the root denotes); to regard him as — , to help.

c) Denominatives are frequently found in this con- jugation, which in general mean to make a thing (what the noun expresses), or to be in any ivay occupied with it. — What kind of reference the verb then denotes, depends on the kind of ope- ration of which the noun is susceptible : in the case of several possible operations, custom arbi- trarily affixes the verb to one of them ; and often restricts the use of it, in this sense, to particular objects (e. g. to afield in the case of /o stone).

d) They sometimes express the taking away or in- juring the thing or part, of which the noun is the name. [Compare our, to brain a man ; to bone a herring; to stone raisins: to dust a room, &c.]

e) So also in some verbs, whose origin cannot be traced to a noun.

315 a) When Piel approaches the causative force of HipMl, it

primarily expresses this notion with the accessory one of care and great activity, b) Sometimes, however, it is used together with HiphU, without any great difference of force, especially to ex- press transitively what Kal expresses intransitively (E.).

* So intensive and iterative nouns are also formed by doubling the middle stem-letter.

§4.]

Piel and PuaL

111

The Short Paradigms of Kal, Niphal, and Piel.

6 Past 316 partcp. of Kal.

ka/M

	IPerf.	2 Inf. c^tr. 3 Imperat.	4 Imperf.	5 Partcp.
1 Kal	ka^al	k'/ol kVol	yik/ol	kofel
2 Mphal	nik^al	hikkafel hikka^el	yikka^el	nik^al
3 Piel	ki^^el	ka«el ka/^el	y'ka^el	m'ka/^el

Normal Forms.

Per/. kiftel, ki^'lah, ki^al'ta.

Imperat. ka//el, ka^^'li, ka^/el'nah.

Imperf. y'ka^fel, t'ka^^li, t'ka^fel'nah.

317

Examples.

Kajl.

a) bi^"^, shaal

— T

pnji» tsakhak

to ask to laugh

Piel.

318

to beg.

(to laugh repeatedly), to sport, to jest.

to bury (many persons).

to loose.

to relate J to tell.

to (cause to learn ^) teach.

to make alive.

n^p, kiibhar to bury r\r\D> pathakh to open "13D» saphar to number

- T

b) "707, lamad to learn

— T

c) '^VT^, khayah to live

TT

{Piel) pl^Jiy tsiddek, to declare innocent (314, 6)._

"T^"*, yilled, to assist in child-bearing.

Pp, kinnen, to make a nest (]p, ken, nest).

"13J7, i^ipper, to throw dust (i^aphar, dust).

d) ^1^, sheresh, to root out [the /orm will be explained hereafter] . ^3t» zinnebh (to injure the tail = ) to rout the rear- guard of an army.

€) 7pD, 5ikkel, {\) to stone, {2) to remove stones from afield.

l2

112 The Regular Verb, [ch. 8.

319 Pual is the Passive of Piel: e.g. 3^2, to steal; Piel, to steal; Pual, to be stolen.

320 In Piel the proper and literal signification of a word is often retained, when Kal has adopted a figurative one, the former being the stronger and more prominent idea : e. g. KS)"1 i"

T T

Piel to stitch up, in Kal to heal; K*12l' Piel to cut, to hew out, Kal to form, to make; n)^, Piel to uncover y Kal to reveal.

TT

321 Piel is also found intransitively, but only in poetry, as an intensive form, as rSPIH, frangi; Hi^D? to he open.

322 The Perfect of Piel has frequently Pathakh in the final syllable instead of Tsere: e. g. T^lh^j to destroy; '^'2.'^, to break in

pieces. This occurs especially before Makkeph, and in the middle of a period, when other words immediately follow ; but at the end of a period Tsere is the more common vowel. Some verbs have Segol, as 13,1, to speak; 12)2), to atone; D3l3> to wash. " '

323 ci) The Imperf., Infin., and Imperat., when followed by Mak-

keph, generally take Segol in the final syllable *.

b) With Vav conv. we have also 7tOpi^1 for 7L2p^}^• Instead of nj7^pn are found such forms as rTj7Z2pil'

324 c) The Infin. absol. has the marked form 7J5p (as ibS casti-

gando) ; and in Pual, ^^^. But more frequently the form 7tOp is used.

325 In Pual, instead of Kibbuts, is found less frequently iiCAamefs- Khatuphf (e. g. DIND. dyed red).

326 The Partcp. Pual sometimes occurs without the prefix O; it

is then distinguished (like the Partcp. Niphal) only by the Kamets in the final syllable (e, g. Hp A taken).

* In the 1st pers. sing. Imperf., besides 723pi^» there occur

also (very seldom) the forms HITi^j 1VDK«

f It is merely an orthographic variation, when Shurek takes the place of Kibbuts, as 17?)''.

§4.]

Piel and Pual,

113

Vocabulary,

To seek J to try to get, ]i}p3,, bikkesh, Piel {Kal not used).

To restore, repay, recompense,

U^'^> D /Ii^> shillam, shTllem

{Piel) ; [(shalam), to be at peace, &c.].

To seek early, "IHt^. sbakhar

- T

(denom. from shakhar, the dawn).

To overthrow; to pervert, Cl^D*

- T

5alaph, in Piel. To separate, "713, parad.

~T

Niphal, to separate oneself; to be separated.

To lie, no, cazabh (both in

~ T

Kal and Piel).

Knowledge, Jl^l, dai^ath (pro- perly an inf.).

A scomer; a scoffer, Y?, lets,

partcp. of Y'l'p (v), to scoff, mock.

Sevenfold, UTi^^^, shibh-

* ~ T ; •

i^athayim (prop, a Dual). Thus, p, cen. Life, D^TFi khayyim.

Evil, ^1, TSii) ; and HJ/I, ra- 327

~ T T

i>ah,/(?m. (as abstract). Favour, 'j^^{"l (hw), ratson.

Wickedness, n^^ti^l (w), rish- i^ah (rashai?, to be wicked).

Not {to be), I^J^* {constr. ]>i^), ay in (constr. en).

Folly, r\^'^^, ivve'Ieth.

Mischief, ^^2^, i^amal.

T T

Lip, pfBti^, saphah. Dual

D''JlSi^, s'phatha'yi'm. . — ^ .

A witness, ip, i^ed (strictly a

partcp. from I'^p) : decl. 1.

Truth, faithfulness, \^'Oi^y

emun (decl. 3, g) ; ish ^mu- nim {a man offaithfulness=.) a faithful (or true) man.

To wash [0^3], cabha5, in

- T

Piel and Pual. To be or become clean, IH^,

•• T

iaher.

* This particle (properly a substantive, denoting nothingness^ nought) always comprehends the substantive verb {to be).

l3

114

The "Regular Verb.

[CH. 8.

Exercise 31 (Piel). *DV'^ Ultk la^Qil 1 1 ha-m'lammed adam dajl^ath

328 a)

r\v^ ^i'^^'^ U'^rh r^'6'11

T T ' •• - . . — • 'tt ;

^i^n^ 'rm^rb « = C3 23, «) niD ^Di? 10* ' o^")"!; pijpph

\ '. ~ " ~'. . '

'^^y'ib wm^^ 1^^ 12

:^ii:i n^n'^OT 13

T ; • •• • T

-.ni^nS inpD i''i< 14

T •• T •• ' - J

{p). 2 bikkesh lets khochmah, vaayin(j9). 3 y'shallem shibh- i^athayim {p). 4 cen-ts'dakah I'khayyim um'raddeph rai^ah I'motho. 5 shokher tobh

y'bhakkesh ra-tson. G rishi>ah t'^alleph kha^^ath. 7 kha^/aim t'raddeph rai^ab, v'eth-tsaddi- kim y'shallem-^obb. 8 I'tha*- vah ^^ y'bbakkesh niphrad. 9 ivve'leth adam t'salleph darco. 10 i^amal siphtehera t'dabber'nah. 11 libb'cha

y'dabber tabpu'choth. 12 )>ed ^munim 15" y'chazzebh.

13 damo, hinneh, nidrasb (j9).

14 en m'kabber labemmah.

15 cibbe* bayyayin I'bbusho ubb'dam-i^^nabbim ^uthoh.

16 v'chibba^tem bigdechem bayyom hashsh'bhii^i u/'har- tem.

li) 1. Their clothes shall be washed on'' the third day. 2. Foohshness perverteth our ways. 3. We will seek^^ wisdom and knowledge. 4. Wisdom will not pervert the ways of men. 5. I have washed my clothes. 6. We will wash our clothes. 7. She has washed her clothes, and is clean, 8. We have washed our clothes, and are clean. 9. Having washed his clothes. 10. They were sought-for.

* Kamets in pause.

f ' One who is separated,' or * who separates himself (from man- kind in general).' This is the subject or nominative case.

§4.]

Piel and Pual.

115

The Short Paradigms of Kal, Niphal, Piel, and Pual.

	1 Per/.	2 Ivf. cstr.	3 Imperat.	4 Imperf.	5 Partcp.
iKal	ka/al	kVol	k'/ol	yik/ol	ko/el
2 :Niphal	nik/al	hikka/el	hikka/el	yikka/el	nik/al
3 Fiel	ki//el	ka//el	ka//el	y'ka/^el	m'ka//el
4 Pual	ku//al	ku«al	(none)	y'ku//al	m'ku//al

6 P«s< 329 partcp. of Kal.

ka/ul

Vocabulary,

Soul, person, t^3^, ne'phesh

(decl. 6, 8 ; naphash, /o respire).

Bounty, gift, HD'IIIj b'rachah

(ne'phesh-b'rachah, person of bounty =z a bountiful per- son) ; barach, to bless.

Lo I ]n, hen.

Understanding, 7^^^ or p^)^, ... ,...

se'chel or se'chel (decl. 6, a 2) ; sachal, to act wisely.

According to, ''Q^, I'phi (7 and ^3 the stat. constr. of the irregular peh, JIB? « mouth).

To praise, 7711, hillel {Piel of [halal] /o be bright, clear).

Hope, roil^D (« <^)) tokhe'- leth (7n\ in Piel, to hope).

To draw, '^'ll)!2, mashach (Piel, 330

to protract). Disease, r]brjD, makh'^leh ;

rhnr2 (a), liiakh^iah iribn,

T -: - T T

to be worn; to be sick).

Rebuke, JlTl^^D («wy), tocha-

khath ; yachakh, to prove, to rebuke.

To hide [l/lD], sathar (Pual,

to be hidden, to be secret).

To cover, forgive, expiate, "^33, caphar.

— T

Bone, D^y> i^e'tsem (in pause, i,>atsem).

Report, nyiDt^(t^), sh'mu^^ah; T :

shamai^, to hear. Love, tlZTrnt ah*bhah(a>). Dust, 1H)^, i^aphar.

_ Some segolaie nouns with vowels e-c are not declined 331 like melech (nialchi, &c.), but like sepher (decl. 6, b), siphri, &c. Se'chel (or sechel) takes sichli.

116

The Regular Verb.

[CH. 8.

Exercise 32 (Pual).

332 «) ■{p)]^'in T\2'^:rti^^ i

T \ : T t: v|v

: (p) u^t' viA:! p^"i:i in 2

X \ ; T -\ " '•

T \ ; - - T

V T ••, : T - : - ••

: y\v ^B'^i np^^i. "TDnn s

I : •

:Da3 i:in 13

T . I V

1 ne'phesh-b'rachah th'dush- shan(p). 2 hen tsaddik baarets y'shullam {p). 3 I'phi sichlo y'hullal-ish, 4 ne'phesh kha- rutsim t'diishslian {p). 5 to- khe'leth m'mushshachah ma- kMah lebh. 6 sh5mer *d5nav y'cbub'bad {p). 7 ^obhah to- chakhath m'gullah meah^bhah m'A-iitta reth {p). 8 b'khe'sed ve^raeth y'chiippar i>avon. 9 sbiiddad sadeh. 10 sh'rau- i^ah ^obbah t'dasshen- i^atsem {p). 1 1 shammab

kiibbar Abhraham v'Sarah isbto. 12 v'sbuppach damam cei^apbar. 13 habbe'ged

cubba*.

h) 1. Our fields are wasted. 2. This (is) the place where ^" I shall be buried. 3. The righteous {pi.) are recompensed in the earth. 4. Those who observe (partcp.) their masters are ho- noured. 5. The iniquity of my people shall not be purged. 6. The river in which '^ the clothes are washed. 7. Lo! the fields of the city are wasted. 8. Are thy (masc.) iniquities purged ? 9. Shall not your (/em. /jZ.) clothes be washed ? 10. Mercy, by which iniquity shall be purged. 11. Mercy and truth, by which iniquity is purged. 12 Thy mercy, by which my iniquities are purged.

* M'gullah is fem. partcp. Pual from galah, a verb Lamed He. In this sentence /obhah is the predicate, the copula (= is) being omitted.

§ 5.] HiphU and HophaL 117

Chap. VIII. § 5. HiphU and (its passive) Hophal.

a) The characteristic of Hiphil is a prefixed hd or 333 hi, and ''-- inserted after the second radical.

h) From the Infin. T^pn are formed the Imperf. and the Partcp. b^bp^, ^V?!^^ ^^^ ^''^1?'^'

c) In Hophal (as in Pual), the Infin. is of the same form with the 3rd pers. sing, of the Per- fect ; and in its other forms follows the general analogy.

In the 1st and 2nd pers. Perf. the ^- falls away, 334

and Pathakh takes its place. See the Paradigm, Ap- pendix D.

The Yod (which is not found in the Aramaean or Arabic) 335 does not appear to be an essential characteristic of the form, but it has arisen out of a shorter vowel.

The marks of this conjugation are, therefore, in the Perf., 336 Imperat., and Infin., the prefix H; in the Imperf. and Partcp., the vowel under the preformatives, which in Hiphil is Pathakh, in Hophal, Kibbuts or Kamets-khatuph.

Meanings of Hiphil.']

a) It is properly causative of Kal (and in this sense 337 is more frequently employed than Piel).

b) When Kal is transitive, Hiphil takes two accu- satives.

c) Frequently Piel and Hiphil are both in use in the same signification (as "73N, abhad, to perish;

Piel and Hiphil, to destroy) ; but generally only one of them is found, or they have some dif- ference of meaning : thus "TdS, cabhed, to be

heavy ; in Piel, to honour; in Hiphil, to make heavy.

d) Intransitive verbs merely become transitive : e. g. nZOJ, to boiv (intrans.) ; Hiphil, to bow

(trans.).

118 The Regular Verb, [ch. 8.

338 The causative and transitive Hiphil is employed in Hebrew for the expression of notions which other languages express by intransitive verbs. Thus, any change in a man's habit of body was conceived m Hebrew as the result of personal agency^ and represented as produced by the individual himself: e. g. ]Dti^, Hiphil, to become fat {nro^pexXy to produce fat) \ ntfT and

yDj»^, Hiphil, to become strong (properly to develop strength) ;

^^Vi Hiphil, to become feeble. The same analogy applies

to lli/p, Hiphil, to become rich (properly to make, to acquire,

riches) ; also especially to words which express the taking of a new colour, as ]^2l7n. to become white, &c. Moreover, states

or conditions, become, in the Hebrew mode of conception, acts : 6. g- ti^'^nmij not, to be silent, but properly to keep silence

(silentium facere, Plin.) ; ^^i)"in> to lead a quiet life. In such

cases there is often an ellipsis, as ^''^'♦n» to deal well; DTfl^n.

to do wickedly, properly to make good or bad (sc. ^311, VD"T7>

: - T T ;

which are also often expressed).

339 tt) These remarks apply also to Denominatives, i. e. the verb

often expresses the notion of producing or putting forth, what the original noun denotes, e. g. ^"'Ili/n, to put forth

roots; ]''"lpn, to put forth horns.

b) Hiphil also expresses the actual use of a member, as ]''T|^n>

to listen (properly to make cars); 'j''^7rTj to chatter, to

slander (after the same analogy, properly to make tongue, to use the tongue freely),

340 The signification of Hophal, as of Niphal, may sometimes coincide with that of Kal : e. g. ^^^ potuit, Imperf. Hoiihal, potens fiet, i. e.poterit.

341 It is only the Perfect of Hiphil that always retains the ^_ of

the final syllable (in 3rd pers. sing, and plnr.); on the contrary, the Infin., Imper., and hnperf. frequently take T*ere instead of it (in Chaldee the usual form), although usage generally makes a distinction between forms with ^ and e. Tsere is in this case only tone-long, and hence in the lengthening of the forms it becomes vocal Sh'va, and, with gutturals, is changed into Pathakh,

§ 5.] Hiphil and Hophal. 119

The Infin. absol. has generally Tsere, with and without Yod, 342

as ^'^pr\, iiion, I'Dii^n*.

The Imperat. but seldom takes the form TZOpil; instead of it 343 are employed the shortened and the lengthened forms ^'{^'p'r\ and il/^tOprr. The first takes Segol before Makkeph f.

In the Perf. are sometimes found the forms I^D /DIl, we have 344 reproached, and '^phi^^i^, I have soiled {with. J^ as in Aramaean).

In the Imperf. and Partcp. the characteristic H regularly 345 gives place to the preformatives, as T^p\ P'^l^pf2, but not to prepositions in the Infin., ^'^JOpIlA because their connexion

with the ground-form is less intimate than that of the pre- formatives. To both rules there are some few exceptions.

1^" The tone, in Hiphil, does not fall on the affbrmatives 346 !), H-j aii^ ^— They take it, however, in the Perf. when Vav

T •

conversive is prefixed.

In the Passive {Hophal) Perf., Imperf., and Partcp. m (\) is 347 found in the first syllable as well as 6 (t), pj^pH, but not so

often in the regular verb : e. g. ^Sti^H |.

The Infin. absol. is distinguished by (••) in the final syllable. 348 Of the Infin. constr., as given in the Paradigm, there happens to be no example in the regular verb.

The Short Paradigms of Kal, Niphal, Piel, Pual, Hiphil, and Hophal.

6 Past pmicp. of

	\Perf.	2 Inf. cstr.	3 Imperat.	4 Imperf.	5 Partcp.
I Kal	ka^al	k'^ol	k'^ol	yik^ol	kofel
2 Niphal	nik^al	hikka^el	hikka/el	yikkaiel	nik/al
3 Piel	ki/<el	ka/^el	ka»el	y'ka^el	m'ka^/el
4 Pual	ku^^al	ku«al	(none)	y'kii^/al	m'kiif/a)
5 Hijyhil	hik/il	hak/il	hak^el	yak/il	mak^il
6 Hophal	hok/al	hok/al	(none)	yok/al	mok^al

Kal. ka^l

349

* Unfrequent exceptions, in which the form with Tsere stands for the Infin. constr., are found in Deut. xxvi. 12; xxxii. 8.

t The form of the Partcp. with (••) in the Sing, is doubtful (Isa. liii. 3).

X Verbs ]3 have m constantly, as l^H.

130

The Regular Verb,

[CH. 8.

Vocabulary.

350 To he holy, ^Ip, kadash.

— ' T

To bend forward, ?)p^, sha-

kaph (in Hipb. to look). To act prudently, 732^, sachal

— T

(in Hiph. to be wise, partcp. wise).

To hide; to treasure up, ]H)iij tsaphan.

To hearken unto, 2lti^p (in

Hiph. with ]]\^, ozen, ear =

to prick up the ear toj to incline the ear to =: attend to).

To hunger, ^J?1, rai^ebh (in

Hiph, to cause to hunger; to starve).

To devise, yiiJH* khashabh.

- T

Heaven, D"»D^. shama'yim

• ~ T

{constr. '^121^).

Doing ; deed (of man, in a bad sense), n^*'^!;; (w), :i^4ilah (i^alal).

Now, nW> i^attah.

T —

Profane, P)jn> khaneph

*• T

(usually translated hypo- crite).

Corn (separated from the husk), 13. (d), bar (barar, to sepa- rate).

Root, Uj"^']^, shoresh (pi.

Q'^ti^l^, shorashim, with

Kamets Khatuph instead of Khateph Kamets).

From above, 7^DDj mimma-

)>al. From below, Jinj^D) mitta-

khath. To shame; to hurt, Q/S, ca-

lam (in Fiel). A lamb, 1^^113, ce'bhes.

Wise; intelligent, 'J'>3Q. nie-

bhin. A prodigal, py\^, z6\e\ (partcp .

Kal). Lot, ^"lii), goral.

T

Powerful, U)'^V> i^atsum.

T

To eat, p3i^, achal.

Flesh, li^li}, sh'er (decl. 1, a)

To strip (off) i to fiay, tO^D,

- T

pashaf.

§5.]

HipMl and Hophal.

121

Exercise 33 (Hiphil).

0) -inwrr ^ji^ni^n i

..... ' . ~ • T

bm niJD B * : -)3 -i^n;:^D

* • I . i- .. .

D^^J a^ 10 --b^'^vD i2^b bmn 11 :i3S^ n*in^ o:ij^ 12 ^n^^n^™ un'^

V1D TDli^J^I 13 :Dn^^iDD

. . . . _ ^ ...••;•

• r\nr\D r^yi) b)it^r2

^"pun Ji''iiii^2 ^Vn? ^^

Di^O^i r^r '"^i^t ^biii 16 -i^n: 17 :^W3n nn'bvD

... . ^. .. ^ .. T

OUi^ W'^y D'''?'?'IT

1 hishkithu hithi^i'bhu i^^li- 351 lah. 2 Y'hovah mishsha-

mayim hishkiph i^al-b'ne- adam, lir^oth h*yesh mascil doresh etli-^l5him. 3 b'ni im mitsvothai titspon ittach, I'hakshibh lakhochmah 6z- nekha. 4 i^attah bhanim

haksbibhu I'lmre phi. 5 16 yari^ibh Y'hovah ne'phesh tsaddik. 6 b'pheh khaneph yashkhith rei^ehu. 7 b'rachah I'rosh mashbir bar. 8 <6bh yankhil b'ne-bhanim. 9 r'tson-me'lech I'i^e'bhed mascil. 10 lebh adam

y'khashshebh darco. 11 hin- khil otham eth-haarets.

12 anochi hishmadti eth- ha^mori mipp'nehem.

13 viiasbmid piryo mimmai^al v'shorashav mittakhath.

14 v'hacc'sabhim hiphrid Ya- i?*k6bh. 15 midyanim yash- bith haggoral (/>) ; ubhen i^*tsurnim yaphrid. 16 ach'lu sh'er )>armri v'i^oram mei7*le- hem hiphshi/u. 17 notser torah ben mebhin v'ro)?eh zol'lim yachlim abhiv.

' One who feeds,* partcp. Kal.

M

122

The Regular Verb,

[CH. 8.

{351) h) 1. He destroyed the Midianites from before us. 2. He will utterly destroy the Amorites. 3. I have separated the dogs. 4. They will flay his skin from off him. 5. The judges cause- contention -to-cease. 6. We will separate the righteous. 7. Wisdom separates her children.

8. Write down the short Paradigms of IQti^ in Niphal and Hiphil.

9. Write down the short Paradigm of Cj7p in Piel.

Vocabulary.

352 To cast iy\bt), ^"hp^, bish- lich. To invade, lay waste, ^1]^},

— T

shadad.

To trouble (water by trampling in it), '^'BIj raphas.

— T

To be corrupt [Jnnii*]. sha-

~ T

khath (in Hiph. and Hoph. to be corrupted).

To stand, 1t2y, i>amad (in

~ T

Hiph. to make to stand; Hoph. to be set or placed: al. to be held up).

To mourn, 7^^, abhal.

- T

Grave, ")^p, ke'bher (decl.

6, a; but, with suffixes, kibhr-t, &c.).

Branch, "l^J, netser.

Gift: a bloodless sacrifice; a meat-offering, Hn^Q (w),

T J •

minkhah (manakh, inus. to give).

A drink-offering, '^02* ne'sech

(decl. 6, as kke'ber) ; [nasach, to pour out].

Rain, Q^il, ge'shem (decl. 6,

as ke'bher).

Corn, ]y^, dagan (decl. 4, a);

T T

[dagah, to increase'}.

A fountain, V)^f2) mai?yan.

Chariot, n33"1D. mercabhah

(from rachabh, to ride on a horse, ^c, or in a carriage).

Anger, C)^}, aph (for eneph

from an aph, to breathe: lite- rally, nose) : decl. 8.

To become dry ; to be dried up, I^:2\ yabliesh.

Strength, H^. coakh {decl. 1).

To cleave, p^l, dabhak

(partcp. Hophal, made to cleave, to adhere).

The jaws, DTfip/D* malco-

khayim (dual).

Ploughman, DHSK* iccarim.

§5.]

Hiphil and Hophal.

123

Exercise 34 • : - : T ' V T

ji")3n 3

:iyjij TiJ3

T : •• • V VT T ; •

"lit •'3 HDih? ^'?n^^ 4

-\ • T T-: T : |T

j^nyo "ipDi ii^3"!^ iWe ^2'' 9 :?I^^^ nvi 'T^'^b

" T . ~ " ; ' V T :

an^^^ jid'^dhi 10 i-'nip^D

• T • : : T : ^ . ~

"•• T T V V T T

; T • • T -; T

(Hophal).

1 i^alecha hoshlachti. 353

2 v'attah hoshlachta raikkibh- r'cha c'netser nithi^abh *.

3 hochrath minkhah vane'sech mibbeth Y'hovah. 4 abh'lah Mamah ci shiiddad dagan.

5 homlach i^al-malchuth.

6 mai^yan nirpas * umakor moshkbath, tsaddik f ma^ % liphne rashai?. 7 hamme'lech hayah moi^^mad bammerca- bbah. 8 yihyu § miicbsbaliin I'phanecha b'i^eth app'cha.

9 yabhesh cakhe'res cokbi, ul'shoni mudbak malkokhai.

10 v'hocbl'mu iccaritn ci 16- bayab ge'shem baarets {p.).

11 ha*nashim ^obhim lanu m'od v'lo hochlamnu.

li) 1. Upon thee were we cast. 2. He will be cast out of his grave. 3. The wicked shall be cast out of their graves.- 4. The meat-oflferings and the drink-offerings shall be cut-off. 5. The corn shall be wasted. 6. Were they not cast out from their graves like abominable branches ? 7- They will be made kings over those kingdoms.

8. Write down the short Paradigm of Tj7li^ in Hiphil and Hophal. ~ "^

* 5, 2 [= fifth form of 2nd conj. : i. e. partcp. of Niphal].

■\ Supply ' so is ' before tsaddik.

X ZDO partcp. Kal from tO^D. to shake, to totter, to slip, 8fC.

§ * Let them be.'

M 2

124 The Regular Verb. [ch. 8.

(353) 9. Write down—

N 1171 • u • J fwith him.

a) Who IS buried •» • , ,,

I with them.

b) The graves in which they are buried.

c) The graves of the Gentiles.

c?) He destroyed the cities of the Gentiles.

Chap. VIII. § 6. HithpaeL

354 This conjugation prefixes to the Piel form ka/^el w\2i\)) the syllable kith *, which, like hin in Niphal,

has undoubtedly the force of a reflexive pronoun, perhaps of the same origin as the particle DSt, self.

355 The Jl of the prefixed syllable ilH suffers the fol- lowing changes :

a) When the first radical is a sibilant (D, Y, ^D), it changes places with D, as (from shdmar)

-iDn^i^n, to take heed, for "ll^t^Jin, "^'^-Hpn^ to be

burdened, for 72LpJirT.

^) With if, moreover, the transposed Jl is changed into the more nearly related ID, as p"l^iirT, to

justify oneself for p'jT^^rirT.

c) Before the t-sounds p, tO, Jl), it is assimilated, e. g. "I^"^?!' ^0 converse; ")n^rT, /o cleanse one- self; Ulprsn, to conduct oneself uprightly.

Sometimes assimilation takes place before ^ and ^ ; once before ").

7%e meanings of Hithpael.']

356 a) Most frequently it is reflexive, but chiefly of

Pi^/, as 'd^pjnn, to sanctify oneself; W^}jy}, to

avenge oneself; ")TS^rin, to gird oneself.

b) Then it means, to make oneself what is ex- pressed by the first conjugation : hence, to

* Chald. Jl^^, Syr. pii^.

§ 6.] Hithpael 125

conduct (shoiv, imagine) oneself as such, to affect (356) to be such ; properly to make oneself so and so, to act so and so : e. g. ^^^riil, to make oneself

great, to act proudly; DSn-Hil, to show oneself

cunning, crafty.

c) Its signification sometimes coincides with that of Kal, and both forms are in use with the same meaning: e. g. dbhal (Kal), to mourn, is found only in poetry. Hithabbel (Hithpael), in the same sense, is more common in prose, and even takes an accusative.

d) It expresses reciprocal action (like Niphal), as n>}1JirT, to look upon one another.

e) More frequently it expresses what a man does indirectly to or for himself (comp. Niph.). It has then an active signification, and governs an accusative : e. g. ^WBIir^, exuit sibi {vest em) ;

H-nSrill, solvit sibi [vincida). So, without the

accusative, li'fj]^'^, to walk about for oneself

[ambulare).

f) It is but seldom that it is passive : e. g. "TjpSJnrTj to be numbered, mustered.

i^ The Perfect, as in Piel, has frequently Pathakh in the 357 final syllable, as p-TnjlHj to be strengthened. Final Pathakh

occurs also in the Infin., Imperf., and Imperat. (U^lpn'H,

sanctify thyself). In pause these forms take Kamets, as

M 3

126

The Regular Verb.

[CH. 8.

358 The Short Para.digms of the Regular Verb in all its

FORMS.

1 Kal

2 Niphal

3 Piel

4 Pual

5 Hip Ml

6 Hophal

7 Hith-

pael

\Perf.	2 Inf. est):	3 Impend.	4 Imperf.	5 Partcp.
ka^al	kafdl	k'/ol	yik/ol	ko/el
nik^al	hikkafel	hikka/el	yikka/el	nik/al
ki«el	ka«el	ka«el	y'kaWel	ka«el
kuf/al	kuttal	(none)	y'ku^al	m'kii/^al
hik/il	hak/il	hak/el	yakdl	mak^il
hok/al	hok/al	(none)	yok^al	mok/al
hith- ka«el	hith- ka«el	hith- ka^^el	yith- kattel	mith- ka«el

6 Past

partcp. of

Kal.

ka/ul

(The participles of verbs Lamed He end in -eh) Vocabulary.

359 To press; to be urgent with, ^n"l> rahabh.

To despise [H 7p] . kalah.

T 't

To be weighty ; to be honoured, "TI13> cabhad (in Hithp. to

— T

show oneself honoured; to boast oneself).

To lack, nOn. khasar.

— T

To relax, HH)"!. raphilh {to

T T

hang down the hands, SfC. Hithp. to relax oneself; to be slothful).

Service; work, HDh^/Q, m'la-

T T ;

chah (laach).

To be known or recognised, ID^nn, hithnaccer (nacar,

inus. is to be strange: the notion of contemplating, re- cognizing, &CC. comes from

that of looking at anything as strange).

To place [21^^], yatsabh (in

— T

Hithp. to stand firm or up- right).

Companion, friend, ^"1, reai>.

■> Servant, slave, l^-V* ye'bhed

(l^abhad, to work). Possessor, lord, 7^21. bai^al * . JVork, hby!2> mai^'^lal (only in

pl.) a, from 7^^. Pure, TTT or '!T|, zach or zach. Mean, "TTIi^n. khashiich {pl.

D^3ti7n); khashach, to be

dark. Garment, b^^^f^, m'^il(raa))al).

* Before an adjective or participle denoting quality, bd))al denotes the possessor of the quality ; so that it may be translated by ' one who is.' See Example 3.

§6.]

Hithpael.

]27

«)

Exercise 35 (Hithpael). ' ^^3;"1 anni DD"inrT l i l luthrappe^ ft'r'habh rei>e- 360

-n'ritr2 bv^b Kin hn

-:|r TT

rinn 6 : bbT]n\ m ^^

cha. 2 ^obh nikleh v'l^e'bhed 16, mimraithcabbed vakh"5ar- lakhein. 3 gam mitbrappeh bhimlachto akh hu" I'bhai^al mashkhith *. 4 gam b'ma))'- lalav yithnaccer-nai'Sir, im- zacb, v'im yashar poi^Mo.

5 rai>, rai> yomar hakkoneh v'ozel 16 az yithhallal (jo).

6 khazitha ish raahir bim- lacht6 liphne-m'lachim yith- yatstsabb (/?), bal-yitbyatstsebh liphnekh^shuccim. 7 camma- yim nishpacbti v'hitbpar'du col-i?atsm6thai. 8 vayyith- pashsbe^ Y'h6natban eth- hamm'i?il 'sher i^alav.

li) 1. Has be not boasted ? 2. Did not tbe king strip himself of the robe that was upon him ? 3. The kings will strip them- selves of the robes that are upon them. 4. Strip thyself of thy garments. 5. Their bones separated themselves {■=. were out of joint). 6. Do not boast. 7. He who is diligent in his work is better than he who boasts. 8. The kings will boast. 9. Those who stand before a king will boast. 10. To boast-myself {ivf. constr. with 7).

Chap. IX. Verbs unth Gutturals. § 1 . Verbs with Pe guttural.

The gutturals usually take a Khatejth (36) instead 36 1 of simple Sh'va; a peculiarity which causes several

♦ 5, 3.

128 Verbs with Gutturals. [ch. 9.

(361) changes in those forms of the verb in which one of the radical letters would regularly take Sli'va.

362 For verbs with a guttural for their Pe (or first radical), the following are the principal changes :

a) Where the first radical of the res^ular verb would take a Sli'va (without any preformative), a Khateph is substituted : usually (-:) Khateph Pathakh. Thus in the perfect of Kal the 2nd persons plural become ^PT) UPTYOV-

b) In the forms that take a preformative, the first radical of the regular verb takes silent Sli'va, and closes the syllable. In a verb Pe guttural the preformative usually retains the same vowel that the preformative of the regular verb has, and places the Khateph of the same sound under the first radical. Thus for p^ we should have

c) Since, however, i and u have no Khateph of their own sound, the Khateph of the same class (60, 61) is used: i. e. the Khateph of the e-sound [Khateph Segol) for i; that of the o-sound [Khateph Kamets) for 0: and the vowel of the preformative is changed into the short vowel from which the Khateph is derived. (See Paradigm E.) Hence the changes will be (if we take H for the first radical and H for the preformative of the verb Pe guttural) :

363 Regular Verb.

hak- hik- hok- huk- pH pH pT} prT

Verb Pe guttural.

ha-kh"^ he-kh« ho-kh° ho-kh« fin Hn nil nil

t:it t:|t vjiv -:|-

364 Sometimes, however, the first radical (especially if rr) retains the silent Sli'va; but then the pre- formative takes the same short vowel that it would have taken if the first radical had taken its Khateph:

§ 1.] Pe Guttural 129

e. g. iDHJ^ (takhmod, not tikhmdd), t:an^ (yekh- (364) bash). Niph. "^SHj) (nohpach), to change oneself; Hiph. Tpnn (hekhiir), to cause to fail.

The pupil should ohserve that the characteristic ni-, hi- of 365 Niphal and Hiphil passes, respectively, into ne, he in verbs Pe Guttural.

When an accented afformative {i, ah, ii) is added 366 to forms like "TD^^ 1^1*1 the last vowel becomes

moveable Sh^va, and the Khateph of the guttural is changed into its homogeneous short vowel : "IpV"**

T\r2V\ (ya:;amdu) ; so H^tyi ne^Tezbah, she is for- saken.

There is, however, also a harder form that changes 367 the Khateph into Sh^va: e. g. ^^'ITV, ^PIH^; but also

Of the Infinitive, Imperative, and Imperfect of Ni- 368 phal, where the first radical woiild regularly be doubled {hikkdtel, yikkdtel), this doubling is omit- ted, but compensation made for it by using Tsere for the vowel of the preformative HDV (yej^amed).

a) In the Imperative the vowel of the guttural is often changed 369 into Segol.

h) The Imperfect A begins regularly with the vowels e_£ (-Tf^-)' or (with the hard combination) e (j-7). In verbs Im- perfect 0 the pointing e_i (•••; •••) is rare.

c) In Hiphil and Hophal, Vav conversive of the Perfect, by throwing forward the tone, causes a change of accent, and then 6-1 (tt--) is changed into a— (^y^).

Thus rnOVn becomes r^lQ^m (hei^^madta, v'hai?'- T : -v:|v T :--:r:

madta).

d) In the Perfect of Hiphil e_f is sometimes changed into e", and in Perfect of Hophal o_2 into d_^ (tt? '"^^ -'^'> and t:~t into ^) ; the short vowel, supported by Melheg^ being extended into the long vowel of the same class.

130

Verbs with Gutturals.

CH. 9. *

Table of the tense-roots and normal forms of IDV? to |

stand.

KaL

Niphal.

HipMl.

Hophal.

370 Perf. 3 s. i^araad	nei?«mad (-7:7	v)hei)'=midr7Tj	:•) hoi^^mad
i^am'dah	nei^emdah	hei^^midah	holDomdah,
i^^'madtem'	nei^^madti	hei?<'madti	hoi^^madti
Injin. const r. i^^mod	hei^amed	hai^'^mid	hor°mad
ahsoL i^amod	nai^^mod	hai)*med
Imperat. i^^mod	he))amed	ha^'^med	(wanting)
i.''imdi	hei^am'di	ha"^midi
kh^zak
khizki
Imperf. A) yai^^mod	yei?araed	yai^^mid	yoP^mad
ta))*mod	tei^atned	tai^'^mid	t6i?"mad
tai?amdi(2/;	) tei^amdi	tal^'^midi	t6i?6mdi
er^mod (1)	ei^amed (1)	a^'^mid	6^°mM
tai^^modnah	tai^^mednah	tai-'^'mednah	toi^^madnah
Jor)
B) yakhmod
takhmodi
yekh^zak
tekh^zak
tekhezki
ekh^zak
tekh^zaknah
Partcp.act. i>omed	nei^^mad	mai>*mid	m6i>®mad
pass, i^amud

Verbs Pe Guttural (not including those with Pe

Aleph).

371 To walk "TT^n halach

— T

To cast out or C]*!!! hadaph away ~ "^

To overthrow, ?[H3rT haphach ruin ~ "^

Tohreakdown, Din haras destroy ~ "^

To kill, to slay ^IJl harag

To be dry, to ^IH kharabh he dried up y to "^ be desolate

To devise

y^r\ khashabh

To desire, to '^t^'H khamad covet ~ ^

§!•]	Verbs wit
To train up To cease, to forbear	■TJ^n khanach ^in khadal ■- T
To pass by *	?]7n khalaph
To pity, to spare	^QH khamal - T
To draw out	V^r^ khalatsi

To he strong, pTPT khazak violent "^

To gird t I^H khagar

— T

To be dark "^Jti^H khashach To want "IDH khaser

To be ashamed ["lEin] khaphar

~ T

To search [IpH] khakar

Gutturals. 131

To bind up ]i}2'n khabhash (s/l)

To search out, i^SJH khaphas explore ~ ^

To stand

1f2V i^amad

To dispose, to "?[1^ i^arach set in order "^

To be deep [pOJ?]:i?amak

To pass (a -)1^ i^abhar river, &c,) ~ "^

To help [Ityji^azar

To surround I "IJOP i^a/ar

~ T

To shut ["liJJ?]ratsar

— T

To leave ^TJ^ i^azabh

Jealousy ^^^P kinah (deck 12, b); kinne" (Piel), to be

"^ • ■ jealous.

Heat, rage ilDH khemah (deck 11), for y'khemah (w)

"^ " fr. yakham.

Man (vir) "13^1 ge'bher (also husband, warrior) ; gabhar,

to be strong.

Vengeance Dp^ nakam (deck 4, a) ; nakam, to avenge.

'tt

Desire TV\T\ havvah (havah, ^o 6refl<Ae; to be).

T—

Trouble, distress Pf")^ tsarah (d w) ; tsarar, to tie up. Enemy

'2,'^y^ oyebh (properly [5, 1 ] fr. ayabh, to hate).

rVttyi}^ mishme'reth (a) ; shamar, to keep.

TV2^ amah (irr.).

T T

■^'it^ shor {pi. sh'varim), deck 1.

"1"7J nadar.

— T

V^'2, be'tsai^ (batsai?, to break: to gain).

A charge

Maid-servant

Ox

To vow

Gain, profit

As, according as *^ti^^<^ (=lit. as what, secundum id quod).

♦ Piel = to change, as a garment; Hiph. to change. t Niph. to be delivered. X Piel, to crown.

132

(37 1) River, the Nile

By

Young cow City

End, limit Boundary,

Verbs with Gutturals.

lik] y'6r.

^j^^i etsel.;

n"lD par ah.

-)^y i^ir (pi. QnV» i>arim).

• T

n^^p katseh.

7^n!l g'bhul (gabal, to bound).

[CH. 9.

Exercise 36. [Sentences with X prefixed, are not complete sentences.]

372 a) ikb^ mrjiDn r]i^:ip i ikb 2

' A' -

'i:r.- • - : ":

: \bm r\i'ir2 p'i:i 3

'|TV:v TT • ' • -

' \ '. TV —

r-r

-ini "^I^^^^ t^sd Tn^i^

V • v-:i- 'a-t • ' v: I

A V -

a-t: • •• : : • : - t :

I" t:

1 kinah kh^math-gabher (p), v'lo yakhmol b'yom nakam.

2 lo yari^ibh Y'hovah nephesh tsaddik ; v'havvath r'shai^im yeh'doph. 3 tsaddik mits- tsarah nekh*lats(jo). 4 vayyomer Shaul b'ruchim atte m laYho vah ci kh^maltem i>alai. 5 | lah*- doph eth-col-oy'bhecha mippanecha ca^sher dibber Y'havah. 6 l6-i?"zabhtem eth-^khechem zeh yamim rabbim i^ad hayyom hazzeh ; ush'martem eth-mishme'reth mitsvath Y'hovah ^lohechem. 7 16 yuchalf hanna'i^ar lal'^*- zobh eth-abhiv. 8 v'shachanti b'thoch b'ne Yisrael ; v'lo ei^^zobh eth-i^ammi Yisrael.

* Other reading : DO^I^.-

f From yachal, to be able (5, 4).

§>•]

Pe Guttural,

133

Dinn 11 '" -yn ui:^^ mDjn-N':' um Dnnri

^irbv '^V^b'^^U 13 :?T^-)S

- ' -. !•• ••;

LOH)::^in> n^D^n D^iirnu

T T ; • v: V •- X

''tir\ry\ D^jniim D^i^n-]D ^Di:/;::^ bvi'^w'7 rii^i^n

- : • : •• T : • ; t i -

yi.*i-nQ 16 tin'?'! m'n^

I • T : T :

^JD'^^s "?;;' rr-n '2V^r^^ 17

": T - TT TT|T;

^DnijD •n^i3 nyirf prn-'i

•|t: • vv : T TIT '-v;!-.-

nilBH 7^*St :n™47i11_ 18

"n^}■l 19 :-ihi^n 'jisV ^^4^

9 nahar yekh^rabh v'yabhesh. (372)

10 vihoshuai^ hekh^rim eth col-yosh'bhe hai^ai. 1 1 hakh^- rem takh^rim otliam lo- thichroth lahem b'rith. 12 lo- thakhmod esheth rei^e'cha v*i?abhd6 va^matho v'shoro vakh^raoro v'chol "sher I're- i^e'cha. 13 kh-'noch lannai^ar i)al-pi darco. 14 ci thekhdal Imdor lo-yih'yeh bh'cha khe/*. 15 v'gam biyrushalaim hei^'"- mid Y'hoshaphaf min-hall'- viyyim v'haccoh^nim urnerashe haabhoth I'Yisrael I'mishpa? Y'hovah v'laribh. 16 mah- betsai> ci nah"r6g eth-akhinu ?

17 v'harai^abh hayah ))dX col- p'ne haarets ; vayyiphtakh Yoseph eth-c61-\sher ba- hem vayyisbbor I'Mitsrayim vayekh^zak hara)?abh b'erets Mitsrayim (/>).

18 vattai?^m6d'nah etsel hap- paroth i?al s'phath hayor.

19 v'eth-hai^am hei^'^bbir otho lei^arim miktseh g'bhul- Mitsrayim v'i^ad-katsehu.

b) 1 . He will not have compassion upon me. 2. This city shall be desolate without an inhabitant. 3. Thou shall not covet thy neighbour's house. 4. He will not desert his people.

* * There shall not be.*

f ' Every thing in which there was corn.'

X The nom. is afein. noun pi. {the cows).

N

134 Ve7'bs with Gutturals. [ch. 9.

(372) 5. The queen will not desert her people. 6. They deserted their people. 7. Ye (/.) deserted. 8. We have not deserted our God. 9. I have not deserted this city. 10. The deserted ones (w). 11. Ye (m.) shall not covet your neighbours' vine- yards. 12. By coveting. 13. From deserting. 14. Being coveted (/.). 15. I will not desert this city. 16. Will ye (/.) desert these great cities ? 1 7. A man shall leave his father and mother.

Chap. IX. § 2. Verbs Ayin Guttural [g"^).

373 1. a) The middle radical, being a Guttural, of course, takes a Khateph where in the regular verb it has Sh'va. This is almost always ^, except after o, when it is naturally ^.

b) This rule holds good also of those persons of the Im- perative of Kal, where the second radical of the regular verb has Sh'va. The guttural then takes ^, and the preceding vowel conforms to it; that is, is "=~.

Regular. Ayin Guttural.

kiriu i^bm) sai^-du i^nvv)

374 2. The Imperfect Middle A prevails throughout; the Imperative also has d: but the Infin. constr. retains the 0 (the retention of which in Imperf, and Imperat, is a rare exception).

375 3. In the heavy (or dageshed) conjugations [Piel, Pual, Hithpael) the general rule for compensation would require a lengthening of the vowel, to com- pensate for the Dageshy which the guttural should have, if it could.

But—

376 a) After — , the characteristic Dagesh is usually un-

compensated in the case of Pf, H, and ^, and sometimes in that of K. The Dagesh thus omitted is said to be implied or implicit [Dagesh imjjlicitum) .

b) After — , the Dagesh is always merely implied.

c) After -v-, we find both (I) Dagesh implied, and

§2.]

Ayin Giitturah

135

(2) a compensation of the Dagesh by a lengthen- (376) ing of the vowel in _?. .

d) Middle 1 always requires the compensation: i. e.

a lengthened vowel.

	Per/.	Infin. constr.	Imperat.	Imperf.	Partcp.
\Kal	shakha^	sh'kho^	sh'khat	yishkhat	shokhei
2 Niph.	nishkha^	hishshakhe^	hishshakhe/	yislishakhe^ nishkha^
3 Fiel	berech	bdrech	bdrech	y'bhdrech m'bhdrech
4 Pual	borach	borach	(none)	y'bhorach m'bhorach
5 Hithp.	hithbd- rech	(as perf.)	(as perf.)	yithbdrech	mithbdrech 1

377

Past Partcp. of Kal, shakhu?.

1^^ But besides Perf. Piel berech, such forms occur as zi)^am, 373 berdch, cikhesh.

(Normal Forms.)

379

Perf.

Imperat.

Imperf.

Perf

Imperat. Imperf

Kal. shakh^^ah sh'kha?, shakh^^i yishkhat, tishkh"/i

Piel berech (berach), ber'cah ziyam, zii)*mah cikhesh, cikh^shah J

barech, bar'chi "|

z'i*om, zai>*mi ['

y'bharech {reg.) y'zai^em, t'zai^^mi, t'zai^amnah

Niphal. nishkh^^ah

hishshakhe^ hishshakh*/i yishshakhe^, tishshakh^^i

Pual.

\

borach {reg.) zui^am, zui^^mah

(none)

y'bhorach (reg.) y'zui>am, t'zui?*mi

(In the other conjugations, the only change to be remembered 3S0 is the regular one of using a Khateph, when the middle radical would regularly have Sh^va.)

N 2

136

Verbs with Gutturals.

[CH. 9.

Vocabulary,

381 To hunger, 2^;"), rai^ebh. To mock, :\yh, lai^ag.

— T

To slide, 1^72, mai^ad.

— T

To slay, tOilti^. shakha^

— T

To loathe, b>^I|, gai^al.

— X

To work, 7j/9, pai?al.

- T

To taste, D^ZO, ^ai>am.

— T

To oppress, VTw, lakhats. fpT^"^} tsakhak.

To laugh. To cry,

\pTVD, sakhak*. rp^l za^^ak. 1 py^, tsai^ak. To choose, "in^.* bakhar.

— T

To traffic, inO? sakhar.

— T

To wax hot, *1^2L, bai^ar. To he shaken, ^^1, rai^ash. To be large, ^PTl, rakhabh f . To dash, VnD. rnakhats.

To minister (as a priest), []n3],inPiel, ^3. cihen+.

To be clean, ^HtD. /aher§.

To rebuke, l^i), gai^ar.

Virgin, TsTlPiH, b'thulah. Daughter, p\'2,, bath. To form, ^''^'^, yatsar.

— T

Leviathan, IJT'I/, livyathan. A ship, 'r\'^yt^, *niyyah (decl.

10). A step, "fj;^:, tsa'i^ad (decl.

Q,d).

Ancle, vOlpi karsSl.

Ancles (dual), Q''T'D1p. kar-

5ulla'yim.

Head-dress, turban, ■^^^^, p'er

(decl. 1, a), but pi. constr. pa're.

Bridegroom, 1/117, khathan,

' T T

(decl. 4, c).

* In Piel, to play, to sport.

t In Hiphil, hirkhib, to enlarge.

X Also =to make splendid; al. to adjust.

§ In Piel = ^0 cleanse, to purify.

§2-]

Ayin Guttural,

137

Exercise 37.

' V V T - : • - T : ATT

T T I - . .- • ~ : •

T - : viT- :-

y^br\ Sl:h'\>r^'v^\ mn^

V ' T T : • T I • T :

■"ini 6 %^jj^ r)r^iD nSi _ . .|^ I .. _ . _.

• ; T T — V •• :

• |t: at;-; • :

nniD nv;^^3 nri\-j 9

Ar :

1 vay'«apper el-abhiv v'el- 382 ekhav vayyigi?ar-b6 ^^ abhiv vayyomer 16, mah hakh^om hazzeh "sher khalamta (p) ?

2 vattiri^abh col-e'rets Mits- ra yim vayyitsi?ak hai^am el- Pari>6h lalla khem (p).

3 v'attah Y'hovah tiskhak lamo ; tili^ag I'chol-goyim.

4 sham 2 livyathan zeh^^ yatsarta I'sakhek-bo *.

5 cen-ish rimmah eth-rei^ehu v'amar h^o m'sakhek ani ?

6 b'khar-lanu 'nashim.

7 v'im rai^ b'i^enechem la- r^bhod eth-Y'hovah bak'Tu lachem hayyom eth-mi tha- i?^bhodun, im eth-^iohim *sher-i)abh'du abhothechem *sher bei^e'bher hannahar, v'im eth-*16he ha^mori [the Amo- rites] ^sher attem ydsh'bhim b'artsam ; v'anochi ubhethi nai^^'bhod eth-Y'hovah.

8 /ai)*mah ci fobh sakhrahh.

9 hay'thahf ca^niyyoth sokber.

10 tarkhibh tsai^'^di thakhtai v'lo* ma)?*du karsullai. 1 1 ach

Or prTii^/j Tsere being changed into Segol on account of

Makkeph: *)^, in it, i. e. in the sea. f She was, 3rd sing, form of hayah.

N 3

138 Verbs with

(382) vn^j^ ^ik') xnD] D^i':'^?

Gutturals. [ch. 9.

^lohim yimkhats rosh oy'bhav kodkod sei^ar mithhallech ba^shamav. 12 timkhats

ragl'cha b'dam I'shon c'la- bhe'cha meoy'bhim minnehu *. 13 hu" ^sher cihen babbayith "sher-banah f Sh'lomoh biy'rushalem. 14 cekhathan y'cahen p'er. 1 5 v'zeh hadda- bar "sher tai^^seh I lahem I'kaddesh otham I'chahen li.

Parse the following forms, and explain their for- mation.

•onDQ =-n"!n$ :nin^ m in^^ nnzp nnp^

b) 1. He will be hungry. 2. The virgin, the daughter of Zion, mocks at thee (m.). 3. Playing (partcp.f. sing.). 4. I will choose their ways. 5. Thou (m.) art cleansed. 6. Thou hast cleansed. 7. I will waste. 8. We tasted of the honey. 9. They tasted. 10. Ye (/.) tasted. 11. Who has tasted? 12. To taste. 13. Being tasted (w,). 14. The honey that I tasted. 15. To choose the ways of death. 16. We shall be hungry. 17. We were hungry. 18. Ye (m.) were hungry. 19. Who is hungry? 20. Who has mocked the daughter of Jerusalem? 21. Rebuke ^^ the lad.

* From it =z some of it : I'shon is worn., and the verb 'shall get' is to be supplied {Hengstenberg.).

t Built. X Thou shalt do.

§ 3.] Lamed Guttural. 139

Chap. IX. §3. Verbs Lamed Guttural.

In these verbs either

a) the final syllable keeps its regular vowel, with 383 furtive Pathakh under the guttural :

h) or the final syllable exchanges its regular vowel for Pathakh.

a) i, 6, u (the strong immutable vowels are always retained).

b) o is retained in the Infin. constr.

o (being merely lengthened by the tone) is changed into a in the Imperat. and Imperf. of Kal.

c) 1. e (when it is the regular vowel of the last syllable) is sometimes retained^ sometimes changed into Pathakh.

2. Usage, however, makes a distinction in these forms : thus

In the Partcp. Kal and Piel vh}:), njpti^p is the exclusive form, and the full Pathakh first appears in the constr. state nVt^, H^Ii^p-

In the Imperf. and Infin. Niph., and in the Perf Infin. and Imperf. Piel, the form with a is employed at the beginning and in the middle of a period ; that with ^r^r, at the end, and in Pause : e. 2;. ^"lil\ it is diminished, and V^y^ ;

Vpy^ he cleaves, and VP^i Vy^' to swallow.

It may further be observed that the Infin. absol. retains Tsere, the Infin. constr. does not.

The guttural here has simple Sh^va, whenever the 384 third radical regularly takes it (because being Sh^va quiescent it can remain under a guttural) : e. g. rrh'^- But in the second fem. sing, of the Perf. a

helping -Pathakh takes its place : e. g. PTO^-

140

Vej'bs ivith Gutturals,

[CH. 9.

385 [A compound Sh'va (or, Khateph) occurs in (1) a few examples ol plur. 1 of Perf. when the tone is thrown forward; (2) before the suffixes cha, cliem, chea\.

	1 Ferf.	2 Inf. cstr.	3 Imperat.	4 Imperf.	5 Partcp.
386 1 Kal	shalakh	sh'loakh	sh'lakh	yishlakh	sholeakh
2 Niphal	nishlakh	hishsha- lakh	hishsha- lakh	yishshalakh	nishlakh
3 Piel	shillakh	shallakh	shallakh	y'shallakh	m'shalleakh
4 Pual	shullakh	shullakh	(none)	y'shullakh	m'shiillakh
5 HiphU	hishliakh	hashliakh	hashlakh	yashliakh	mashliakh
6 Hoph.	hoshlakh	hoshlakh	(none)	yoshlakh	raoshlakh
7 Hithp.	hishtal- lakh	hishtal- lakh	hishtal- lakh	yishtallakh	mishtal- leakh

Partcp. Pass, of Kal, shaluakh. Injin. absol. [Kal), sha- loakh ; (Niph.), nishloakh ; {Piel), shalleakh ; {HiphU), hash- leak h.

Kal Perf. shalakh, shalakhat (2/.) ; and so in the other con- jugations, -akhat /or akht. Imperat. sh'lakh, shilkhi, &c.

Imperf. nishlakh, tishlakh'nah ; and so in the other con- jugations, -akhnah.

HiphU Imperf. yashliakh, tashlikhi, tashlakh'nah.

Vocabulary,

387 To forget, HD^j shachakh.

~ T

To hear, ^D^, shamai?.

To forgive ; to pardon, TwD,

salakh (with 7). To be satisfied, )^^'^, siibhai^*. To swear, ^2^, shabhaJl^f

- T

(prop, by seven victims). To sacrifice, H^T, zabhakh.

To expire, y]^, gavai.\ To devour, y?2, balai^.

~ T

To sow, plant seed, ^1T. zarai^. To slay, nilD, Zabhakh.

— T

To bud, rnS. parakh.

~T

To rend, ^1p, kara^. To open, HJID. pathakh.

* In Hiphil, to make satisfied; to satisfy. \ In Niphal, to bind myself by oath; to swear, promise with an oath.

§3.]

Good (or ill) deed; benefit, ^^Qi), g'mM (decl. 1).

Iniquity, piy or pp, i^avon or i^avon.

Diseases, U^i^^/TID} takhluim (khalah, to be sick).

Eagle, "Iti^J, ne'sher (decl. 6, a), pi. c. nishre.

Youth, DH^i^J. n'i^urim.

To look.

f^p^j shakapb

I ^22, nahhsit

Lamed Guttural. 141

Prisoner, T'DK* a^ir (a^ar, to (387)

TAm, p-l, dak (/. ni5"l, dak-

kah). Full, i^br2, male", /. HK^D

(male", <o be full). Rank, luxuriant, ^''13, ipl-f'

• T

Jnj^''13.); bara, j9o^m7. £ar5 of corn, Uw11'^> shib-

• t; •

b°lim. Fiwe, ]S)2l, ge'phen. Vine-shoots, D!l*'*lii^i sarigim.

Groaning, T\'D^'ii^i "nakab

' TT — ;

{constr. enkath).

Pit, Ii3,j bor (bur, to cleave), pi. borotb.

Height, Di")D> marom.

1. The word '^1^ is twice construed 'mouth' in the English 388

Bible. Gesenius construes it *agej' the Septuagint, '{thy) desire* (eTnQvfiiav).

2. njllDrij t'muthah (death, from maveth), only in ben t'muthah, a child of death = one who is condemned to die.

Exercise 38.

a) m^^-n^^ ""i^^S):! on^ i

T . ... . . - • : I T

X . T .... - •

miT\ ^2y\V'^2b rhbr\

1 bar'chi naphsbietb-Y'hovah, 389 v'al-tishc'khi col-g'mulav : bassoleakh rcbol-i^^vonechi ; harophe" * rcb61-takb''lua- y'chi : hammasbiai^ ba//6bh i^edyech ; tithkhaddesh can- ne'sher n'i^uray'chi. 2 ci- hisbkipb mimm'rom kodsho

* In Hiphil.

t Who healeth, rophe", partcp. Kal act. of rapha.

142 Use of the Accents as Stops.

(389) n'r2m m'n'' wip Dn^D

[CH. 10.

•♦n rfj^?^ "i^DNt r\p2i!^

T : - : • - ix :

K'^m DT"i'i^ r\tbp ]^n^ 5

*• ; T T~ ~ ~ :

itt: V -». —

Y'hovah ; mishshama'yim el-e'rets hibbit ; lishmoai^ en- kath asir, I'phatteakh b'ne th'muthah. 3 vattibhlai^'nah hashshibb^lim haddakkoth eth shebhai> hashshibb°lim habb'rioth v'hamm'Ieoth. -

4 /'bhoakh te'bhakh.

5 ubhagge'phen sh'loshah sa- rigim v'hi" cli'phorakhath.

6 vayyashabh R'libhen el- habbor v'hmneh en-Y6seph babbor; vayyikrai? eth- b'gadav.

b) 1. And Joseph took an oath of the children of Israel. 2. The land which Elohim swore to Abraham, to Isaac, and to Jacob. 3. And Jacob expired. 4. He will offer-sacrifices. 5. I have planted the house of Israel. 6. Every herb seeding seed. 7. Ye shall sow the land. 8. Ye shall not sow the land. 9- Seed is sown. 10. The seed sown. 11. I have sown my seeds. 12. To sow seeds. 13. Thou wilt sow thy land. 14. The opened door. 15. I will open the door. 16. Opened (/em. sing.).

Chap. X. § 1. Use of the Accents as Stops ^,

(Before the pupil proceeds to the Vf'^eak Verbs, he may pay some further attention to the accents, which will henceforth be added. For their names and forms, see 85.)

390 In the Hebrew Bible the verses are usually divided into two major divisions. The end of the whole verse is marked by Silluk with two dots (♦) called Soph Pasuk. The middle of the verse, or, as it is properly, the end of the first major division, is marked by Athnakh or Merka Mahpachatum.

* From Dr. ^1*= Caul's Primer.

§ 1 .] Use of the Accents as Stops. 143

Genesis i. 1.

D'Tt^i^ K"11 J1^i:fK"i:i . bV5sliith' bara' Elohim 391

A' ": JTT ».• •• : in the beginning created God

: Y*^J^rT ^)i^^ DTjli^n Di^ ^^^^ basb-shama'yim v'eth haa'rets v|Tx ;••; 'v-T - I" the heavens and the earth

Psalm ii. 1.

D^^^l It^^l (ID^ lam'mah rag'shu' goyim'? A* a:iT TTv Avherefore rage peoples

J Dn"1l!n'' D"'DJ^b-1 "^'"»^«}i°i yeh'gu-rik? I !• "^ :iv • \ : ^i^cl nations imagine vanity

Psalm iv. 5.

JiKroni^-^.^i ion , ''s^t a ""? ^ekherau

)t:;\" -| : : • be troubled and not sin

DDIl3li^D"by DDQ^'^Q ^"IDN ^"^^'^ bhilbhabhchem i>al-niishcabh-

•••;-;• - •••;-;• : • speak in your heart upon your bed

; j^^^ ^JS^I f^liem v'dommu. se'lah. Tiv : and be still. Selah.

Proverbs x. 1.

TV^hlD "^^^D mishle Sh'lomoh

i : " : • the proverbs of Solomon

2l^"n3X^^ DDn ]^ ^^^ khacham y'sammakh abh AT : TTv J- a son wise rejoiceth a father

n,1iri bv::^ P-l ^Waen c'.il tugath

• : . " and a son foolish the heaviness

:iQ^^ immo

I • of his mother

The lesser subdivisions are marked by the dis- 392 tinctive accents of less power, as in Gen. i. 1. In the beginning, God created. After the word beginning there is a pause. This pause is expressed by a Tiphkha. This system of interpunction is, however, much more accurate than ours : for it not only de- notes a pause, but shows whether the word is con- nected with, or separated from, the following word in the construction. Thus JT'I^K"]^. is separated from

the following word K"H, whereas this word K")^ has

TT JT T

a conjunctive accent, because the verb is naturally connected with its nominative D\'i7K. This latter word DN'iT'i^ has again a distinctive, which separates it from the following word. It might appear that a

144 Use of the Accents as Stops. [ch. lo.

(392) pause after the word God is misplaced ; but it is the strictly logical division of the sentence. 1. The fact of creation. 2. The things created. It also lays the emphasis upon God as the Creator. In the be- ginning, created God the heavens, and the earth.

In the second example, the verb and nominative U^}^ W^^ are connected in the same way by a con- junctive accent. But in the second member, the similar connection between the verb and accusative is noted by a line between the words, which is called Makkeph. In this case the first word ^^[TJ has no

accent. The small perpendicular line to the left of the Segol is called Metheg (48), and shows that ^ is

a separate syllable.

■^^^ In placing the accents, the first step is to place the Silluk at the end of the verse or sentence, just as in English the full stop is the most important. The next, is to place the Athnakh, and then the various minor distinctives. The whole verse is looked upon as a territory under the dominion of Silluk, though his immediate domination extends only to Athnakh. The dominion of Athnakh extends to the beginning of the verse. The nearer any minor dis- tinctive is to Silluk or Athnakh, so much the less is its distinctive power. The accents are not selected arbitrarily, but have a regular order of consecution. Silluk has next to it Tiphkha, then Zakeph. Athnakh takes next to it Tiphkha, then T'bhir, then Zakeph^ then Segolta. Segolta takes Zarka Kbhia. Zakeph takes Pashta, R^bhia, &c.

394 The Conjunctives or Servants are also subject to rule, ac- cording to which they have their pecuUar masters —

Munakh serves

Athnakh

Segol ta

Zakeph katon Mierc^a serves <

R'bhia

Zarka

Silluk

Tiphkha

Pashta

Zarka

T'bhir

Darga serves T'bhir. Kadma serves Geresh.

CH. 10.]

Use of the Accents as Stops.

145

Esther vi. 1 — 4.

n^t nii2 i^^nn nb^b^ ^^ ^ T^lf ^'^.^K }^^^' ""'i^f^.fflt (^^*^

t:j-- In the night the same fled the sleep

VT

hamme'lech vayyo'mer Thabhi'" eth- of the king and he said to bring the

se'pher hazzichronoth' dibhre' book of the records the words of

hayyamiin' vayyihyu'nikraim' liphne' days and they were read before

2 hamme lech, vayyimmatse' catliubh' the king, and it was found written

asher higgid' Mord'chai' i-al-Bigtha'na that had told of

vathe'resh sh'n6 sa'rise' hamme'lech and two chamberlains of the king

mishshom're' hassaph' ^sher

of the keepers of the threshhold who

bikshu lishloakh yad hamme'lech sought to send a hand on the king

'riK i^''2nb iDik^') ib}:^

• T : V - 'vAv - )" : • V t': • ; : |-- • t-

"iii;?^ a^^hD j^jjQ''') :iT^Dn

V -; T j-T •- 'v |v -

- J.. -IT ••: VVT

W\)3, ■^^^^ nDH niDi^fD -^bB^, T ribtb

' V vv - T - J ; •

^S?^n ■^^^S>*1 • T^rS'n^T/}H5^ *1 3 akhashverosh. vayvomer hamme'lech ')(.'fj ^'l^^J •'^'/.'.yUf^ -^ Ahasuerus. and said the king

T-:|- -

|T T V. • ^T-;|-

A"T| V J' 'VV..- V )-

•• < — ;i~ T jTT ;

iDi^b nirrnn ^bi^n'

J •• T J • - ' V V -

o-i-iD^riJ^ r)')bnb ^bb"?

~ ; : T V ; • V V -

'^b V2rr']tu yv^bv

'st;

r^rbv

'\''rrpu "Tilpan

mah-na3?*sah y'kar ug'dulah

what hath been done honour and dignity

I'Mord'chai yal-zeh, vayyom'ru to for this and they said

na'j^^re' hamme'lech m'shar'thav the young men of the king his servants

lo-na'3?3sah' jiimmo dabhar'.

not have been done with him a thing.

4 vayyomer hamme'lech mi bhekhatser and he said the king who in the court

v'Haman and Haman

ba was come

lakhatsar to the court

beth-hamme'lech hakhitsonah lemor of the house of the king the outer to say

lamme'lech lithloth eth-Mord'chai to the king to hang Mordccai

jsal-has-ets "sher-hechin

upon the tree which he had prepared

16. for him.

Note 1. V. 2, over the Vav in t:;*11^TO there is an asterisk. 395 If the reader looks to the foot of the page (in a Hebrew Bible)

146 Use of the Accents as Stops. [ch. lo.

(395) he will find the Hebrew letters ti^") '^^^^, which signifies that in

another copy the last syllable of Ahasuerus is written without a Vau. i^'^^ are the initials of ^^^'^^^^ KHD^J. another copy.

T tt; t t ; t

Note 2. In verses 3 and 4, the 'ij7Dn has in appearance two

accents, but in reality only one. Pashta being postpositive, must be placed over the last letter. But as not the last syl- lable, but the penultimate has the accent, it is repeated in. order to show the tone-syllable.

Note 3. In verse 3, the word ^IDi^""), and in verse 4, the word nJijiTin has two different accents. In such cases, the

T J' ~

last of the two shows the tone-syllable. The other is only Euphonic.

Note 4. In syllables like r)y3 in verse 1, the accent is

placed as if Sh'va formed a syllable. This is also the case with ihe compound Sh'vas.

Ruth iii. 5.

"■)t!^i^ bin tl'^bi^ 1t2lk^\^ vattomer eleah col ^sher- V -; J T A"" ■•■ V- and she said to her all that

|vv:|v 1- •• t' : I Ihou wilt say tome 1 will do

396 After the fifth word in this example, there are two points without consonants with a circle over them. By looking to the foot of the page, you find the consonants belonging to them *>bi^, which, with the points written in the text, make ^7^^,

V—*

e-lai, to me. This is said to be k'ri (read), though not k'thibh {written). The transcriber had omitted the three consonants ; and though the Jewish tradition was, that they ought to be a part of the text, they did not dare to put them in, but noted them at the foot of the page. This example shows what is meant by the words k'ri and k'thibh ; k'thibh is written, and applies to the word as it stands in the text ; k'ri signifies read, and refers to the reading at the foot of the page, which the Jews prefer. Verse 12, there is an example of a word written, but not read.

\

U^ ^3 DJDi^ ''S T^D^^ v'3?attah ci 5innam ci

r t': T a* T -: and now that it ts true that

oii^ bi^t s'^^\ ^"^"5^

•AT \," a redeemer am 1

CH. 11. § 1.] Verbs Double Ay in.

147

Here the fifth word QJ^ has no vowel. The masoretic note 397 at the foot of the page is ^p ^^'p') y^, k'thibh v'lo k'ri, written, but not read. Here the two letters were ])ut in, and though the Jews consider them as no part of the text, they suffer them to remain. These two examples serve to show the scrupulosity with which the Jews copied their manuscripts. The word 7^^2| also has a reference to the foot of the page,

which tells us, that in other copies the Gimel has not got a Dagesh.

Chap. XI. § 1. Verbs Double Ayin (O^y).

Example n^D> *abhabh, to go about. Paradigm : Appendix E,

[pp. 17, 18.

		Short Paradigms,
	\Perf.	2Inf.cslr.	3 Imperat.	4 Imperf. 5 Partep.
1 Kal	*abh	sobh	sobh	yasobh (yi^sobh) sobhebh
2 Niph.	na^abh	hissabh	hissabh	yissabh	na^abh
3 Foel*	sobhebh	sobhebh	sobhebh	y'sobhebh	m'sobhebh
4 Foal	.sobhabh	sobhabh	(none)	y'sobhabh	m'sobhabh
5 Hiph.	hesebh	hasebh	hasebh	yasebh (yassebh) mesebh
6 Hoph.	husabh	husabh	(none)	yiisabh (yiissabh)	m^sabh

398

Past Partep. of Kal, *abhubh. Normal Forms. — (No irregularity in the other conjugations.) 399

1 Kal

IPerf.	3 Imperat. 5obh	4 Imperf.
5abh	yasobh	yissobh
sab'bah	sob'bi	tasob'bi	tiss'bhi
sabbo'tha	siibbenah	t'siibbenah	tiss5bh'nah
nasabh	his^abh	yissabh
na5ab*bab	bissabbi	tissa'bbi
n'sabbotha	hissabbenah	tissabbenah

2 Niphal

* This conjugation and its Passive are called here Poel, Pool, instead of Piel, Pual, because they have the vowels d — e, 6— a, instead of % — e, m— a.

o 2

148

Verbs Double Ayin.

[CH. 11

(399)

3 HipMl

6 Hoph.

1

1 Perf.	3 Imperat. hasebh	4 Imperf.
hesebh	yasebh	yas^ebh
heseb'bah	haseb'bi	ta^ebbi
h»5ibb6tba	h^^ibbenah	t'sibbenah
husabh		yusabh	yussabh
husab'bah	(none)	tusab'bi
hu^abbotha		tusabbenah

400

Imperf. witb Vav conversive {Kal) vayyasobh ; {Hiph.) vayyasebh.

a) The principal irregularity of these verbs is this, that before an afformative the two identical letters of the root are pronounced as one, doubled by strong Dagesh, and that, even when a full vowel would regularly stand between them :

J)1D for !)nnD.

: IT

b) When there is no afformative, the final conso- nant is thrown away: DD (since 30 is im- possible).

c) Those forms are not contracted, which contain unchangeable vowels, or a Dagesh forte; as,

nino, nnia niD.

401 The stem, which is thus rendered monosyllabic, takes, throughout, the vowel which the full form would have in its second syllable ; as, indeed, even in the regular verb, it is this vowel that characterizes the form : e. g. I'D for 23D ; Infin. ID for 31p ; Hiph. 2prT for 2^011 (comp. note on 5).

402 When the afformative begins with a consonant (J, Jl), a vowel is inserted before it, in order to render audible the Dagesh of the final radical. This vowel in the Perf. is S, in the Imperat. and Imperf. V • g* g*

Jliip, Imperf. nj^ior) (sabbo'tha, t'^ubbenah).

403 The preformatives of Imperf. Kal, Perf Niphal,

§ 1.] Verbs Double Ayin. 149

and of HiphU and Hophal, which, in consequence of (403) the contraction, stand in a simple syllable pDl ■ in- stead of ^2lD\^, take, instead of the short vowel of the regular form, the corresponding long one. Hence, Imperf. HD^ for ^2p^ = 3Hp] ; Imperf. Middle A, "ip^for "inD^; Hiph.' 2071 for n^DH, Infin. 2Vn for lllprr ; Hoph. 3pin for 32011. This long vowel (ex- cept -I in Hophal) is changeable f.

There is still another mode of constructing these forms (the 404 common one in Chuldee), which consists in a sharp pronunciation of the first syllable and a consequent doubling of the_^r*^ radical by Dagesh: e. g. Imperf. Kal ^^^ for 33.D\ Imperf. Hiph. QD>

for D^JIV Hoph. /13^ for /1J^3\ These forms do not usually

take Dagesh in the final letter on receiving an accession, as Jjlp^, they bow themselves (from lip), as if the doubling of the

first letter were a suflScient compensation. They therefore omit

also the vowels ) and "»_: e. g. ni7iiin (from 77^). The

T : - • - T

Paradigm exhibits this form by the side of the other in Imperf.

Kal.

a) The to7ie has this peculiarity, that it is not 405 thrown forward upon the formative syllables beginning with a vowel {ah, il, i), but remains

before them on the stem-syllable, as -130.

b) Before the other afformatives, it rests upon the

•f* Many of these contractions are founded on more ancient forms than those of the regular verb. Thus ^D** stands for

T

3!ilD\ with a under the preformative, as in the regular Arabic

form (Hebrew 7J0p% from 7libp^ ; the a appears also in verbs Pe

guttural, especially in verbs Pe Aleph and Ayin Vnv). Hiph. HOrr for 33Dn has in the contracted stem-syllable the shorter

and more original e (like the Aram. 7J0pi^. see Ges.) ; Perf.

I^iph. 3DJ for 22,0^ ; Imperf. Niph. 2D'' for 22D^ : comp.

^lOpV See Ges.

o 3

150 Verbs Double Ay in, [ch. ii.

(405) inserted syllables 0 and (^7) e (except in the

case of Drij ]r\, which always take the tone) ; and in consequence of this the vowels of the

word are shortened, as ^2Dr\, r]T3,VD ; ll^Dn,

but jiSzvn,

406 Instead of Piel, Pual, Hithpael, and in the same signification, is found, in numerous verbs of this kind, the unfrequent conjugation called (from its vowels 6 — e) Po'el, with its Passive and Reflexive : e. g. W^j to treat one ill, Pass, '^^i^, Reflex. bb^VI^} (from 77^) : in some is found the rare conjugation (so called from its form and vowels) Pilpel, as 7^7-2, to roll; b^b^m, to roll oneself (from \h^) ; Pass. V^V}!^. to be caressed (from VV'^)- They are inflected regularly like PieL

Additional Remarks (for reference).

407 a) On Kal.~\ Some further peculiarities are :

1) Perfect with Kholem.

2) Injin., Irnperat., and Imperf. with Pathakh.

j^" The Kholem of the Injin., Irnperat., and Imperf., being a changeable vowel, is written defectively (with a few ex- ceptions principally in the later writers), and shortened into Kamets Khateph or Kibbuts, whenever it loses the tone; as Infin. ']'), to rejoice (Job), with suffix 'ipH^j when he

founded; Irnperat. ">ii)n> P^y ^^J Imperf. with Vav con-

vers. ^D'^Ij with suffix Q'^Ii^l, he lays them waste. TT- ••T ;

b) Niphal."] Besides the most usual form with Pathakh in the second syllable, as given in the Paradigm, there is another with Tsere, and a third with Kholem (analogous to bZDp. Nl^j by*)} extending through the whole con- jugation : (1) e. g. Perf. 7p^ (also 7p^), it is a light

' "T '-T

thing; Infin. DSPT* '^ melt; Partcp. DDJ. wasted away. (2) y^}2, they are rolled together; Infin. absol. tlSH* ^^

§ I.] Verbs Double Ayin, 151

.>

plundered: Imperat. ^ty^T}, take yourselves up; Imperf. (407)

c) Hiphil and Hoplial.'] (I) Instead of Tsere the final syllable has sometimes Pathakh, especially with gutturals, as "IDH;

Infin. "IQIlj to cleanse; (2) but also without a guttural, as

p'Trr ; Plur. !)3Dn ; Partcp. 72iQ, shadowing.

- .. - .. ^

The Imperfect with retracted tone takes the form TTD\ he protects; py^\ and he rolled.

It may be remarked in general, that verbs Double Ayin are 408 very nearly related to verbs Ayin Vav, as appears even frinn the similarity in their conjugations, which are parallel throughout.

In form the verb ^^ is generally shorter than the other (comp. ^D** and DJlp\ HDH and D^pn). In some cases they have

precisely the same form as in the Imperf. convers. of Kal and Hiphtly in Hophal, and in the unfrequent conjugations. On account of this relation, they have sometimes borrowed forms from each other : e. g. V\'yi for ]"T', he rejoices.

T T

Along with the contracted forms there are found, especially 409

in certain conjugations and tenses, others which are wholly

> regular : e. g. Perf. Kal TT^, to plunder, Plur. !)n3,> -I^TTB (also

^iTTZL) ; Infin. 23D and '2D » Imperf. ppl'', he is gracious, elsewhere ^n"*. Hiph. y^yiHt Imperf. ]''J'i\ he will rejoice (which is never contracted) ; Partcp. D'^Dt^D* astonished. Some- times the full form appears to be emphatic.

Although the afformatives here do not attract the tone, yet it 410 is thrown on them when suffixes are appended, as ^3D, ''J')21D«

Before Dagesh, Kholem in the Imperf. becomes Kibbuts, less frequently Kamets-Khatuph ; Tsere in Hiph. becomes Khirik

(after the analogy of riJ^HD/l. JllBDn) ; the preformatives

then, in place of the full vowel, take Sh'va: e. g. '•J^D*'*

•imnD^ Hiph.h^D'. \: • •• • :

152

Verbs Double Ayin,

[CH. 11.

Vocabulary.

4 1 1 To curse, "n^^, arar.

To take prey ; to "spoil, plunder y Tt3> bazaz.

To roll, ^^2), galal*.

— T

To cover, protect, ]ii), ganan. To be weak, yy^, dalal. To be silent, DD1> damam.

- T

To be clean, TT^t* zachach.

-T

To be wounded, f 77n> khalal. To be hot, D^Hj khamam. To be gracious, ]jn> khanan. To be broken, Jl/irT> khathath.

— T

To beat (down) ; crush ; to rout, ilJ13, cathath.

~ T

To be completed or ended : to cease, QDDj tamam |.

To measure, TID, madad.

~ T

To melt : to faint, DDD,nia5a5§.

— T

To 6e in bitterness, "TIO, marar.

-T

To feel, ti^ti^D. mashash.

- T

To fee, "I*7J, nadad.

To <Mr» oneself; to go round: to surround, "yHVy sabhabh.

To cover, conceal: to protect, "JTJDj *achach.

To cast up a mound, a way, p?'0, 5alal.

~ T

To tie up: to bind, T)^i, tsarar.

— T

To be light: to be lessened or abated, 77p, kalal.

-'t

To shout (for joy), ]y^, ranan. To err, :iJ)^, shagag.

~ T

To carry off; to spoil, y^^l),

— T

shalal.

To be desolate : to desolate, Dt2^, shamam.

— T

Desolation, ^'ih* khorebh. For ever, H^iJ/. lane'tsakh

- VT

(netsakh, a subst.= strength, perpetuity).

To destroy, ]l}]^^, nathash.

- T

A door, rhrj^ de'leth. Hinge, T'iJ, tsir.

Bed,

f nm mi«ah(an)||. psi^D, mishcabh (a).

* Also 77^, not used in Kal : in Poel, to affect painfully,

with ^.

f In Hipb. to begin. Probably the first meaning is to open. X In Hiph. to complete: to finish.

§ Regular in many forms : as are nddad and several others. II Na/ah, to stretch out; shachabh, to lie down.

§ 1.] Ve7'bs Double Ay in, 153

To mourn, "IQD. «aphad. "^ (41l) Mourning, ^QDD> mispedfo). (' First-born, "lO^, b'chor (ba-

char, to be early). A dog, H/I), ce'lebh.

Supplication, X)}'nr), takh*nun

(pi. tm or 6th) ; khanan, to be gracious.

To pierce, lp'7, dakar. Only (son), -T>n\ yakhid.

^D (for n^yD, intent, purpose), occurs only with 7 C]yD7> for the sake of) ; with suffixes, '^^Vu?, for my sake, Sec.

Exercise 39.

a) D")Dr ■^n^^ r\tr\^ Dn:i;i to:39 niinn ?»Dn i *nnKn 1412

JT:* V.-T T : A- T >' T l ~t:-T TTJ ;- •• |T

-'^n^D'bv b^v\ HT^i"^;? "^y\Brs rhin 2 :narr

I T • - "t; at- - J • V ••— V. Tl"

•• T I ; J- J-; • T •• - • : ~ |t: |- t t

' •••jTT V • ) \ \ ) A : • V a~T V :

:''in;r -m u;q':'1 ^iyo'? J1^^•T^r n^y^^'7^^ ^ni-):i 10

••nr^i^-D:i ^DTDj^ D'-n'psn

* This difficult verse is best explained thus: (1) the nomi- native, ' the enemy' (which some consider the vocative), must be considered as a nominntivus pendens, just stating, who are the subject of the discourse. The enemy = as to the enemy, &c. (2) In ndthashta the Psalmist is addressing Jehovah. (3) hem- mah (they), which is construed in our version with them, must be considered nom. to dbh'du understood.

f Infin. constr. of hayah, to be, with 7 prefixed.

154 Verbs Pe Nun, [cH. ii.

(412) b) 1. The enemy (pi.) plundered the city. 2. The city will be plundered. 3. The great cities were plundered. 3. Thou shalt not plunder this city. 4. Those who are shearing his flock. 5. I am very weak. 6. My eyes are weak. 7. We are very weak. 8. Our brethren have made-faint our hearts. 9. They flee [regular) from me. 10. Does not the door turn upon its hinge ?

Chap. XI. § 2. Verbs Pe Nun.

413 The principal anomaly of this class of verbs is that the Nun, when it would close a syllable, is assimi- lated to the following consonant. Sometimes also an initial Nun is dropt.

414 I. The assimilation of Nun takes place {a) in the

Imperfect of Kal. The second vowel is most commonly 0, sometimes a: e occurs only in yitten (z: yinten), from nathan, to give ; (b) in the Perfect of Niphal; (c) throughout Hiphil and Hophal (which has always Kibbuts).

II. a) The Imperat. and Infin. constr, often drop the Nun (by aphceresis), as gash/o?' n'gash, I^^ for

b) The Infin. then, however, usually appends the feminine ending eth (the accent being on the

penult.)', after a guttural, dth: as IV^^^ (ge'sheth),

> * "

DV^ (ga^ath), from nagaj;, to touch.

c) The Imperative has usually a, but sometimes e (as in ten, give, from nathan). It frequently takes the lengthened form with appended h: t'nah, give up (HJliJ^).

415 The characteristic of these verbs, in all the forms which have a preformaiive, is Dagesh following the preformative in the second radical; but, as we shall see, some forms of verbs Pe Yod, and even of verbs double Ayin, resemble them in this.

416 The Nun is nearly always retained in the forms enumerated in I., II., when the second radical is a

§ 2.] Verbs Pe Nun. 155

guttural (as yinkhal, he will possess) . In other cases (416) the retention of it is comparatively rare, never oc- curring in Niphal, and very seldom in Hiphil and Hophal.

Similar anomalies are in part exhibited by T\\P 417

(lakakh), to take; Lamed being assimilated or dropt like the Nun.

Imperf. yikkakh. Imperat. kakh (seldom I'kakh). Jnfin. constr. ka'khath. Hoph. Imperf. yiikkakh. — Niphal, however, is always nilkakh.

Nathan (^JTIJ), to give, is peculiar in assimilating 418

the final as well as the initial Nun. Thus, nathatti, teth, for nathanti, te'neth [Tnfin. constr.). — On the Imperf. see above, I.

Example '\I)y^., nagash, to approach : see Appendix E, p. 20.

-T

Short Paradigms. [The regular forms are in italics.]

Partcp. nogesh 419 niggfish maggish muggash Past partcp. of Kal, nagush. Infin. ahsol. 1) nagosh, 2) hinnagosh, 3) haggesh. Imperat. (Kal) gash g'shi gashnah

(Niph.) hinnagesh hinnag'shi hinnagesh'nah (Hiph.) haggesh " haggishi haggesh'nah

The other tenses are conjugated regularly. See Paradigm in Appendix E.

On the Jussive and Cohortative forms of Verbs.

Jussive.j The jussive is a form of the Imperfect, 420 which occurs only in the second and third persons. In verbs Lamed He this form is called the apocopated Imperfect, because the shortening consists in the

	Per/.	Inf. cofistr.	Imperat.	Imperf.
1 Kal	nagash	ge'sheth	gash	yiggash
2 Niphal	niggash	hinnagesh	hinnagesh	yinndgesh
3 Hiphil	higgish	haggish	haggesh	yaggish
4 Hophal	hiiggash	hiiggash	(none)	yuggash

156

Verbs Pe Nun.

[cn. 11.

(420) cutting off (apocope) of the final He ; from these the name is extended to all verbs. The jussive is often not distinguished orthographically from the indi- cative ; v)here it is, it will be pointed out. The Im- perative is also apocopated.

421 Cohortative.'] The first person of the Imperfect and the persons of the Imperative sometimes take apara- gogic He (ah) ; this syllable has the tone wherever the afformatives u, i would have it, and therefore shorten the final vowel of the root, just as those terminations do : hence for eshmdr we have eshm'rah Cn")Q^i^).

As ah appended to an ace. denotes direction, so here it denotes a direction, tendency, or effort of the will.

422 To guard, watch, preserve, I^J, natsar.

— T

To deliver, 7'^^, natsal*.

— T

To come near, to approach, ^^1 nagash.

To bite, "TTti^^, nashach.

To tellf [1:1^, nagad = /o be

— T

clear F']. To look, toil nabha^J.

— T

To touch, ^^^, nagai> (constr.

with J2, &c.). To forsake, ]i}^}, nagash.

— T

To give, IJ^J, nathan.

— T

To fade, ^2.^, nabhal.

— T

To kiss, 7)]^^, nashak.

Vocabulary.

To overtake [Jj"li^i], nasag (in

Hiph.). To take, np7> lakakh. To overthrow, P)7D> salaph (in

Piel). To tear, PjIZO, /araph. A lion, nhJ and HHi^, ''ri

and aryeh. To crush, DID, parak. A serpent, t^H^, nakhash

TT

(decl. 4). Extremity; heel, y^^, )?akebh

(decl. 5, c: but taking Khirik under the first rad. in constr. pi. instead of Pa- thakh).

* In Hiphil : in Kal, to strip off; then, to deliver. ■\ In Hiphil = to make clear (higgid). X In Hiphil : once in Piel.

\^2.]

Ve7'bs Pe Nun,

157

Those two = them both, DrT'J^,

sh'nehem (numeral in constr. state with suffix, 204).

Right hand, "f'TJ)'', yamin (decl.

3, a).

Left hand, bi^D^, s'mol.

To tremble, 1^1, rai^ad. (422)

To smoke, '[]l)y, i^ashan. Season, Jl^, i>eth (i)it-t6, &c.). . Leaf, r^bv^ ^'"^leh (decl. 9).

V T

7o divide; to sing hymns, "irjt, zamar. ~ ^

Exercise 40.

lm''^ 3 : ^•'ij;^ r^i'^ P^'s '^3^ ^n^^^ p]Sd''"]D 2

••'ji^an nn3 vbi^ nn'T'i j^d^^ du-^ji; "it:;?* t:;^iin-'?i^

•|T- -;v VT •• i : -;- A" J" - vv -; • t

"Upp ^t:;:in nn?*"''^:; 'i^^st:^ 'rTnV^b:^; t^^m *]tm^ 4 "n^ Dn^:)::^-Ji?* ^dv np^'i 5 : y\r]^ in^i ^b=^i did

V •• ; V '•• 'j-— ^ IT V : I ; •-

VD"'Q ib?^D';ia ni^^^^Tii^'i birsw^ bviiwu iW^ Dnsjh^

v' : : • i- • T :j— i tt< it- v — a" t: •

;• - TT i" -:i- A" : >",- : •- t - i*

|T !•-; • - T ;•- 'a- J" T -V : - - '|'T|T

§D"'n^n 10 :n3n^-^?* nn^^si nn:n rbik ironing U'^rs nrn'^ n :^:t:;a;^i Dnnn i;:i^ iv^rs'^ 'O^^

•TV 'j-:* iTv:iv: j-ri-.- v— at : • - 'vttv

'^yi V'^'^ 12 :;^i:^n "^b^ iiSi;t:;-ini '^^m y^'Ts

• :v J- : |TT i- t: •: a :~ j"~:

i:^t5^-i^^ •'3 13 :?TD?* Ji^iri t:;^n"':'?*i Tn?< id^d

J • I ^- 'iv • i- • - : ' A- T j-

TO nSi") 14 :aTr i^^ iJi'pm'') i?3a^ rr\rv

' •• : TT : i-:i- j t-:i-: a ~ jt :

•in'7j;i ij^;r2 in^ 1 inD -it:;^ d^d^^j^D"'?:; b^^v:}

* SAaZZ be. f 228, p. 80.

§ A partcp. descriptive of Jehovah.

I rn'sapper, 5, 3.

P

Sing. 1. I will lake. 2. /Thou shalt kiss thy mother.

I. Thou (/.) shalt approach. 3. /He will take.

I She will give.

Plur. 1. We will kiss.

2.,/Ye will take.

I Ye (/.) will pursue. 3. /They will trample.

I They (/.) will take.

158 Verbs Pe Nun. [ch.ii.

a T J |T J V -; T T-:|T ' • TAT jT | •

VT •• V 1- '|VT- ' V T t" : V -'j-T T •

p:i;> ns):?^ niaD^i ''•n v"^^^^ obn^i :i'ii^^') "-i^B^ n'iK'

jT : V t'«: • <v : V - : - ~ : t|v

|.. _ J.. ... •-: • ^- v: !• ta — : 'jv --..v

5) Look the way of the sea; and he looked. 2. The kings were smitten before the children of Israel. 3. They will trample our honour in the dust. 4. Dehver thy people. 5. Tell me all that thou hast heard. G. Their leaves shall not fade. 7. Ye shall not forsake your people. 8. I have given this garden to my brother. 9. Who told thee that thou (°wast) naked ? 10. His leaf shall not fall.

Write down the Hebrew of the following forms § :

(Imperative.)

Sinff. Plur.

Take thou. Draw near.

Draw near (/.). Take (/.).

* With paragogic He. t In the Bible, 5)'^'^^ '

X 0 my strength 1 Another reading is ))uzz6.

§ The pronouns are to represent the masculine when/ is not j

added. \

§3.]

Ve7'bs Pe Aleph.

159

Chap. XL § 3. Verbs Pe Aleph, Feeble Verbs ( Verba quiescentia) .

Example. 7^^^, achal, to eat: see Appendix E, p. 21.

1 Kal

1 Per/, dchal

Short Paradigms. 2 In/, cstr. 13 Twperat, 4 Imperf.

2 NipJi. 'ne^chal

3 Hiph. 'he^chil

4 Hoph. ,h6*'chal

5 Partcp. ochel

ne^chal -i

^ 1 A, (*s verbs Pe ma^chil ^ y««„,.„/)

424

y6°chal m6"chal .

*chol *chol yochel

heachel heachel yeachel

ha'chil ha*chel ya'chil

ho°chal (none)

Past Partcp. of Kal, ach^l.

Injin. absol. 1) achol; 2) heachol.

Imperf. Kal, with Vav conversive, vayyo'chal : vayyo'mer.

In some verbs and forms J>^ quiesces. The verbs 425 in which this regularly occurs are :

7^i^, achal, to eat. j tlBi^y aphah, to bake.

1f2ii) amar, to say. "TI2i^> abhad, to perish.

^^^^, abhah, to be willing.

In the Imperf. Kal of these verbs (of which the 42G two last are also Lamed He)^ and usually in triK,

Tikhaz, to hold, the K quiesces j with a transposition of the vowels. Hence,

"lDi4^ (yomer) for ibM^I = "^b^^.^ the form it would

regularly take as a verb first guttural.

(We shall see that, as verbs Lamed He, dbhdh, 427 dphdh have for their Imperfects ydbheh, yOpheh.)

With conjunctive accents in the middle of a clause, 42S and with Vav conversive (which draws back the tone- syllable), Tsere is usually shortened into Pathakh. This change, however, in the case of Vav conversive, is only found in dchdl; dmdr taking the still greater shortening into Segol : vriyyomer, vattomer.

(Of course, in pause the Tsere is retained).

p2

160

Verbs Pe Aleph.

[CH. 11.

429 Only a few cases occur in which i^ quiesces, ac- cording to the general rule, in t-, — , or -rr. It always quiesces in Tsere in the common form lemor (■^b^^7), in saying ; very seldom in Imperf, Kal.

430 In the first person singular of the Imperfect the quiescent '^ is also rejected, to avoid the concurrence of two Alephs, This occurs frequently in the other forms also.

431 Other verbs beginning with Aleph are conjugated like verbs Pe guttural (Paradigm E.) ; and, except in Kal, even the verbs above given very seldom quiesce.

In Piel, K sometimes falls away by contraction.

Vocabulary.

432 To kiss, pU}}, nashak (in both Kal and Piel).

To burn, 1^^, bai?ar.

To prove, IHIl* bakhan.

- T

To draw-near, ^^p, karabh,

-'t

with i^al, upon =. for the pur- pose of falling upon; of at- tacking.

To divide, p^T], khalak.

A Utile, * tO^O or lO^D, m'i^af or m'X!a.t (from tDPQ> lo be

— T

small, or few).

Expectation, rh'H^D, tokhS'-

leth (a toy); yakhal, to wait, expect.

Joy, nntyD, simkhah (sa- makh, to shine bright).

Hope, expectation, nipJl* tik-

vah fkavah, to wait for, hope in).

For ever, H^^A lanetsakh

(netsakh = truth, perpetuity). A fig-tree, ^^^iD, t'enah. Form, nj4i^, toar (taar, to be

drawn, marked). Countenance, ^^^1D (")j nia-

reh (deck 9, a) ; raah, to see. Except, Di^~''D» ci-im, (ni-si,

properly quod si).

An evil-doer, ^")D, merai?

(partcp. Hiph. of ral^ai?, to be evil).

A wolf, l>i?, z'ebh.

Booty, 1^, Vad.

Prey, 7?^, shalal.

* Z0yD3 ^ as a little (a little) soon.

§3.] Verbs Pe Aleph, ]G1

Exercise 41.

1" a- T : vv.-.-: 'a* •- vjv T :». -a- !•

Sbv^ W^^ -iira^-''3 * ^")i na^/n c]3^^''■|D "i2"p'^:»: 2

A- J- : • J-: • r w ; ; '-v;!-.- V - ' : -

n^'pn) r\ndv DV^n:i rbrr\rs 3 02 fDin-^^ ni:^^

^_r. . . AT : • 'j- •- vjv I •• ) X •• : -

to:*? ^bi^ li^^KT ■Tn^^^ D^nmjr 4 n^'^rs u'v^-) ••inD^ rjiN nDi:^i nnD ^D^^^ n:j^;n i:ij 5 n^i'^ '

It \; -IT -; x." : at; ■ j- x •• ;v a- I" -;

>• T ; • <-T I : ' " J-; V -; T j -;!--

ns^i ■^^^J^ nB"* ^bv \-i^t ^dik K^^-l::?^^ on'^n-DN ipzn p]nrD^ :}i^r r?:^''^^ s : ^b^y\ r^bt2 hdh ^'p U''^^1

'vv - t: • J": • t; - |TT : j : i r i v a* j-: i :

HiTi ini^ d3?:d ^n'?::; 9 : bbt rhr^' 2r\vb^ "li^ b'^^' U2m nnj^T] Djm^ -i^ra^l npijn br^i^ii DD"'^^i"n^J

-'7K Dnh^ nCJi^- "1 = D^i^ D^'Pil-ID ^3 rti7-13 ll ''H 'i^^-U^^

3T '> v:vT i'.'- v; -; J- ;- j" • ;

:D^D^ ntb^ ')Utll2

b) I. The ways of the scorners shall perish. 2. And Jehovah said to the woman, Hast thou not eaten of the tree ? And the woman said. The serpent deceived-me1[, and I did eat. 3. Thy- way perished. 4. Then shalt thou say unto Joab, The sword

* The way = os <o your way.

f Trusting. Partcp. act. Kal in stat. constr. from a verb Lamed He : ilDH-

T T

I Itto rrCiimah, lit. with-him any-thing= any thing that teas loith him.

§ Supply bikrobh again : karabh is construed with /' (= to).

II An oath, life of Pharaoh = by the life of Pharaoh. 11 ''^i^^tn (from N^:: Hiph. i^^WH).

p3

162 Verbs Pe Yod. [ch. ii.

(433) devoureth one as well as another *, 5. I will say, Thou °art my servant, whom I have chosen. 6. The woman ate the bread which ("belonged) to me. 7. I will go upf, and destroy the people. 8. He said to his daughters, Eat flesh. 9. AH fat of ox, or of sheep, or of goat shall ye not eat.

Chap. XI. § 4. Verbs Pe Yod C3). First Class,

or Verbs originally 13. E. g, ^^\ yashabh, to dwell. Paradigm : see Appendix E, p. 22.

— T

Short Paradigms.

	1 Per/.	2 Inf. cstr.	3 Imperat.	4 Imperf.	5 Partcp.
1 Kal	yashabh	she'bheth	rshebh \ y'rash	j'yeshebh	yoshebh
			1 yirash
2 'Niph.	noshabh	hivvashebh	hivvashebh	yivvashebh	noshabh
5 Hiph.	hoshibh	hoshibh	hoshebh	yoshibh	moshibh
6 Hoph.	hushabh	hushabh	(none)	yushabh	mushabh

6 Past Partcp. of Kal, yashubh.

Put. Apoc. (Jussive), yoshebh.

Fut. Vav convers. [Kal), vayye'shebh.

in hi ^^^^' y^^^^^^'

'' ' ' \ Hiph. hoshibh or hoshebh.

Normal Forms. Kallmp. shehh, sh'bhi, shebh'nah ; or, y'rash, yirshi, y'rash'nah. [Perf

[imperf. toshibh toshi'bhi toshebh'nah

435 Verbs Pe Yod are divided into two, or even three, classes: (1) those verbs which have properly a Vavf

* Say: *as this so that.' PIDI ilD; the ^ taking Kamets

V T ; T

as coming immediately before a tone-syllable, t rhVi^* Imperf of rhv Qi). X In Arabic they are written with \

hoshibh hosbi'bhah hoshabh'ta Hiphil { Imperat. hoshebh hoshi'bhi hoshebh'nah

§ 4.] Verbs Pe Yod, 163

for their first radical ; (2) those which are properly (435) Pe Yod; (3) a few of these verbs Pe Yod form, in some respects, a third class inflected like verbs Pe Nun.

Yatsar (1ii'») occurs in both classes : (1) •^ji'» (for l^i")), to be 436

~T -T

in a strait J (2) ■^^'», to form.

(Pe Yod = Pe Vav.)

Kal.] A) Infin. consir., Lnperat., Imperf. — About 437 half of these verbs have the feeblest forms : (1) she- bheth, (2) shebh, (3) yeshebh.

1) Imperf. In yeshebh (2^,^) the second e is only

lengthened by the tone^ and may be shortened to Segol and vocal Sh'va ; the e in the first syllable is somewhat firmer, and in a degree still embodie.s the first radical ^ that has fallen away.

2) Imperat. y^ is from 21^^, by omission of the feeble \

3) Infin. T^yi) is shortened in the same way, and takes the fern, ending D-..— , which again gives to the form more length and body.

B) The other half of these verbs are inflected with 438 stronger forms, having the Imperf. Middle A, and retaining the Yod at the beginning ; but in the Imperf. only as quiescent, or as- resolved into the vowel i.

Imperat. ll^T and Infin. ID] retain the ^ as a conso- nant, but in Imperf. ^T^ it is a quiescent.

That the latter mode of inflexion belongs to verbs actually 439 //

13 is shown, partly by the numerous verbs which take these forms in Kal, and at the same time have ") in Nijjhal, Hiphtl, and Hophal, partly by the analogy of the Arabic.

Even in the same verb are found both forms, one with, the other without Yod.

164 Verbs Pe Yod. [ch. ii.

440 a) The original Vav always appears in Niphal,

HiphU, and Hophal. It quiesces in the Perf. and Partcp. of Niphal, and throughout HipMl, in Kholem; throughout Hophal in Shurek: as

nti^ijj (for nt^y), 2'^p)r\ (for 2^t?^in), nii^^n (for

b) In the Infin., Imperat., and Imperf. Niphal, ") re- mains as a consonant, and the inflexion is regular.

c) It also retains its power as a consonant in the Hithpael of some verbs : e. g. ^'^ljn»7 ^'odi ^T.

441 The other forms, with few exceptions, are regular.

442 In those forms in which Yod does not appear, these verbs may be distinguished, in the Imperf. of Kal by the Tsere under the preformatives, in Niphal, Hiphtl, and Hophal, by the Vav

(*)» i> ^) before the second radical. Forms Hke 21'\l}, D^^, they

have in common with verbs Pe Nun. Hophal has the same form as in verbs Double Ayin and Ayin Vav.

443 a) The Injin. of Kal without the radical Yod, has very seldom

the masculine form like ^"^, to know, or the feminine

ending H- like XVwt to bear, b) With a guttural the latter takes the form * j^ __^ instead of J") „ f. : e. g. Jl^l, ^0 A;wom;. Examples of the regular full form occur with suffixes, nD^» ilD^- 'A'his full form seldom takes the feminine ending, as D/D'*, to be able.

444 The Imperat. Kal often has the lengthening pf-, as H^ti^, sit;

nil, descend. From ^l!''* ^o 5'*^^* the lengthened Imperat. is

> > > .

n^n>/<?^. ''Hn, pl^f. ^^n, with accented Kamets, owing to the

T T • T T

influence of the guttural.

445 a) The Imperf. of the form ^ti^> takes Pathakh in its final

syllable, when it has a guttural, as yi'', also IIJ^.

* m7, in 1 Sam. iv. 19, is contracted to r)/.

§ 4.] Verbs Pe Yod, 165

b) "When the tone is drawn back on the penultima, the final (445) syllable takes Segol; namely, before a word of one syllable,

and after Vav conversive: e. g. Ki"2lt^''> "I"}*")' 2^^\ but in Pause, y^)^) and ll^").

c) The form ti^"^"'^ when lengthened, may also lose its radical "» (as !)3^\ ^'^y^)- Yet the cases are rare and doubtful where this occurs after other preformatives than >.

In some stems the feebleness affects also the Per/. Kal, so far that the a under the second radical becomes e or z in such forms as have no full vowel under the first radical, as rm^T'. Di^t!/"1%

'I'^Dlb'' from ]i}-)\ ^y I . . . . .. _^ — ^

a) As an exception the Imperf. Niph. sometimes retains Yod:

^- g- /Tl^^'), and he waited.

li) The first Pers. sing, has always the form ^t^^i^, not

•• T V

In Piel the radical Yod sometimes falls away after *» pre- 446

> :

formative, which takes its punctuation : e. g. ^ini^B.'^l for i .. •

•inii^B.''''')* one? he dried it up.

Imperf. Hiphil, like Imperf. Kal, takes Segol when the tone is 447 drawn back.

The verb '^pT^, to go, is connected with verbs Pe Yod of the 448

first class, for it forms (as if from "Tj7"») Imperf. 'rp'f with Vav, ^p-'], m pause "TTTIj Injin. constr. J137, Imperat. ^, lengthened Ptihy and also TT*?, and so Hiphil, Tf'pin- Rarely (and almost exclusively in the later books and in poetry) we find also the regular inflexions from '!j7n> as Imperf. T[bn\ Infin. TJ^H, Imperat. pi. •IDSiI; on the contrary, Perf. Kal is always ^7(1, Partcp. "^btl, Injin. absol. 'Thr\ ; Piel "TT^n ; Hithpael rhr^Jin ', so that a > nowhere distinctly appears as first radical *.

* An obsolete stem, 'TJ7'', may however be assumed, although in a word so much used as "TT^il, the feeble letter H n^ay itself

- T

be treated like ^ and so the inflexion resemble Pe Yod. Comp.

166

Verbs Pe Yod.

[en. 11.

Vocabulary,

449 To know, ^T, yadai>.

To hear: to beget, "^T, yalad.

To add, t]D'', yasaph.

To come down, descendy "n^,

— T

yarad. To profit, b^\ ya^^al.

~T

To dwell, 2lti^^ yashabh.

- T

To save, ^\l}'^, yashai^.

- T

To set up, erect, establish, [.'2,'^i]> natsabh, in Hiph.

— T

Treasure, "^^ilNj otsar (pi.

T

To conceal, HD^y casah.

T T

To withhold, '7\)Dn> khasach.

Want, poverty, "liDHD* makh-

sor.

Only, 1|^^, ach.

Proud, Hhi^, geeh {pi. D^K5).

Widow, ^JD7^^. almanah.

Instruction, Tip?, le'kakh

{prop, taking speech ; lakakh, to take).

Adversity, n"l!ij tsarah (a»),

TT

decl. 10; tsarar, to bind. Corner, nJ]5. pinnah (dw),

T •

decl. 10.

Roof, :i:i, gag (decl. 8, a).

Fellowship, "l^irT. khe'bher.

Generation, age, "11*^ or 1"Jy, dor or dor (decl. 1).

Exercise 42.

[Note. — The student must not suppose that every sentence will necessarily contain an example of the conjugation (or form) that is the subject of the exercise.]

450 :tJ^^^^:a ^iD^ wb^'i *tpv^) yu}^ m2D "^fbin i : J11DD b^^iD nbi)i) :;t^ nniiij^ ^b'^^S'^'i^b 2

VlT •

'TT :

J :

also the feeble Pe Aleph : e. g. '^b^D from ^tj^, and '^^bD ^I'oni ^bn, Imperf. HiphU, ^"m^^ from ln^^, and HD^^^J^ from,

'- T T • - X T •

* Nei>*'kash (5,2), from i^akash, to walk perversely, Sfc., to be perverse; usually construed, who is perverse in his ways: al. (taking the dual strictly) he who walks unsteadily in two ways.

f In one (of them) : i. e. of the two ways.

§4.] Verbs PeYocl ]67

: rTDir yiv 5i''bi'' ^b^ 'v^vp^ j*\-t mn*' n^nn 3 (450) "1-T3D t:^'' 5 : ur)V \^br> hddt iD;;3 ar-rv Di'':a ^^^* 4

^n^D '?^3ii^"' DDrr n"? 7 •. ^:D^^* '^-n-i nkn Tr\rv

iV J" : ~ TTV J •• |TT : - J ; ••-; AT :

>~: ~A"T a" ••». T : T|V ' J- T T ; - ;

•T : • •.-;•••• AT -• - v;VT 1"T- tt:

T - • : - : A" — : a- t •-;- v jt J"

"iTto vhi^i^ ^v^n^' ^'^D-r^^'^^r d^d** n :?Tjn'?n;n

t : T : 'a* 'vav •• : - j*t i"''' • :

:1lD:?n-'?^^ '^bi^ im^ 12 o'ni

I -:i- - «•- • tr : IT

6) 1 . A fire is kindled in (3,) my anger, and shall burn unto

hell. 2. God caused the sea to go down, and the dry land ap- peared §. 3. Cursed {° be) the day on (2) which I was born.

4. My days have declined |1 as a shadow, and as grass am I dried up. 5. Abraham was eighty-six years old IT when Hagar bare Ishmael to him. 6, He says to the temple, Thou shalt be founded. 7- The Lord fainteth not, neither is weary. 8. The youths shall faint, and be weary.

9. Write down the short Paradigms of yalad, to bear (in- cluding Piel and Pual).

■ T ; ■

f ' A house of fellowship' = a house in common.

X Imperat. with n paragogic,

§ ^^^"lm. Imperf Niph. of n?^"i.

y T •• : T T

II ''•ItOi. Parlcp. Pass, of na/ah.

T

^ Say : * at Q) the bearing (Infin. constr.) of Hagar :' the two words to be joined by Makkeph.

168

Ve7'bs Pe Yod.

[CH. 11.

Chap. XI. § 5. Feeble Verbs Pe Yod (continued). A. Second Class, or Verbs properly Pe Yod.

See ^tO\ ya^abh, to be good. Paradigm: Appendix E, p. 23. Paradigms of Verbs properly Pe Yod.

	1 Per/.	2 Itif. cstr.	3 Imperat.	4 Imjterf.	5 Paiicp
451 1 Kal	ya/abh	y'^obh	y7abh	yi^abh	yo/ebh
5 Hiph.	hedbh	he/ibh	he/ebh	ye^ibh	me^ibh

Past Partcp. of Kal, ya^ubh.

452 The most essential points of difference between verbs properly Pe Yod and verbs properly Pe Vav are the following :

453 Kal.'\ In the Imperf., Imperat., and Infin. the radical *^ is retained [Infin. HZO)), being in the Imperf, Middle A quiescent as i: e. g. yitcibh (2'^'^'i), the Pathakh of which becomes Segol, when the tone moves

back, as VPA'^^j ^^^ ^^ awoke.

454 Hiphil.'] Here the '' is retained, forming with Tsere a diphthongal e, ^^Zp''!! (for H^^^Il), Imperf.

n'^D'') ; seldom with the diphthong ai, ay, as in ^"1^^)1»

they make straight.

455 Of the Imperf. Hiph. there is an anomalous form with pre- formatives put before the 3rd pers. 7v\ as 7v''\ '^e wails;

7v^)^. 1 wail; ^'h'^Pi, ye wail: once even in Imperf. Kal,

j;T\ from 3;"T>. So ^^D'''' ; this anomaly is explained by sup- — ... —1- . «••

posing, that the ■» of the simple form was superficially taken to belong to the stem.

B. Third Class, or Contracted Verbs Pe Yod.

456 a) The Yod of these verbs does not quiesce in

long z or e, but is assimilated like n. Some verbs are exclusively of this class.

§ 5.] Verbs Pe Yod. 169

h) Others have two forms ; in one the Yod is as- (456) similated, in the other it quiesces, as p2i% to

pour, Imperf. piJ) and \>*;j^^ ; ")^'^ to form, Imperf.

")2^;i and 'y^\ ; ")^;, to be straight, Imperf. ')t^\

and y^\

Verbs of this class (which seldom occur) are inflected like 45/ verbs Pe Nun, for which they may easily be mistaken by the \ learner. When, therefore, a form has not a root Pe Nun in the Lexicon, he should look for one of this class.

To howl, bh\ yalal. 458

— T

To sleep, 1^^, yashan.

Vocabulary,

To be good, ^J0\ ya/abh *.

- T

To awake, Vp^, yakats. To suck, T)y^, yanak f.

a) Verbs exclusively of the contracted form :

To spread beneath, p^'', yatsa^ {Hiph. hits-tsiai? ; Hoph, hiits-

tsaJ)).

To bum up, D*^'^, yatsath {Imperf. yitstsath ; Hiph. hits-

tsith).

b) Verbs with two forms :

To pour, p^>, yatsak (Imperf. yitstsok ; and with

"^ Vav. conv. vayye'tsek).

To form, ")i{"», ydtsar (Imperf. vayyi'tser [c. Fay conu.]

"■^ and yitstsor).

To be straight, '1^'', yashar {Imperf. yishar and yishshar).

To bubble-out, J^H nabhai^ \.

— T

Joyful, TV2iV, sameakh (from

- •• T

samakh, to shine bright j be glad).

A cure, nHi). gehah.

Afflicted, i<iDJ, nache" {fern.

Horned, l^pOt makrin §.

Sea-monster, ]^r), tannin {pi. only).

* In Hiph. to seem good; to please; also, to make good; do good. f In Hiph. to give suck; suckle. X In Hiph. trans, to pour forth. § Prop. Hiph. partcp. for makrin j kSrSn, a horn.

Q

170 Verbs PeYod. [ch. ii.

(458) The breast, '^^l), shad. I Ostrich, 7)?\ ya)?en.

- ..X

A whelp, 1^;|, gur (decl. 1). Cruel, ITDhJ, achzar.

T ;

To plant, ^l^y na/ai^.

^^ Since these verbs differ from the usual mode of in- flection only in the Imperfect Kal and in Hiphil, these parts only are given in the examples.

Exercise 43.

459 a) -rb^^^ *;r^n'' uh'^vi ^s') iv^ n>ro''ri D"'aDn wb i

v|v - ;•- • • : r "AT J' " • T-:v ' a :

:iio^^T 3 : Dirti^:i'»r^ ^^iDi nm nn5 n'^io^^ nD\/:^ 2b 2

>- — v|T V- : T •• : - ;: at** 4* •• -"tv j ••

nVn^"? nro^rii 4 :vii^'?3 ^^^^^n') ria^-is) ^tv^- innn

t: - : J- - - 'av •• I ' «■••• ~ : JT ' • - -

.. . _ _ ^ T T - T : J- ~ I T : • - V •• : -

A • : - : vv : — / : t- - jv ••< t r - 'j -;

J-; '•- )"i • AT : • a": 'vx. ^-a~: i :~ »\—

iD^bn num n;?"iD vp^'''^ i^ -^^^^

b) 1. We will sleep and dream in the night. 2. Iiif the morning shalt thou awake and tell thy dream. 3. Sarah gave suck to children which she bare unto Abraham. 4. It will be good for us that God will come down to the earth |. 5. If ye forsake the Lord, and serve a strange god §, he will consume |)

* 3, 4, n. t ^.

X To the earth, Hii'^hi : respecting the H-* see 175, c. T :iT T

§ A strange pod, 1J^ ^"T7K, a god of the stranger. T" •• v:

II He will consume, HTDV

§5.]

Verbs Pe Yod.

171

you according as * he hath done you good. 6. The menf shall (459) lament, and all the inhabitants X of the land shall howl. 7. Noah will awake from wine, and know what § Ham has done. 8. The potter || formeth the vessel. 9. My people shall be taken 1[, and their rulers** shall howl. 10. I will howl for Moab, and I will cry out for all Moab : joy and gladness is withdrawn from the land of Moab. 11. Ye will not form man out of the earth as the Lord hath done this ff.

Chap. XI. § 6. Feeble Verbs Ayin Vav, E. g. Dip kum, to rise up. Paradigm : see Appendix E, p. 24.

		Short Paradigms.
	1 Per/.	Ilnfin. constr.	BImperat.	4 Imperf.	5 Partcp. 460
1 Kal	kam	k^m	kum	yakum	kam
2 Niphal	nakom	hikkom	hikkom	yikkom	nakora
3 Pilel	komem	komem	komem	y'komem	m'komem
4 Pulal	komam	komam	(none)	y'komam	m'komam
5 Hiphil	hekim	hakim	hakem	yakim	mekim
6 Hophal	hukam	hukam	(none)	yiikam	mukara

Past Partcp. of Kal, kum.

Imperf. Apoc. (Kal) yakom ; (Hiph.) yakem.

Imperf. c. Vav conv. {Kal) vayya'kom; Hiph. vayyakem.

Infin. ahsol. {Kal) kom ; -{Hiph.) hakem or hakem. In Niph, as Infin. constr.

* According as, "lt£^J^ ''1^^^» cfier that which. t D*Ti^» used collectively for the plural.

TT

I Partcp. Kal of ^ti^>, to dwell, inhabit.

~ T

§ "Itr^J^TIJ^. II Partcp. Kal of ■)2i^ IT Pual.

V ~: V — T

** Partcp. Kal of "p^D, to rule. ff As— this, "It^^NS

q2

172

Verbs Ayin Vav,

[CH. 11.

Normal Forms.
kam	kamah	kam'ta
kum	ku'mi	kom'nah
yakAm	taku'mi	t'kumenah
nakom	nako'mah	n'kiimo'tha
hikkom	hikko'mi
yikkom	tikko'mi	tikkom'nah
hekim	hekimah	h*kira6'tha
hakem	haki'mi
yakim	taki'mi	takem'nah
hukam	huk'mah	hukam'tah

461 fPerf,

1 Kal \ Imperat.

L Imperf. r Per/.

2 Niph. < Imperat.

, Imperf. r Per/.

3 Htph. < Imperat.

I Imperf.

4 Hoph. Per/.

462 In these verbs the Vav always gives up its con- sonantal power, and is absorbed by the principal vowel of the form, even when it would^ if regularly formed, stand between two full vowels. Thus, in Kal Past Par top. {kdvumzz) Mm; Infin. absol. (kdvdmzz) kom. Hence the root always appears as a mono- syllable.

463 The principal vowel of the form is the second vowel. This second vowel receives, by its union with Vav, greater extension and firmness than it naturally pos- sesses. Thus, in Infin, and Imper. k'^vom becomes kum (D^p) ; Perf. kdvdm becomes kdm (the Vav dis- appearing). This firmer vowel cannot be ejected; it may, however, be shortened: as kdm from kamtdh. The Imperf. Uiphil ysikim. {from yakvim) is shortened in the Jussive to kem.

a) The verb intrans. middle E takes in Per/. Kal the form of /ID (from JTID)^ h^ *« dead.

b) The verb middle 0 takes the form of ^^^ (from "^iK),

T

luwit; ^*|3, (from ^i^l), he was ashamed.

T

464 The preformatives in the Imperf. Kal, Perf Niph., and throughout Hiph. and Hoph., which before the monosyllabic stem form a simple syllable, take, in- stead of the short vowel of the regular form, the

§ 6.] Verbs Ayin Vav. 173

corresponding long one (59 — 61) : e. g. ycikum for (464) yakom ; hekim for hikvim ; hukam for hukvam.

This vowel is changeable, and becomes ^A'ua when the tone 465

is thrown forward * : e. g. with the full plural form (with n

> epenthetic) of the Imperf. I^J^^ty^, they will die.

The u in Hophal is the only exception. But this conjugation 466 is formed (in appearance) by transposing the letters of the original stem. Thus hukvam becomes by transposition hiivkdm, hence hukam.

a) Some of the forms in these verbs arise from primitive 467 forms which afterwards became obsolete in the regular verb : e. g. Imperf. Kal, ydkum for yakom; Partcp. kdm for kdvdm (aft. an original form kdidl).

h) Those which conform to the regular Hebrew verb are, in general, the least common : as yebhosh (aft. the regular Imperf. yibvosh).

c) The 0 in Niphal comes from va (= na) : ndkdm from ndkvam; Imperf. yikkdm from yikkdvam.

In the Pei'f. Niph. and Hiph. the harshness of pro- 468 nunciation in such forms as ndkomtd, hekamtd, is avoided by the insertion of 6 before the afFormatives of the first and second person. For the same pur- pose (y e is inserted in the Imperf. Kal before the

termination ndh. These inserted syllables take the tone and shorten the preceding vowels, as ndkom^ n^kumothd ; hekim, N'kimothdh ; also h^kemothd, fkumendh.

(Yet in some cases the harder forms, without the inserted syllable, are also in use.)

The tone, as in verbs Double Ayin, is not thrown forward upon the afFormatives dh, u, i, except with

the full plural form (with epenthetic n) \^iy\\>\ In

those persons which take afFormatives without epen- thesis (see 477), the accentuation is regular, as

r\t2\) ; so in Hophal, npj^in. For the tone on i and

>1 'see 468.

> * Hence before Suflf. J)iir)''Q\ he will kill him,

q3 "'

174 Verbs Ayin Vav, [ch. ii.

470 The conjugations Piel, Pual, and Hithpael^ are very seldom found in verbs properly Ayin Vav. The only instance in which the Vav remains as consonant is li^V, to surround, the Piel of "T^J? (but see 476). In

some others "• has taken the place of % as in Dp

from D^p, TV] from ^IH ; forms which belong ta the

later Hebrew *. On the contrary, the unfrequent conjugation Pilel, with its Passive and Reflexive {kitlel or kiilal; Pass, kutlal, Reflex, hithkdtlel), is the common form employed in the signification of Piel, and as a substitute for it: e. g. D^'p? to raise

up, from Dip ; DQi"), to elevate, Pass. DD)"), from U)1 ;

l^liyjin, to rouse oneself, from "l^y. Less frequent is

the conjugation Pilpel: e. g. /B/I), to sustain, to

nourish, from /ID.

471 Of these unusual conjugations the Paradigm exhibits only Pilel and Pulal, from which the reflexive {Hithpael) is readily formed.

Remarks.

472 I. Kal."] Of verbs middle E and 0, which in the regular verb also have their Perf. and Partcp. the same f, the following are examples : 1) muth {to die); Perf. meth {for maveth), me'thah, mat'ti, math'nu ; Partcp. meth. 2) bush {to blush) ; Perf. bosh {for bavosh), bo'shah, bosh'ti, bosh'nu; Partcp. {pi.) boshim.

473 a) In the Infin. and Imperat. of some verbs, 1 always quiesces

in Kholem (as i^^^, 21^, "IIJ^)-

b) In most verbs, however, it quiesces only in Shurek ; but even in these the Infin. absoL has *) in the final syllable (after the form /'iDp)* as -"^Q^p^ U^X>, surgendo surgent.

c) Those verbs which have i in the Infin. retain it in the Imperf., as i^i^^.

T

d) In one verb alone the preformatives of the Imperf. have Tsere, viz. ]£)):!, Imperf ^^y^ (for ^^y).

* Having been borrowed from the Aramaean.

f Of the Perf. and Partcp. the usual form Dp is very seldom

't

written with 2^ (after the Arab, mode) : e. g. Di^p-

§ 6.] Ve7'bs Ayin Vav. 175

In the Imperat. with afformatives ('»Q^p, !)Q1p) the tone is on 474

the penultima, with a few excei)tions. The lengthened form [with H— ] ^^^> on the contrary, the tone usually on the last

T

syllable (HD^pj H^^I^^), with a few exceptions where the word is Milel

a) The shortened Imperf. as Jussive has the form Dp'' (very 475 seldom Dip\ Dj^^).

b) So in poetic language as Indicative, as Q"l'», DHJ^, fi^, it, shall be high. "^ "^

c) After Vav conversive, and before words of one syllable, the tone is also drawn back upon the penultima, and the last

syllable takes Kamets-Khatuph, as Dp-1, "Tf^ Dp''.

'tt- 't 'tt

d) In Pause, however, the tone remains on the last syllable, as Jib- V

e) With a guttural or Resh, the final syllable may take Pathakh : e. g. ID'I. and he turned aside (from ^JlD)-

- T-

The full plural ending un (V\) has the tone (cf. 472 of this §).

II. Niphal.l Anomalous form<? are : Per/. DDIiiSJ* ye have 475 been scattered ; Infin. constr, tt^^'^n. " •

TIL Hiphil.'] Examples of Perf. without the epenthetic *) : 477 i^S)Jn, thou lift est ; TMl^tl; thou killest j and even Di^DH (Num. xvii. 6, &c.).

In the Imperat. the shartened and lengthened forms DpH> 478 nDVrr, hoth occur.

T '• T

a) The shortened Imperf. has the form Dp**, as ID"''), that he 479 may take away. '"^ "'^'

b) After Vav conversive the tone is drawn back upon the pen-

•> >

ultima, as D"1'1; VH)")' and he scattered.

VT- ' VT-

c) The final syllable, when it has a guttural or Rcsh, takes Pathakh, as in Kal : e. g. "JD ■), anc? Ae removed.

176 Verbs Ay in Vav. [ch. ii.

(Additional Remarks.)

480 IV. On account of the intimate relation between verbs Ayin Vav and verbs Double Ayin, it is necessary, in analyzing forms, to note particularly the points in which these classes differ.

Several forms are exactly the same in both : e. g. Imperf. Kal

If {f

with Va'G covversive; Pilel of "IJ? and Poel of j;j?. Hence it is, that they often borrow forms from one another, as in Kal, |^,

he despised (Per/, of ]^^, as if from TTH); HZOj ^^ besmeared

(for nzo).

T

481 In common with verbs yy, those of this class have in Niphal and Hiphil the Chaldee and Rabbinic punctuation, which sub- stitutes for the long vowel under the preformatives, a short one followed by Dagesh forte. This form and the common one are often both in use : e. g. JT'DH. to incite, Imperf. /T*D'' (also

iT'Dn* JT'D'') ; "IPI*")? flwc? he shows the way (also ^jy^) ; some-

• •• • T •• -- i •• T

times with a different meaning, as rT'^ilj to cause to rest, to give > > - . ..

rest, rfiiri} Imperf. H'^il''. to set down, to lay down; ]v'*. to spend the night, to abide; y^"^, ypt2, to be headstrong, rebellious. Other examples: Niph. 7*)^^ (from 7?)Q, not 7D3)> to be cir- cumcised; with a guttural, 1^^^; Hiph. T-TIl, to despise, •IPj'"**-

482 Verbs whose middle stem-letter is Vav moveable (i. e. sounded as a consonant) are, in respect to this letter, perfectly regular : e* g« IDTl, to be white, Imperf. IIH^; Vlil. to expire, Imperf.

y)T i particularly all verbs that are also H/, as Hlii > Piel,

n'lik, to command; TViO, to wait, &c.

T- t'*

* Here belong some forms of verbs Pe guttural with Dagesh forte implicilum, which have generally been derived from a false root, or been uncritically altered : viz. ^Hi^*) for ti^njm, and

she hastens (from ]1}^W i Z0V^1» ^W*) (from ZOI^, l^'^^, to rush

upon. G.).

§6.]

Verbs Ayin Vav.

177

Vocabulary,

To be ashamed, ]l}^^, bush *.

To despise, t^2> hiiz.

To understand, y\21, bAn {also bin t).

To arise. Dip, kum.

To fix, establish, ^?j3, cun.

To scorn, make a mock of, y-v, luts.

To get, obtain, p?)3, puk, in Hiph.

To place; to set on, DVlt^, sum.

To return, intr., 31t^> shubh |.

Wall, fence, mi!), g'derah(w); T •• :

gadar, to fence \. To break down, Y")3, parats.

Fortress, "l^i^Q («), mibhtsar 483

(batsar, <o cm< q^).

Understanding, ni^^i^ ("w)*

t'bhunah (bhun or bhin, <o discern) .

To found, "TO'', yasad.

~ T

Rottenness, ^p"1, rakabh.

't t

Snare, t^piQ, mokesh (ya-

kash, to set a snare). Guilt, Dt^^^> ashana.

T T

Deceit, nD"lQ. mirmah (ra-

Therefore, yifb)^, i>al-cen. Congregation, TV^))> i^edah ()?adah, he appointed).

Exercise 4i4i,

a) mn> 2 '.TMTi'o v-i^iiQ rs'dv rrrnrb:^ r\T\^ 1 484

T : I""" ' ; ••"•■T ; • T ; V- AT I**; t t : j-T

u't^rs^ !)jun 3 :TOinni U'nt pis -p^ "t^'' ^ddh^

J* T : a* T |T : • --T ';•• ' VAT -AT T : T :\.

rm'D m'^ p^3> liD 4 -. ^b ^:^nn d^^d Ji hdi);

AT :i" ' TV ' a-T . \" >■ T • • : AT :t

V i : - Av : jT t ' J • I - I* : ~ •» • : ^' :

3p"iDi n'?:;:! mroy "p^n nt^ e :DiD''-'?:i D^ni

'vtt: at; - vjv -; —\. V J." I • ~ i. • -

t; • ;•• • A vjT" T t;v jt |t ■ ; jt ; - :

* In Hiph. to make ashamed.

t Same in Hiph,, but also to make to understand ; to teach.

X In Hiph. to return, restore; in Piel, to lead back, restore.

§ In pi. gidroth or g'deroth.

II He who fears (partcp).

178 Vcj^bs Ayin Vav. [ch. ii.

(484) ''tryi:^^ "lib*? D^'^n nipD ddh rviMrs s : D^t^^ j^^n

'"':>• T A"- 'j: ttv a- |T\: ji

:nDiD D^b^D3 /I'pii^i 131"^ vnn Dn:i? n^Dn 9 :jt)d

J ;"T- I T J"T : \" ATT 'j»T • •VJV

j49 ^3 D^n"? i'r)i< D^^Dj^n U'^'mb^ d'^i'? dh'pi iin!?

T - : • <• ; I T * : • - : at- : a-.- t : v- :

V ;t" I !• V V •: 'IT " <"\\" •: •- : I

' iv : : - •: ' av— .|- jt : ••• j mt: • :

TTiwb p"n-)m n^n no^s TS^i n1tr^* nit:^ iDi^h 13

JTT : \ ; T- J"T > V •• < T J V —

'V'l'm^ N-im brvixn nr\B wrj\:^ nTi:^i ^nt:^^^ ^3:11 ni^iDH p)D^^rn^^^ ddti -inp n:)i:^D noDi 14

(• t V I 'v : a't vv • -:

h) \. \ will restore this silver. 2. We will place thy strong- holds for destruction. 3. Who founded the earth ? who esta- blished the heavens? 4. Shall men be established by wickedness? 5. They will assuredly return. 6. Return, my son : return, my daughter. 7. Do not set on bread for my brethren by them- selves. 8. Restore the money that-was-returned in your sacks. 9. Dust thou art, and unto dust shalt thou return. 10. And God shall be with you, and bring you back {Hiph.) to the land of your fathers.

Chap. XI. §7. Verbs Ayin Yod.

E. g. 1''^, to discern. Paradigm : see Appendix E, p. 25.

Short Paradigms.

485

iKal

2 Niphal

1 Per/.	2 Inf. cstr.	3 Imperat.	4 Tmperf.
fban	bin	bin	yabhin
(bin
nabhon	hibbon	hibbon	yibbon

5 Partcp. ban

nabhon

Past Partcp. of Kal, bun.

§ 7.] Verbs Ay in Yod. 179

Imperf. apoc. yabhen ; Imperf. c. Vav conv. vayyabhen, (485)

Injin. absol. Kal, bon ; Niph. hibbon.

Normal Forms. f Per/. ban ba'nah ba'nta 486

Kal I Imperat. bin bi'ni

\jmperf. yabhin tabhi'ni t'bhinenah.

a) These verbs have the same structure as verbs 487 Ayin Vav, and their ^ is treated in the same manner as the 1 of that class : e. g. Perf, Kal shath (for shavath), he has set; Injin. shith; Infin. absol. shoth [for shay 6th) ; Imperat, shith ; Imperf. ya-shith ; Jussive, yasheth, with Vav conv, vayya'sheth.

b) But the Perf. Kal has, in several verbs, still a second set of forms, which resemble a HipMl

with the characteristic H elided : e. g. ^niJ^^

(similar to ''JliTIin) ; also ilJ^j -^^^'^^j thou con- tendest ; also i^Il"].

c) Often also complete Hiphil forms occur: e. g. Perf Vnn, DJl'irarT; Infin. Tan (also r?) Imperat, ]Iin (also ^3) ; Partcp. ]^I1D (also ]2) so likewise nn? (also TS) ; D^l^D (also XiV) Y^!^lp, glittering; also in Perf, Y^.

d) Moreover, as Passive w^e find a few times Hoph, Imperf. Iti^^^, from "^p, to sing-, ^p^'^, from

IVf, to set.

These Hiphil forms may easily be traced to verbs "j^, and 488 possibly, in part, belong to that class. The same may be said of Niphal, \)22 ; PHel, pi^l; and Hithpael, ]^'):ir)ri (as if from

V)^)' These verbs are in every respect closely related to verbs

')^. Hence it is that we find several verbs used promiscuously. It If ,

as 'S^ and '»^, and with the same meaning in both forms, as ]v

180 Verbs Ay in Yod. [ch. ii.

(488) {denom. from ^v), to spend the night : Infin. also ]^7; Q>"ti^, to

place J Infin. also QV^ ; Imperf. U"^'^*^ ; once U^t^*^. In other

verbs one of the two is the predominant form, as ^''ji, to exult

L * '''

(/•IJ) only once, Prov. xxiii. 24). But few are exclusively '*^, as

i*'"!, /o contend; rS^^, to set; '^^'{^, /o rejoice.

ff

489 The old Grammarians referred all these forms to verbs *)^,

which it may, indeed, in some cases be right to do.

tf

490 The Pdm. App. E, p. 25, is placed by that of verbs *)J?, to exhibit the parallelism of the two classes. The omitted con- jugations have the same form as in Pdm. App. E, p. 24.

491 The Imperf. apoc. is ]^'»; with retracted tone it takes the form ^7 21")^« So with Vav convers. "CiV^X and he placed;

^ VT V T-

] D'^1. «wc? he perceived.

492 As Partcp. act. Kal we find once ]7, spending the night

(Neh. xiii. 21) ; Fart. pass. D'''ti/ or U^t according to a various

reading (2 Sam. xiii. 32). //

493 Verbs t^'^ scarcely ever suffer their ^ to quiesce, and hence are irregular only as verbs with Ayin, guttural. Yet in the Perf. of the very common verb 7^^!^, to ask, the feebleness of the J^

reduces the a under it to (-), and in a closed syllable to (-)

and (— ), when the syllable is toneless, and no full vowel pre-

cedes the ^^ (just as in some verbs '♦B) ; so with suff. ?[7^^t^,

Jin^r^'pr^^, ^y\^i^t, 2 pi nrhi^ti also in mph. (i sam. i. 28).

Vocabulary (exclusively ^y). Of this kind are :

494 To understand, \^3,. To exult, '^^i). To pass the night, ]>7. To contend, plead, ^'»")-

To smell, nH.

To put, set, place, D''ti^«

To set, put, JV]^-

§?•]

Ve7^bs Ay in Yod,

181

Exercise 45.

r : - i- T • • : at t j«-: i -v

•. ^T'?^^^D -T'L^pn ^-^:)^^ nan'? y^p^ r^J^ n'^D^in 2

|TT-:i- -'t- ;t:1t at;- ' ''j — a* T tt;-

isnn nti'n^ Dl^^ n*? 4 : D-in Dni<"Dir nnn '?^^ 3

.A : - a" ~ : TTV J" IT • JTT • J' T ~

5) 1 . Plead with * your mother, plead : for she (is) not my wife, nor (am) I her husband. 2. Joseph washed his face and went out t and said, set on bread. 3. I will make % your cities a wilderness, and bring your sanctuaries to desolation, and will not smell § your sweet odours ||.

Chap. XI. § 8. Verbs Lamed Aleph. E. g. J^iJD> to find. Paradigm : see Appendix E, p. 26.

T T

Short Paradigms,

	\Perf.	2 Inf. cstr.	3 Imperat.	4 Imperf.	5 Partcp.
iKal	matsa	m'tso	m'tsa	yimtsa	motse" 49S
2 Niph.	nimtsa	himmatse"	himmatse"	yimmatse"	nimtsa
3 Piel	mitstse"	matstse"	matstse"	y'matstse"	m'matstse"
4 Pual	miitstsa	mutstsa	(none)	y'mutstsa	m'mutstsa
5 Hiph.	himtsi"	hamtsi"	hamtse"	y'amtsi"	mamtsi"
6 Hoph.	humtsa	humtsa	(none)	yumtsa	mumtsa
7 Hithp.	hith- matstse"	hith- matstse"	hith- matstse"	yith- matstse	mith- matstse"

Past Partcp. of Kal, matsu".

Jussive {Hiph.) yamtse"; Imperf, c. suff. {Piel) y'matstseni, (Hiph.) yamtsieni.

\ To be rendered by ]J1^.

II i. e., the odour, your pleasant.

t K^'^V flwc? went out.

§ Hiphil.

R

182 Verbs Lamed Aleph. [ch. ii.

Normal Forms. (Per/. matsa ma'tseah matsathi

]lmperat. m'tsa m'tse'^nah *

Per/. nimtsa nimtse'^thah

Imperat. himmatse himmatse'''nah

(The conjugation in the other forms is analogous to these.)

497 1 Kal

2 Niphal

498 The ^^ is here, as in verbs i^^, treated partly as a soft guttural consonant [scoA'cely audible at the end of a word), partly as a quite inaudible (quiescent) letter.

499 In the forms that end with the third radical, the final syllable has the same vowel as the regular verb (e. g. Kp, ^^if?p, KI^D, i^'^^pn) ; but Pathakh before

K is lengthened into Kamets, viz. in the Perf., Lnperf., Imperat. Kal, in the Perf. Niphal, Pual, and Hophal. The ( t ) however is mutable, hence in the plural, ^i^^?;.

5C0 The Imperf. and Imperat. Kal have A after the analogy of verbs Lamed guttural.

501 Also before afFormatives beginning with a conso- nant {D, ^) ^^ is not heard {quiesces in the Perf. Kal,

in Kamets, /^^i^D ; in the Perf. of all the other con-

■^ T T T ^

jugations, in Tsere, Di^^t22; in the Imperat. and Imperf. of all the conjugations, in Segol, H^K^Q,

502 The use of Tsere and Segol in these forms arose, doubtless,

from the great resemblance between verbs ^^7 and H^ (comp. next section), and an approximation of the former to the latter.

503 Before aiformatives beginning with a vowel, i^ is a

consonant, and the form regular, as ^NliJD.

; IT

* a in Italics is quiescent.

f Before the suffixes chd, chem, chen, the i«i retains its character as a guttural, and takes (-:).

§ 8.] Verbs Lamed Aleph. 183

Remarks. Verbs middle E, like i^hf^ (male), to be full, retain Tsere in 504

the other persons of the Per/., as '*J^^^70. Instead of PTKiiQ

• •• T t:|t

is sometimes found the (Aramaean) form JlX*1p for J^^i"^p, she names.

The Partcp.fem. is commonly, by contraction, nj«^2ib» seld. 505 J^^^2ib, and defectively written J^Tt"^ (from i^)^'^).

The i^ sometimes falls away, as in >n^Q, Tl'pD- Niph. 506

• T T • •• T

DDQZD:, ye are defied j Hiph. "•lOnH.

Vocabulary. To call, Kip. kara.

T X

To hate, l^^lV, sane". To be full, K^D, male".

To drink (to excess), i^^D.

T T

5aba. Fear, ^^^'^^ y'reah; constr.

Treasure-house, ")iii>^, otsar 507 (pi. -6th).

To violate, injure, DDHj kba-

Rag, J^np, ke'rar (karajl^, to

tear). Therefore, ]3"^V» i^al-cen. To defile, J^QtO, tame".

ni^y (<^)> yare", to fear. ! rj,^ assemble (in troops), ^^2:i.

~ 1 * T T

A path, ni^jni n'thibhah tsaba.

(nathabh). ' . [ To sin, iiDPT, kha/a.

Exercise 46.

0) :nnn ^^'? mn> jisti nv^ iK:ii:^"''3 nn;n 1 508

* |TT J T : i~ '.". "AT :jt |- V

at': • ^T : T I -: -itt: • a"-: t;- t

'bik ^^'ipT K-)p^^ D^i:^^^^ DD^'^i^ 4 : n'pp ir^ri nj^iDJii j-iin''ri: ^im "^^^^^ npii: nii^n 5 : Dl^? ^^:j3

r2

184 Verbs Lamed Aleph. [ch.ii.

(508) ^^^^ib 6 : K^Di^ Dn''n^^i^') t:^^ '•nni^ b'nyrh : zob^d -^3 'w'^^^ vdn ''Xiom :mn^D r<:n p3-i D'''^n ^^i^D

T A ;- i" * : I > |T :i" T ' V;t- a-- jtT

^b^yiBt r"''S'nb2 ^^n"':'^^* z :mo ^lanj^ "^'i^i-m

v: I : -rtT •• : I : r : - vit -:jt -: - :

|T ^* : ~ • t': a"t' •• :v a" i* it jt t

:''jiK3l:; nptr nni<-'73 ^mw by^ n^p3-^3 1 ir'^ir s

• |"T 'VjV -V T • : AT • J .. Ij. X '<•• -

'av :'t a- •• V : -v 'vT-:!-; • <;t • •.•:

T—-\. ' VT-: - :• V :i T !•• : -j-r i: ••• vt

I DDT ^h^t ' Y^vr'Mvrh ^^tdii n^n DVji^^n ni;?'?

a • - ••< — I" ' ' J": -T T i: ^ • i;

: |T jv-; : J- ;- : ••• a ; a- ».••: ••• :

I" V I -v.-

6) 1. I have hated knowledge •[[. 2. Who hates knowledge. 3. Thou shalt not hate thy brother. 4. The sacks are filled with silver. 5. Thieves, being found, shall return seven-fold. 6. Understanding cries-aloud, and Wisdom gives-forth her voice, 7. To them will we cry, 8. Shall I not cry-aloud, and give forth my voice? Q. Who will fill my treasures ? 10. They who find me will find life, II. They shall assuredly find life. 12. Thou shalt not hate those- who-hate thee.

* Be not thou (ne sis) : from hayah.

f * Those who squander their own body,' i, e., voluptuous profligates (Gesenius, Maurer). Others (as Rosenmiiller) trans- late it in the same sense as the English Bible : riotous eaters of Jlesh.

X (Of) every kind (Maurer).

§ Have come; J>^i3> ^^ come,

II (Of the women) assembling.

IT -)D^D '^nii^'V (Prov. V. 12).

§9.]

Verbs Lamed He.

18i

Chap. XI. § 9. Verbs Lamed He,

E. g. n'^ili galah, to reveal. Paradigm : see Appendix E, ^^ [pp. 28, 29.

Short Paradigms.

5 Partcp.

g61eh nigleh m'galleh m^gulleh mag] eh mogleh mithgalleh Past Partcp. of Kal, galui.

Infin. absol. (Kal) galoh ; (Niph.) nigloh; (Piel) galloh; (Pual) guim ; ( Hiph.) hagleh; {Hop h. ) hogleh ; {Hit hp. ) hith- gall5h.

Imperf. apoc. (Kal) yigel ; {Niph.) yiggal ; (Piel) y'gal ; {Hip h.) ye' gel; {Hithp. ) yiihga].

	I Per/.	2 Inf. cslr.	3 Tmperat.	4 Imperf.
1 Kal	galah	g'loth	g'le-h •	yigleh
2 Niph.	niglah	higgaloth	higgaleh	yiggaleh
3 Piel	gillah	galloth	gall eh	y'galleh
4 Pual	giillah	giilloth	(none)	y'giilleh
5 Hiph.	higlah	hagloth	hagleh	yagleh
6 Hoph.	hoglah	hogloth	(none)	yogleh
7 Hithp.	hithgallah	hithgalloth	hithgalleh	yithgalleh

509

Normal Forms.

C Perf galah gaPthah galithi Kal < Imperat. g'leh g'li g'lenah

[imperf. yigleh tigli tiglenah

galA

510

rr

These verbs, like verbs Pe Yod (^3), embrace two 511

classes, originally distinct, viz. v and T? ; but in Hebrew the original ^ and 1 have passed over into a feeble H, in all the forms which end with the third radical. All, however, except a few forms, are

originally v ; so that the two classes are less promi-

nently distinguished than verbs IS and ^3.

Wholly different are those verbs whose third radical is a 512

R 3

186 Verbs Lamed He. [ch. ii.

(512) consonantal "t^] (with Mappik: e. g. rTIlil)* which are inflected throughout like verbs Lamed guttural *.

513 The grammatical structure of these verbs (see Pdm. App. E, p. 28) is as follows :

For the forms that end with the third radical,

All the Perfects end in ah. All the Imperfects and Participles Active, in eh. All Imperatives, in eh.

The Infin. absol. (except in Hiph. and Hoph.), in oh,

514 At the end of the Partcp. Pass, of Kal the original ^ appears, "^r?^, galui, as also in some derivatives.

515 The Infin. constr. has always i\ie feminine form in D : hence in Kal, Hw^, g'loth ; in Piel, rxb^, gal- loth, &c.

516 Before the afformatives beginning with a conso- nant (i1, y), the original ^ remains, but not as a consonant : it would properly form with the a the diphthong ai ; but this diphthong in the Perf. is first contracted into e {^-^), and then further attenuated

into I, but in the Imperf. and Imperat. it is changed into the obtuse ^__ (e). Thus in Perf. Piel, from

rv^'^ (after W^iP) we get first -H^^pll, and then, by

attenuating the e into i, Jlvil ; in the Imperf, Piel,

"nyh^r). in the Passives the e is always retained;

in the Actives of the derived conjugations, and in the Reflexives, both e and ^ are used alike (see 527, 531) ; on the contrary, in Kal (the most common species) we find only i. Accordingly we have in the

Perfect Kal i, as ivb^ ;

//, * It is certain, however, that some verbs H? originated in verbs with final Hj this letter having lost its original strong and guttural sound, and become softened to a feeble ,"f-

§9.] Verbs Lamed He. 187

Perfects of the other active conjugations (in- (516) eluding the reflexive Hithp.) e and i promis- cuously, as /I v2l and JH v^ j

Perfects of the Passives only e, as r\h^ ;

Imperfects and Imperatives always ^__ (e), as

Before the afformatives beginning with a vowel 517 [li, I, ah), the Yocl with the foregoing vowel usually falls away p7D =z V/il, &c.] ; but it is retained in

ancient full forms, particularly in pause, as IvJ)) (see 524, 530). Before svffixes also it falls away, as ^/-^ (see 539).

The Yod disappears also in 3 Perf. sing, fern., 518 where J1_ is appended as feminine ending, as Jl7i).

But this ancient form is become rare (see 520), and, as if this mark of the gender were not sufficiently distinct, a second feminine ending n_ is appended

so as to form r\rO^. So in all conjugations : e. g.

Hiph. rO^T], common form ilJl/^n, in pause T\royn-

The formation of the shortened Imperf, which 519 occurs in this class of verbs in all the conjugations, is strongly marked, consisting in the casting away {apocope) of the n_, by which still other changes

are occasioned in the form (see 522, 526, 528, 533). The shortened Imperative is also formed by apocope

of the n^ (see 529, 534).

Remarks.

I. Kdl.'] For the 3rd Perf. fern, the older and simpler form 520

Jl/D. from Jlvi). is almost entirely banished from common use.

TT "-i^.

But with sirffixes it is always used, see 539.

a) The Infin. absol. has also the form iX'^, videndo. 521

188 Verbs Lamed He. [ch. ii.

(521) i) As the Injin. constr. occurs also, though seldom, Hli^JiJ' nj^"1, as well as the feminine form ^1^i")> io see.

: T-;|-

522 1^^ The apocope of the Imperf. occasions in Kal the fol- lowing changes :

a) The first stem-letter most commonly receives the helping- vowel Segol, or, when the middle radical is a guttural,

Pathakh: e. g. by^ for b^'^i ]2H and he built j y^D^ let

him lookf for ^t^*.

b) The Khirik of the preformative is also sometimes lengthened into Tsere (because it is now in an open syllable), as i^n\ let him see (fr. n^^^)'

T T

c) The helping-vowel is sometimes omitted : e. g. 3,]^^) , D^^X "^yy The verb Hi^"! has the two forms' i^y and J^'T^T, the latter with Pathakh on account of the Resh.

d) Examples of verbs which are Pe guttural as well as Lamed He: ]i!V% and he made, from TtDV> ]V^')' and he answered,

■ T T — — —

from njy- Sometimes the punctuation of the first syl- lable is not affected by the guttural, as in in^l, ^IT'I, IH'' (with Dagesh lens in second radical), let him rejoice.

e) The verbs H^n, to be, and HTf. io live, which would I properly form in the Imperf. apoc. TT''* TT', change these

forms to \1>, TT'' (y'hi, y'khi), because the Foe? prefers a vowel before it in which it may quiesce.

523 The full forms without the apocope of Jl— sometimes occur

even after Vav conv., especially in the 1st person and in the later books : e. g. ^N"^^^^. and I saw, twenty times, but not in

the Pentateuch, Jl^l?''')? and he made, four times.

524 The original > is sometimes retained before the afformatives beginning with a vowel (cf. 522, above), especially in and before the Pause, and before the full plural ending (un) ]!)— , or where for any reason an emphasis rests upon the word. Per/. VVTlf

> ATT

they took refuge; Imperat. -VJ^^, ask ye; Imperf. ]V2n\ they increase, more frequently like ^V-TI^'', ^^^^ drink (cf. 530).

§9.] Verbs Lamed He. 189

The Partcp. act. has also a/em. of the form rT'Si^i* spying; 525

T •

rr^liD, fruitful; in the Plur. hke /^Vjli^^. The Partcp. pass. is sometimes without *», as -Yi^J^ for ''•Vli^^, m«c?e, !)22i-

T X T

It is but very seldom that the second syllable is defectively written.

II. Niphal.'] The apocope of the Imperf. occasions here no 526 further changes (7^)'' from 11721"'); yet in one verb j) guttural

T • V T •

we find a form with ( — ) shortened to (-^), viz. PID'' (for nD**). Similar in Piel, H^Jl (from Tll^D), and in Hithpael,

III. Piel, Pual, and Hithpael.'] In the Per/". Pie?, the second 52/ syllable has Khirik instead of the diphthongal e in the greater number of examples, which is therefore adopted in the Paradigm. Before suffixes Khirik is always employed, except in Pual, which always has Tsere C-^).

The Imperf. loses, after the apocope, the strong Dagesh of 528 the second radical ; hence Piel, *\''^'^^ ; Hithpael, 721/T^I. Less

frequently is the Pathakh then lengthened into Kamets, as ^JV), IK/lMcf. 526). ^'-

In Piel and Hithpael are found also apocopated forms of the 529 Imperat., as DJ for JlD^i P^ove ! ^njlllj feign thyself sick.

Examples of Yod retained in cases where more commonly it 530 is omitted : Imperf. ''i^''D'7J^. wi// ye liken me; •1D-VDD''. they

cover them.

IV. Hiphil and Hophal.'] In the Perf. Hiph. the forms 531

/T»7j|n and Jlv^H are about equally common ; before suffixes T •• : • ■•■•:•

the latter is used, as somewhat the shorter. In Hophal always ^-^ .

a) The Tsere of the Infin. absol. Hiph. is the regular vowel 532 (as in blDpn) ; to this the Infn. absol. Hoph. conforms, as

in n^srr.

b) The verb nil"1> to be much, has three forms of the /nfin. :

T T

n^^ilj much (used adverbially) ; n3,"in> used when the Infill, is pleonastic ; jn*)3,"in. the Injin. constr.

190 Verbs Lamed He, [ch. ii.

533 The Imperf. apoc. has either the form '^*)^ J^H)\ pti^'^l. or (with a helping-vowel) 7JJ"», for which, however, is invariably substituted the form ^^i, as 7^"], "IS)'"). Examples with gut- turals : 7"^^), 7j^i^1, &c., which can be distinguished from the Imperf. Kal only by the signification.

534 The Imperat. apoc. has invariably the helping- vowel Segol or Pathakh,3is y]h for ^TiJ], H^IH; C]nn for t]-in, il^irji

b^h for nb^n.

535 The Imperf. with Foe? retained occurs only in ]V)lJr). from

TT

(Additional Remarks.)

536 V. In the Aramaean, where, as before remarked, the verbs

i^7 and Hv flow into one another, both classes terminate, in the Imperf and Partcp. of all the conjugations, without dis- tinction, in ^^_ or >_. . As imitations of this mode of forma- tion we are to regard those forms of the Infin , Imperat., and Imperf in Tl-^> more seldom J^.^ and >— -, which are found in

Hebrew also, especially in the later writers and the poets. Infn. HTl. to be; iliiy, opprimendo; n^H)!!- Imperat. J^in,

be thou. Imperf n]'nr\'b^ ; KIJ^ b^, follow not; tl'^^'bi^^ do not *.

537 The Yod is found even at the end of the word (which is also

a Syriasm) in *^bTin, ""JT/ni, and hence in the Plur. VODH. • v:iv : • - • : •

538 In three verbs is found the unfrequent conjugation Pilel, or its reflexive, where the third radical, which the conjugatioA requires to be doubled, appears under the form n*) ; viz. ^')^^J,

contracted HlJ^i. fo be beautiful, from TM^2 ', D'^inZOD, the T T T T — : - :

archers: but especially nni^j to bow, Pilel "nMlll), hence the

* The Jussive signification in these examples is the reason that they have Tsere like the Imperat. But this will not apply to all other cases ; and, besides, the reading in many instances is doubtful between {-^) and (^. See Gen. xxvi. 29; Lev.

xviii. 7. Jos. vii. 9; ix. 24. Dan. i. 13. Ez. v. 12.

§ 9.] Ve7^bs Lamed He, 191

reflexive nini^ti^n* to ^ow oneself, to prostrate oneself, 2 pers. (538) /!"»_ and /iV , Imperf mnrit^), apoc. ^nP>p^'), for in^ll^JI (aDalogous with >n^ for \"1'').

Before suffixes the H final, with the preceding vowel, falls 539

away, as ''iJt;, he answered me, ?TJ^, DJ^; Imperf. ^i^^ •T-: ':iT TT ':--

^n^y ; Hip/i. ?T7^rT- Very seldom >_ takes the place of the final n _ or H-j as in ^D*DD^ ^^ will cover them; **y^3il, smite me. The 3 Perf.fem. always takes before siiff. the older form rh-i (see 518), yet with a short a, as in the regular verb : e, g.

T T

•lil^D for in/l^S ; in poMse ^^Pit;)^-

... . . |TT

To trust (in), (1) nDPT, kha-

sah (b'). To build, 7]23., banah.

T T

To stretch out, niO^> nafah.

T T

To multiply, nil1» rabhah.

T T

To feed, r\^'^, raVah.

T T

To babble, nZOIl> ba/ah (com p.

T T

jSarroXoyav and blaterare). To befall, HJi^ (in Pual) anah.

To see, HKI. raah. 540

T T

Piercings, /li")[p"TD, mad-

k'roth (dakar). Sword, ^ir\> khe'rebh. The world, 73^5 tebhel, jjoe^ic

(= r) oiKovjjLkvr}, yabhal). Embryo ; unformed substance,

D/i)> golem (galam, glome-

ravit).

Exercise 47.

mt "^^ iB^DVi TQ"* inn^ >2"^3 3 : n^i:^pQ ]^^^'l n^

ay-iDn^ D^'p^NT D-iii -i:;"!^ pn:: '•ns)!:; 4 : d^- n

A'-r~'. \ : "AT j'; : - : •.• v j- it

192 Verhs Lamed He. [ch. u. § 9.

(541) :;^"i ^k'pd u^v^'y\ p^*"'?^ p^'^ii':' n:)hi^"^^ 6 :i^3-iQ

V / IT ; JT • T : VAT T ' J av\ : I I" ;-

T |- IT : •• •• r • 'at - J I - :vv

T J- •• I • ;v :- • A- ; -; a: i ' "v. • • t

•iKT I ^D^D 10 : ubtry^ niDin n^inr^ ]i'':i-n^^ n:)i^"ii

|VT JT V V; A T ••, ;'T I" T • \T\ .: • " : ' V "

:KD3 y\y mi^i ^3 vt'\ rtivv do'pd nayir) n

I" • ' ;• 'tt;- /• - AV J-; ■ r '.<■. j--; i

6) 1. What God shall command, that thou shalt do. 2. As they have done, so do ye. 3. The waters increased greatly over the earth, and all the hills were covered which were under heaven. 4. Cow and bear shall feed together; lion and ox shall lie down together. 5. Great are the things which my eyes have seen. 6. Ye shall not build houses. 7- Did not my father build this house ? 8. Did I not build the house ? 9. In the building-of the city.

542 Write down the forms :

I was.	I will be.	Be thou.	To be.
Thou wast.	Thou (m.) wilt be.	Be thou (/.).	In-being
Thou (/.) wast.	Thou (/.) wilt be.	Be you.
He will be.	He will be.	Be you (/.).
She was.	She will be.

* Most recent interpreters translate the latter clause thus : the days [sc. of my life] all of them were predetermined, and (=when) not one of them [yet was]. So Maurer, De Wette, Hengstenberg. CuUam refers, by anticipation, to * days.^

CH. 12.]

Suffixes of the Verb,

193

Chap. XII. Suffixes of the Verb,

The suffixes appended to the verb express the ac- 54 3 cusative oi the personal pronoun. They are:

2 thee (f.)

3 him 3 her

Singular.

Forms proper for the Perfect Tense.

Person.

1 me (c.)

2 thee (m.) ?[, in pause "TJ — or ^ —

• I- •

V

v-%

j)n — . . 1 — n — . . n — n-

Forms proper for 544 ^Ae Imperfect.

•I"

?[_ or nj-

■^.7- °^ ''^-

^n — V

I"

n-

T IV

Plural.

1 us (c.) ?):_ U

IT

2 yoM (m.) DD—

|V

2 yoM (f.) p_

3 them (m.) D — D_, poeticb ^Q —

|T - IT

3 them (f.) 1_ 1_

1J-

I" DD-

|V

D— D— ji>oc'»ce ID—

Affixes of the Imperfect, when preceded by an Epenthetic Nun,

Singular.

1 me (c.) 12— >i]_ for '•^JJ—

12-

• \-

545

2 thee (m.) ■!_ HD ^J—

t' |v t IV ': IV

3 him 3 her

.•):_ for ^^T^

I" :

Hi} — n:i_

TjV t:|V

194

Suffixes of the Verb.

[CH. 12.

546

547

Perfect with Suffixes.

As a general rule,

a) the forms that end in a consonant, take the suf- fixes that begin with a vowel (called a vowel- of- union) ;

b) the forms that end in a vowel, take the suffixes that begin with a consonant.

c) The vowel-of-union for the Perfect is a (or ^) .

^) >} }}

Whatever changes the afformatives undergo, are made for the purpose of suiting them to receive the pronominal suffixes.

takes I for

I'nperfectl Imperative J '

a) The 3rd sing. fern.

b) 2nd sing, f em. 2nd plur. masc.

ath or ath ti tu

ah

t

tern'

548 Here observe, (1) the 2nd sing. fern, (which is derived from an old form atii) becomes identical in form with the \st pers. sing., and is only to be distinguished from it by the context ; (2) of the 2nd plur. fern, no instance is found with suffixes.

549 [The 3rd sing. fern, of the Perfect (1) draws the tone to itself, except with chem, chen, and then takes the forms that make a syllable without a union-vowel ; (2) with the other suffixes, it takes a union-vowel, but draws back the tone to the penult, so that they appear with shortened vowels.]

View of the Suffixes to the Verb {E.). I. To THE Perfect. transit. Kal

Verb :		nrii) i
SufF. : sing. 3 m.		1 T T :
	him	or
— f .	her

3 f. sing, or

CH. 12.]

Suffixes of the Verb,

2 m.

— f . \.

pi. 3 m

— f . 2 m.

— f . 1.

thee

thee

me

them

them

you

you

ns

l^i^l?

|T

r T :

e from intrans. Kal in the same way.

1) innj^, 2) TT:l^^^, s) D:)2ni^ ;

e from the other forms, as Piel : 1) Uri3, 2, 3) TT2n3, ^D-12.

Suflf. : sing.1 3 m. /

— f . 2 m.

— f . 1.

pL 3 m.

— f. 2 m.

— f . 1.

him

her

thee

thee

me

them

them

you

you

us

2 m. sing, or

T ; ~ ;

(none) (none)

(none) (none)

2 f . & 1 sing, or

Just so the sufF. to the Persons of all Verbal-stems :

T : - • I- : - •

&c.

]95

"ITT :

- iT T :

: I- T : So

: I- : •

3 pi.

^2ri3

(none)

DDinrii)

In the same way 1st and 2nd pers. plur.

s2

196

Suffixes of the Verb. II. To THE Imperfect.

[CH. 12.

551 transit. Kal, 3 sing. m.	3 pi. m.	Kal Imperat. sg. m.
Verb:	2r\y	^:ip\y	n'np	vry^
Suflf. : sing.l 3 m. /	1" : : •	•imir^D^ If	iv : T	^ry:f!}yhx
— f .	r^:ir\y	nj)a;^3^	naji3	r\v^t
	T 1 V : : •	T 1 : : •	T|V : T	T ivT :
	T 1 V • • •
	r^2rsy T • * •		T • T
2 m.	?fnr^i>2	^^0?:
— f .	"^5^??!	•^•lajji?;
1.	'P?.^?'	• ■ • • •
pi. 3 m.	Dnrib)	D-ianb;	• 1 •• • -J-
— f.	]nra)		•• T	•• T •
2 m.	D3njH5>3 V : T : •	uy\2r\y	ph3	ly?^
~ f .	pnrip;	1" : : •
1.	1" : : •	•IMJJ^P^	1 •• • T	1 "T •
		The suffixes	to the other verbal
		pers. in	the same w	'ay.

a in the last syllable, T\T ■ 1. ^H^n^; 2. '^f^im^

3. D5;l^;l^ ypti^."': 2:?y5;Di^>; *3. DpyiDtf^w

in the last syllable, 2r)3> : i. iin^riD^ '2.'?Tiir)D\ .. -. I" : -: i' ; I"-:

* So also to all persons ending in the 3rd radical : 3^) Ji^,

t So also to -l^in^ri 2 plur. m. and 3 a. 2 plur. f., and to ••^/^Dri 2 sing. f. ; instead of which V^J^D/l ^ is also possible. \ To the f. sing, and to the plur. like to the Imperf.

CH. 12.] Suffixes of the Verb, 197

^2^';, "^nnj^ 3. DonriDi, DDnra^ rh^]- (551)

'i-'^rfi^'^'^l 3. DDn'^lt^V— * or u in the last sy\-

\^h\Q,' y^rsy, Hiph.': I. i\nyr\y; 2. '?Tn''nD'';

r :- I" • ;- 1' : 1- : -

3. DDQ^riD'': withgutt. rry>r2t\ DDV^DIi^^

Exercise 48.

•>j;^S)-'.3 3 r'-j-in^ ''jiK^L^nDi W?2 '':)D:n3 nhnn 2

r]f2i^'P 6 : ''D^^ ''Jjian"' ^^tD^a") 'rhb'n ]W3r]'n 5 >:l^*ro^;^ 7 :^:riin hddh Dhcn-i n^nron rc^^sn

•J" : - : ■ 1" ' I 'T ; T \ T : a ■•. ~ t : j-t

]Vir^ •'jv^Qti^ri 8 :]>2bi^ :h'^'D^ "'Jdidji "intoj^i n'.r.^n •'j^LonQ ?T^:3D -inon 9 trT-s-i niD:^;^ m'^i^ nnot^i

AT T -:i" ' VTV J" ; - T |- • ; T -; T : •• T AT ; ' :

nm ynbi^ ^y^^"^:l iin:D n"? 10 -.ririD 'nh^v'bD')

- }'. A- v: j-t: TV J" I": j- |-: t:

» . .'t - ;: 'avt : • -t" • : - - r . • : j*— t

nnn: nni "^^r^^ iii:;ii; ^-j n2''2}n 12 :>-3aD npn'^N

jT • : - >■: 'a-: • j : -v. t j- t -iv • o-*

•^ybi^ D'XLsm TD"Ti yv^ii ma^^< 13 :''JDddji p-in ^ji;?^i:^n \"i'7i^ D^'i^^i^l dotd '':i':'''iin h :!)aii:^^

aTT v: VAT ••-;: - ':•):■ — : 'iv't:« • :

in3D ]i)"i:T iii:2 nV^:^'' n^DDnn t'i^ 16 ••mnsD''

; • : - T ; • ; at j ; \ I ~^ J • t | v ; - :

-s'? "^Tii^ '\yb'\r\\ ^r^v'^) nr^S)'- D::2n ^>k 17 : p]^^^^

'vjv: • I : A"" av-: tt\. j- i -

njp^HT ")bii iD^i:; i:i^rab2 nnit^p nbM^ is : nizo

t';v ;- t V;" -A- V : jr '; V vv I

s 3

198 Suffixes of the Verb, [ch. 12.

(552) niDHD^ '^^^ "T'i^v'? ini ''^^ rti'^rb b'^ \)^v 19 -.Ji-iaD ^W^^ /I'^J^ ^2^1 D^o^n nn'^ :i;Qti:^') ^^ti^ ion 20

'|vt: - t;- j- 'av: • ; s" '. '. ' \' -tv |»

' -: I" : ~|TT ■» •■ I : a* • t ':v • : j- t <-;

:Tny^^ niiii DHDJ^ n^^^^n'? hd'a hdn ioi:^p

' |v ; I : vv; >• T-: i« t; avv; a": • : : A

^) Translate into Hebrew-

Thou hast put him (1, 1, v).

Thou (/.) hast deceived me.

She instructed him.

She inchned (1, 5, n, h) him.

Thou hast despised me.

Thou (/.) hast given him.

They have forsaken me.

I have cursed her.

Give him.

Take him.

He will pursue him.

They shall find her.

They shall call-upon me.

To despise them.

When he fled (Say : in Ms- flying).

When thou buildest (Say: in thy building).

When he prepared (Say: in his preparing).

To deceive me.

When he was circumcised (Say : in his being circum- cised).

They that do {p.) this.

His slain.

They that call-upon him.

DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, &c.

(Literally, in Hebrew)

1. a) This boy. The boy the this. "I , ,^ b) The good boy. The boy the good./ ' ^^•

2. a) The boy is small.

The boys are small.

In other instances also the copula ('is,' *are') is omitted. There the sun = there is the sun.

The boy he small. ^ ^-la The boys they small. J

3. o) He that falls. 1 All these English forms may be

He that has fallen. ,- translated by one participle.

He that will fall. J nophel, 138.

b) He who teaches. The teaching [person] ; as 6

^dd(jKU)v in Greek.

c) Tlie partcp. is often used as a predicate * to denote (usually) the Present Tense.

4. a) Sweeter than honey. Sweet above {from, in com-

parison of \= prae]) honey (P).

b) The tallest of the people. The-tall [*>one] from the people

(]p. D, Q; sometimes ^),

196.

c) Very good. /obh m'od (l^^p ^IJO).

5. Dative Relations.] Usually 7, sometimes 7^^, prefixed

to, and cohering with, the noun.

* Usually \\\e present tense of a verb. Jehovah (°is) knowing =^ Jehovah kriows.

200 Differences of Idiom, ^c,

6. Ace. usually JIJ^ or "JIN^, 175 a.

The Ace. may denote —

a) The place to which, ace. without preposition ; some- times 7^^ prefixed.

b) The place at which may be in ace. without a prepo- sition, 175, c.

c) The person to whom motion is directed, is usually ex- pressed by 7^^ prefixed,

175, e.

7. (Ace. continued). The Ace. may also denote —

a) The time when.

b) The time how long.

c) ^e\dX\oxi^oi space {how wide y deep, &e.).

d) The relations denoted in English by as to, in respect of, according to; in.

8. Ablative Relations,]

«) ]12, from (176) ; also =.some of.

b) Often 3. = *^> «^ with.

9. Genitive Relations.]

a) Usually expressed by placing the preceding (i. e. the governing) noun in the construct state.

b) Sometimes by 7, ef. 177.

c) Gen. of possession :

Her father's flock. The flock which to-her-father

[i. e. was or is']. {'To* to be expressed by 7), 178.

10. Numerals.] Seven sons, cf. 207.

11. Relative.]

a) Whose. Who— to him V. 2^5

Who — to her I

b) All that I have. All which to me.

I^T nT» like our ' that,^ is sometimes used as a relative.

12. Where. Which — there. \oaq Whence. Which — thence.]

Differences of Idiom, ^c. 201

13. a) From when, from where, as in English.

b) He has fallen into the pit he made (= which he made) : as

in English.

c) At the time he did it : as in English.

14. The orphan and one who The orphan and there is no has no helper. helper to him, 256.

15- "I^N (257, end^ =, virtually, the copula (in any tense) with a

negative. Joseph was not in the pit. en-Y6seph babbor.

16. ti^^=, virtually, the copula, in any tense. It is in my power. yesh-Ve\ yadi,

17. Many verbs are in Hebrew followed by an accusative, where

we must use a preposition.

18. Many verbs are in Hebrew followed {always or sometimes) by

a preposition, where we should use the ace. only in English.

To seek wisdom. bikkesh l' . . . [as we may say

* to seek after ' a thing].

To rebuke a man. gai^ar b' . . . [to find fault with

a man].

1 9. The infin. absolute is used —

1) as an intensive,

Thou shalt surely die. To die thou shalt die.

2) Sometimes after a finite verb it carries on the discourse

just as if it were a verb of the same tense.

Thou shalt weep and Thou shalt weep and to-mourn. mourn.

20. Meanings of the Perfect :

The Perfect denotes, A (used absolutely)

a) Past time, (1) as perfect, (2) as pluperfect.

b) The present, (1) as a condition or attribute already long continued and still existing (just like odi, novi, memini, in Lat.) : e. g. yadaJ^ti, I know J saneti, / hate. (2) A per- manent or habitual action : Happy the man who walks, &c. (halach).

c) The future, m protestations and as- surances ; the event being contem- plated as done (e. g. I give thee the field, &c.).

202 Diffey^ences of Idiom, ^c.

B (used relatively)

d) ■=. imperfect suhj. (e. g. we should iiave been or should be [essemus] as Sodom).

e) =:pluperf. subj. (e. g. if he had not left, &c.).

/) =futurum exactum, just as with us 'when he has washed away;*' for 'when he shall have washed away.'

C (with Vav conv.)

g) =z future (aft. future, i. e. imperf.).

h) ^pres. subj. (aft. imperf. in this sense), lest he should put forth his hand, and take, &c.

«") := imperat. (aft. imperf.).

Jc) = for past or present time, as pre- ceding perf, or imperf. requires.

21. Meanings of the Imperfect : The Imperfect denotes, A (used absolutely)

a) The future.

b) The present {espec'mWy of permanent states and general truths).

B (used relatively)

c) as subjunct. after particles meaning that, that not, lest.

d) as optative.

e) as imperative, the place of which it always supplies in prohibitions.

f) as potential : = may, might ; can, could.

g) after az, then; te'rem, not yet ; b'te'rem, before.

h) it may denote customary and con- tinued action, and (like Lat. and French imperf.) of extended repre- sentation.

i) it sometimes denotes single actions, done and past, where the perfect might be expected. This applies to poetry ; the use resembles that of our present tense as employed in lively descriptions.

HEBREW AND ENGLISH INDEX.

;iJ<^ \xreg. father. [App. B.]

T

T^K to stray, wander, he lost. —

~ T

to perish (b and p of the per- son). Piel, to cause to stray, to disperse. — to cause to perish, to destroy. nUi^ to be willing, inclined, de-

T T

sirous (followed by infin. with or without )). "•i^hi poverty, misery.

^^^ to mourn (b» over). Hiph. to

— T

cause to mourn. Hithp. = Kal. ]!2i^ c. (mostly f.), « stone.

vhi^, D^^^ adj. pi. D'QTN (8,c)

T T

red. ySlt^ (3, a) master, lord. PI. n'six

lords; yi^n '2T« lord of the land. T1J«^ Niph. to become glorious.

~ T

"yi^ adj. (l,b) great, mighty.—

noble, excellent, rni'^ f. with suflf. inniN (13, a)

cloak, mantle. 3ni^ to love. Piel, partcp., a lover.

T^ll'nt^ f. infin. of the verb 3n« :

6- g. ^T D^Ti^ !^?n*i>^ to love

the name of the Lord. — subst.

love, beloved. — adv. delightfully.

T»^ (1, a) straitness, calamity,

destruction. nihi Root not used. Arab, to

TT

hoivl. ••ij^ wailing, inter] . wo/ alas! ho! (of threatening).

/''1^^ (1* a) a fool ^=. a wicked per- son. r\%^ f. sing. (13, a) folly J

sin, from obsol. 'na. 7*)^ (6, h) nothingness, falsehood,

V T

vanity. — wickedness, iniquity. — adversity, calamity.

1!iil^ (2,b) pi. nmi«, treasure.

T

ni<5 irreg. brother. [App. B. ]

r

"ini^ to stay, tarry.

~ T

"^^^^ prep, behind, after (with

• 3ufF. nn«, C3nri«, &c.). prep, of place, after, behind. — of time, after, after that. "lini^ (3j a) the hinder part; as

T

adv. backwards.

204 Hebrew and English Index,

y^^ to hate, io be an enemy; partcp. aiiw as subst. (7, b) ad-

fidelity.- — truth, as opposed to falsehood.

versary, enemy : f. nrix. TK (6, J) nothingness. — as an adv.

not, including the idea of the subst. verb to he (cf. '^) ; ttJ''N ]'« there is no man, "inie ]^« there was none interpreting. If a per- sonal pronoun is the subject of the proposition, the particle takes the verbal suffixes, '»2r« I am, or was not, shall not be, ¥jy», ^23'N, nsrw, &c. When fol- foUowed by the dative, 'b ]''« there is not to me, i e. / have not, Dnb ]^« they have not.

^>^ {I, a) man, Lat. vir. — hus- band.— man, opp. God, animals (homo). Before other nouns denotes the qualities of men; now "ttJ'^J a faithful man. — any one. — each,

nii^K f- (13, b) woman; female. — wife.

't^i^ only. — only, but. — just now. —

surely, certainly. 7^i^ to eat.

— T

n^rjb>J^ f- (11, b) a widow. D^^ f. (8, b) mother.

HDK (S- 10) /Ae/ore-flrm, cubitus,

prop, the mother df the arm, — a cubit ; rrasin rsnw/oMr by the cu- bit, i. e. four cubits. HDi^ f- irreg. a maid-servant.

[App. B.]

J^D^^ f- (foi* "li'?^) with suff. inps! firmness, stability. —faithfuhess,

*1D>i imperf. "in«', nox^i to say,

- T

declare, mostly followed by the words spoken, constr. with "?«• ) before the person to or of whom any thing is said ; rarely with an ace. 1t2ii (6, b) word, discourse.

D'tlPi'Oi^ f. (13, a) a sack or bag.

^]3^^ Kal not used (Arab, to meet;

T T

to be in good time). Piel, to cause to come, or happen. Pual, to befall. n'^iX f- (10) a ship.

r|^^ to breathe through the nose,

snort; to be angry (with 3). \)2i^ lo groan. Niph. to moan,

' -T

lament. Xy^y^ f- cnstr. np2S( a groaning,

'tt-; "'"

lamentation. '^Syt^ (see 'a5'i^) man. — the common

people. PI. D'ttJDX, cnstr. 'rpsf,

with suff. 'r3«, men; commonly

used for d^t^'-n the plural of tj'w.

TW^ f. irr. pi. D^uj: woman, fe-

T •

male. — wife. [App. B.] C]Di^ to collect, to gather.

"IDi^ to bind. — to put in bonds;

— T

partcp. "rc^ prisoner. ^"•Di^ (3, a) captive, prisoner.

• T

S]J^ (for F]3«=f]3><t) with suff. 'Esi

(8, d) no.se. — anger. Dual d^e«. the nostrils. — meton. face, coun- tenance.

Hebrew and English Index. n3i»i to hake.

T T

nii^ to go, to be on the way.

— T

mi^ c. (G,c)pl. ninT«. cnstr. and

with suff. nin")st ivay,road,path. — manner, mode. "^li^ (6, c) length, of time and

space, yij^ f. rarely m. (6, a) with the

art. yi.>jn, earth, land. "Tli^ to curse, execrate. Piel, to

205

curse. D^J^ to he or hecome guilty, to

— T

transgress. Hiph. to bring the consequences of sin upon any one. D^^< {4., c) guilt.

T r

"Ivi^K to go straight on.

— T

l^i^ happiness, blessedness ; only

in pi. cnstr. in the character of an interj. Mi^srt nic^ 0 the hap- piness of the man! =: blessed is the man. With suff. Tjn-i-N happy art thou ! in\rs, inTc:^^ for Tinrw, &c.

1^1 with suff. nD2 (6, a), hut in

pause '\yi a covering. — cloak, garment. '^n^ Niph. to he troubled, terri-

— T

fed. Piel, to terrify, confound. — to cause to hurry. Hiph. i. q. Piel. /^■^n^ f. 0. shining, whitish scurf,

sinking in the skin and having white hair.

J^*)^ to enter, come or go in (with

3, b«, ), also ace), t'ljl to despise, contemn. "li})^ to be ashamed. n3, to take as a prey, to spoil,

— T

plunder. V13, to try, prove, test.

~ T

in^, to prove. — to choose (with

~ T

acc. 3, )). niOH to babble J part. TtT3. an idle

T T

talker. nZO^I prop, to cling to, to rely

~ T

upon, trust, confide in (bsi, "??). ntOjl trust, confidence, security.

I**^? PH to distinguish, discern. —

to understand, y^jl (6,h) interval. — prep, between.

"C"!, ]Ui — fi, I'^ib — y^' between — and; sometimes also whither — or. 1"'^ prep. prop, cnstr. of ;;3 (6, h).

nJ''3, f- (10) understanding, dis-

cernment. 103. (1> a) the first-horn.

721 adv. not. — nothing.

••^^ want; only as adv. not, mth-

out. ^3, a son. See irr. nouns, App. B.

nJH to build.

T T

bV^ ^ord, possessor, owner. — hus- band. "IPH to consume, burn up. — in-

— T

trans, to burn. ^^2. to break. — to plunder.

- T

T

206

Hebreio and E7iglisli Index.

-^'T\plunder, unjust gain. — gain, V^^ll profit.

IpH (4, a) coll. oxen^ herd. "1p3. pi* ^^IP^ ^^^ dawn, morning. li^pS. Piel, to seek; with ace, to

seek after, with b; n;n>-nx tDipa to seek the Lord. ■^^ corn (separated from the

T

chaflf) ; ins to separate, i^^^ to create, form, make.

TT

")2. with suff. ^3 a son. "THIL hail.

TT

niB to flee; absol. or with"?, hvt

~T

{whither), ;n, nsin, ^25t? (from whom), nn« {after whom). /T>12 f. sing. (l,a) a covenant.

11^' to bend the knee, to kneel.

Niph. to be blessed. Piel, to praise, bless God. Hithp. to be blessed {i in, through). ^^^2, f. (6, a), dual D'3n3, knee.

HD")^ once naii. f. (1 l,c) a bless- T t:

")2 (n^l f.) chosen,beloved.-^ure,

clear; also ^wre morally. illi^B (13, c) terrour, confusion;

mostly followed by panim (of face).

:i.

^^^ to redeem, ransom, recover.

" T

23 (8, d) pi. D^s^, ni, a back. '7II3 ^0 6oMwc?, Zimi^.

7^^^ bound, limit, border. — ter- ritory. "lllil to be or become strong.

— T

"lUil (6j a) ^^^ = vir. — husband.

— warrior. 113;), "l*;aKl,b) adj. ^iron^r.

m^a-l f- {\0) strength. T :

:)i) (8, a) roo/.

T

''"Til (6, i) « kid.

7*721 ^0 Z»e or become great, to grow.

— to be great, exalted. "T7^ to wall, fence up.

nnH f' healing, cure.

T ••

''iil go'i, a {Gentile) nation; the Gen- tiles.

"^21 (1> a) sojourner, stranger, fo- reigner.

i^il (1> a) a whelp.

'Pli^ (2, h), pi. 6th, lot.

T

|t5 ^0 5/ieor, to cut off.

~T

^YJ) to cut off or f/oww. — to cut in

— T

two parts, divide. ITil (6, a) jaiece, ;?ar^

77]) fo roll. — to roll, rush in (b^

- T

upon). Hiph. ban ^o roW away.

Q;1 conj. also; ui — nn both — and; \- «^ri 02 «'n she also herself. — yea,

truly ; ' Tc? although. — yet,

nevertheless.

7Dil to retribute, to recompense,

- T

good or evil, with ace, b^, ). — to ripen, to become ripe. — to wean.

\

Hebrew and English Index. 7Qil c. (8), pi. D^Vna, camel.

T T

/•li'^il (1» a) recompense. — ^rooc?

deed, benefit. TvA'D'Si f- (10) retribution, recom-

207

pi (4, a) corn, grain; meton.

T T

bread. ^Tr] wax.

pensej benefit. 22-i to steal.

-T

a:iil il,h) a thief.

^ —

pil prop, to cover; hence to pro-

-T

tect. ]^ {S,d) garden.

"li^il to rebuke, with n.

Tin Niph. /o 6e cut off.

— r

Dia, DID (6, a), bone.

VV.T

*^12| to cast out or mj9. Niph.

— T

to be cast out. — to be agitated, tossed.

D^5 Hiph. to cause to rain.

— T

D'ii^n (6, a), pi. c. 'ptfa, rain, heavij shower.

p^l fo cleave, adhere. Pual, /o

' - T

cleave together. Hiph. to make adhere. Hoph. partcp. paiip (is) cleaving. 1^1 <o speak; to range in order.

~ T

Piel, to speak. Pual, to be spoken. ISiph. to speak together. Hiph. to subdue. Hithp. to speak with. 1^"^ (4, a) word, speech, command.

T T

— affair. 11)21 (6, b) honey.

lil^ 11 (Ija) revolution. — age, generation.

rwl f. « door.

p)1 to hang down. — to be weak.

— T

7'7 adj . low, weak, poor.

D1 (for m«) 2, a. 6Zooc?. — blood-

5Aec?, blood-guiltiness ; in pi. D^p^TiS ^^\^ bloody man, city. DD1 ^0 be silent.

~ T

/IJ^I f- (13, a) knowledge, p*!], f. ni?i adj. sm«Z/, ^/im. ■^p"7 ^0 thrust through, to pierce. "TT'ni /o tread (on), with the ace. ;

~ X

with ^ : metaph. to tread down enemies. ";|")1 c. (6, a), suff. >3"|i (Dual,

D''5"j"i), a way. t^"11 fo see^, ^0 inquire (especially

- X

ofan oracle, the Lord).— to ask for, require : ci tn^ to require the blood (of any one). ]vi^1 to grow fat. Piel, to make

fat. — to anoint. — to regard as fat (an offering = accept it). Pual, to be made fat, be abun- dantly satisfied.

n.

tj'rn to push, cast away.

~ X

n^il f. (10) desire, lust.— wicked-

ness.

t2

208

Hebrew and English Index.

HTT to be, to exist, '•rv imperf. Kal

T T

3 pers. m. s. (he, it) shall be: Avith Vav convers. (he, it) was. Often = Kal kykviTo, and it was so (that, &.C.).

/^^r\ (2, h) a large splendid build- ing, a palace. — the temple.

*T^'n to go, walk. Hithp. -rrVrinn to go, walk about.

77n to shine. Piel {to make to

~ T

shine =) to praise, and intrans. to boast. Hithp. to be praised. — to boast oneself. ]n, ""in behold! lol — whether (in

indirect questions). — if. n-ir\, n-in behold I lol with suff.

••p;:!, mr}, ^ivn. ^S3H (1 pers. TfEH^) to turn, turn

over. — to overthrow, ruin. ^prr to go around, to surround.

Hiph. of F]p_'^

"in pi. nnn (8) mountain.

;)in to kill, slay.

~ T

D"in (related to ip-ijiJiog) to break,

— T

pull down, destroy (both in Kal and Piel).

T.

jlJ^T pron. demon, f. sing., see m. nt f. nsi, rarely ni, pron. demon.

this. After the subst. it usually has the article ; when put be- fore it without an article, it is usually the predicate, "iiin m this (is) the thing; rn— ht this — that, the one — the other; Vn n;|

rv, one to the other. With em- phasis, this same, very. "jy^t to be clean.

"?^t (jm f.) adj. clean, pure.

"IDT to remember, recollect, call to

~ T

mind.

13t» "IDT (6, c). memory. — me- morial.

77t prop.nib^T /opoMroM^, whence

~T

partcp. b)\\ squanderer, prodigal. ni!2T f- (1^) device. — wickedness.

T •

IQt to cut. Piel (prop, to divide;

— T

hence) to sing hymns, praises, with b or ace. of the person ; a of the instrument.

]pf (5, a) adj. old; C':]^} elders.

^1T to spread, to scatter. — to sow;

inT y-\i yielding seed. — to plant. ^"It (6, a) seerf.— prop, and fig.

= issue, progeny.

n-

/Hn to twist, to bind.

/^n (6) cord, rope.

/Un to act corruptly. Niph. to

— T

be destroyed, to perish. "Ijn to bind about, to gird.

— T

in adj. (f. thtt) sharp.

7in (ph "^VP) to cease.

inn (6) cnstr. -iin, with suff.

i-iin, pi. c. nirT, chamber. ^"fn Piel, to make new, to renew;

-T

Hithp. to be renewed.

Hebreiv and Efiglish Index. 209

^in (G, c) new moon.— month. I y2^ ^^ divide. b'T^> b'^U to twist; to dance.] p^ir\ (6) part, portion, lot of land.

Hiph. to shake.

nty\n f. (lo) a waii.

T

b>r\ (6,h), pi. n')r}^ strength.—

wealth. — virtue. Js^tOn to miss. — to stumble, fall.

T T

— to rniss, opp. to «^ to find, —to sin (3, ), bt).—to forfeit, with ace. J^tOn with suff. i^m, pi. c. \siDn

failure, sin. i^L^n (l>b) sinner.

T ~

J-)^^n f- cnstr.^ ns'^sn 5iw. — siw-

T ~

offering. DDH ^0 6e or become wise.

~ T

DDn (4,c), TTODn f. (11, c), pi.

TT '^^'•

□'pan, adj. wise. ilDDn f« cnstr. riMn, wisdom.

T ; T

Pi^r\ to be weak. — to be sick.

T T

^^^ to be wounded. Piel, to

- T

wound. — to profane. Hiph. 'jnn

to loose. — to profane. — begin. —

begin to be. Hoph. to be begun.

Q^^n ^0 be fat, stout, strong. — to

— T

dream. D*)^n ph rii, « dream.

Thfl to pass by, to transgress.

Piel, to change (as a garment). Hiph. to change.

vSn to draw out. Niph. to be ' - T I -j"»

delivered. Piel, <o rfraw; ou^. — /o deliver.— to strip, spoil.

Wn (8, a) adj. warm, hot.

T

IDH 'o desire, to covet.

— T

nnn f. (H, b) for rron; (an;)

T ••

warmth, rage; cnstr. kh^math. TOn f- (10) heat, glow. — the sun.

T ~

bf2r\ to pity Oi>).—to spare (with DDH ^0 ^^ warm.

— T

]n (8, b) ^race, favour. — grace,

elegance, beauty. ^^n ^0 instruct, to train up. — to

consecrate (a house, temple, &c.). QJjn gratis, freely, for nothing. —

T •

in vain. — for nothing, unde- servedly.

pn to be gracious, merciful, com- passionate. Niph. to be pitiable. Piel, to make gracious. Hoph. to be favoured. Hithp. to im- plore favour, mercy.

Tj^n to be or become profaned,

" T

polluted, or defiled. — to be pro- fane, ungodly.

^in (5, c) profane, ungodly. ion Kal not used ; in the deri-

— T

vatives it denotes kindness and benignity.

"IDH with suiF. '-on (6, a) kind- ness, mercy. on (3, a) kind, benevolent, gra-

• T

cious, merciful.— pious, holy.

t3

210

Hebrew and English Index.

TVDT] to flee for shelter; hence, to

T T

trust in (^). "non to want, lack, be without.

•• T

IDH adj. wanting. iVion lacking

" T

understanding. — subst. want, lack. D^JSn dual (8,c) the hollow hands,

■~ ; T

the fists. ysn (6), with sufF. 'uon, delight^

jjleasure. ■^Sn ^o 6ksA, be ashamed,^ con-

founded. Hiph. ^o^jm? ^o shame. — intrans. to be ashamed. ii^Bn to search out, explore, in-

— T

vestigate. ^3n Kal not used. Pual, to be

- T

set free, be freed. "I^n c. (5, c), pi. D> . , ni, ew-

closure, court. — village. T'iirT enclosure, court.

• T

;^r^r] (10) statute.

't\

^pn to search.

'-T

Ilin* Il"in ^0 &e rfry. — to be de-

-T "T

solate, waste. Q^in adj. f. ni^n rfry. — desolate.

3in f- (6, a) sword.

^"irr desolation.

□"in Hiph. D'^nn ?o rfeyo^e fo

-T

destruction. — to devote to God, to consecrate. y^nn (3, a) ditch, trench. — what

is decided, decision, judgment. — gold. \T)r\ (1,1>) diligent. Prof. Lee, sharpened, instructed, prudent.

ii^^in (6, a) (pi. c. >'mn) sherd,

potsherd. ^"in to plough, till. — to engrave.

— to form, fabricate. — Metaph. to devise, machinate evil. H^n to think, purpose, intend

~ T

(usually in a bad sense, to in- vent, devise). Niph. to be com- jmted, reckoned, counted. Piel, to compute, reckon. — to think, purpose J to devise. Hithp. to reckon oneself.

^iDtl to hold back. — to withhold.

~ T

iT^rr to be or become obscure,

dark. "^li^rr adj., pi. a'3TrrT, obscure,

mean. "jJin (4, c) bridegroom. — son-in-

T T

law. DnTl to be broken. — to be dis-

"- T

mayed, confounded.

nUtO to slaughter, especially ani-

~ T

mals, but also men ; to slay. n^tO (6, a), with sufF. Hnip,

slaughter. — animals slaughtered, meat. inZD to be or become clean.

1DD to hide, conceal, especially in

the earth. — to hide, reserve. D^D to taste. — met. to perceive,

- T

discriminate. Pj")J3 to tear in pieces, to rend.

Hebrew and English Index.

211

■)j>^\ ")i^^"' (l>a) fiver, the Nile;

pi. nn«' streams. ]^y^ to be or become dry, to dry

•• T

up. Hiph. to dry up. \£}y (5, a), adj. rrcjr f. (10), dry.

T c. (2, a) hand. With prepo-

T

sitions; yiwith, by; T3 accord- ing to the means of; "ilf? from,

out of; T3, T bii, Tb T b-^, T fl^

on, by the side of; t by, n; "?!? under the care or guidance of any one.

^^> inf. c. reu, to know. — be ac-

~T

quainted with. Hiph. to make known, show, inform, teach. ^n*' see n^n.

UV with suff. w (1, a), pi. n^p^,

a c/ay. n^^,> f. (10), pi. D'Dv, c?oye.

T

Tn^ (3, a), m;n' f. (10), ow/y,

• T

only begotten. — solitary one; only one (irv to be [as] one). '^n"' Kal not used, to wait. — to

"• T

cause to wait, hope. Hiph. to wait. 215'^ (only in the imperf. aȣ)';) to

- T

be good, well; p to be better. Hiph. rp'n to make good, to do well. I**^ wine.

7^'' f. Tr)y, 1 pers. "'^yp^, to be able. ■7V to bear, bring forth. — to be-

— T

get. — Pual, to be born. Hiph.

to cause to bring forth. — to be- get. Hoph. to be born.

"I^"* (6, a) lad, youth, child, nib'^ {. {12, -d) a girl.

T ; -

Q> a sea.

T

D^D^ ^51, ''5)1 see dv.

V^'' (-^j ^) ^^^ right; ira* t ^^e

' • T • : -

Aanc? of his right side, i. e. his right hand; also t omitted, the right hand (f.). T)yi to suck. Hiph. p^yr} to give

suck, to suckle. ID'' to found.

~ T

t]0'^ '0 ac?c?. — to add to do, to do again (c. inf. with or without )).

nS)^ (9, b), no; f. (11, a), adj /mr, beautiful. — ^^rooc?, excellent.

>3>, t3> (6, k) 6ea!<^y.

Ji^iJ'' imperat. n?, inf. c. nx2 (2, d),

TT

fo yo ow/, go forth, yj^i Kal not used = i?2 ^0 set,

- T

j9M^, ;?Zflce. Hithp. ssTin ^0 5e^ or place oneself, br, '3pV; /o stand, to stand before. "1-i'' to form.

T^p^ see rjprr.

yn^ fo awake.

Ip" (4, a), n^r;. f. (n, c), adj.

'tt

precious, "^"y to fear, to be afraid (b to fear,

"T

be anxious for). Niph. nti: to be feared, '^-y (5, a) constr. ^^1:; n«7.^ f-

213

Hebrew and English Index.

(11, c) constr. nNT, /eciinw^r, re- verencinff. *TT» to go or come down, descend.

Hiph. T")in to cause to go down; to send, bring, carry down. n")'' (5, a) the moon.

— "T

1^T» to take, seize upon. Niph. to

—T

become poor. 2,^'' inf. c. n2\D, imperat. 2^, niTiJ,

- T

to sit, sit down. — to dwell, dwell ■ in, inhabit. Partcp. :itfv in- habitant. n^'' Root not used, to subsist, to

T T

be firm. ^^> to deliver, save.

'y^'^ to be straight, even, right. —

- T

Piel, to make straight. — to direct. — to esteem right, approve.

"T>^'' (4), rr^\ f. adj. straight.

T T ^^ '

")1^'' (7j c) uprightness, rectitude ; -\p^'Q more than is right.

2,^^ io be pained, be in pain. '>nj^3 said to be a partcp. of Kal,

•-;t

from -n3 formed in the Chaldee manner (as mp, partcp. nsijj) = piercing, digging through (sc. they are). Another reading is ii5«3 (3 pi. perf. Kal). 2Di3 (2, b), for 1313, star.

T

■733, *T2l3 to be heavy. — to be

- T " T

weighty, honoured, respected, mighty. Niph. to be {become, show oneself) honoured, renowned.

Piel, to honour. — to make ob- durate, to harden. Hiph. to make heavy, grievous. — to honour, make honourable. Hithp. to show one- self honourable, boast oneself. T^liD (5, a&b) adj. heavy. — nu-

merous. "Ti33 (3, a) honour, glory.

T

D^D to wash; only partcp. nnis

— T

washer, fuller. Piel, to wash (clothes) ; metaph. to cleanse. Pual, to be washed. 1^55 (6, a) lamb.

]n3 Kal not used. Piel, ^rrs to

prepare, adjust, adorn. — to mi- nister, act, or officiate as a priest. ]n3 (7, b), pi. D^:n3, priest.

]!)3 Kal not used. Pilel, ]:i3 to

set up, establish. 3,0 lo lie, speak falsehood. Piel,

~T

to lie, deceive. Hiph. to convict of falsehood. Niph. to be proved false. J2T3 (4, a) lie, falsehood.

T T

no, nb (1, a) strength,

''3 that; for, because; but. — D« »3

that if, that since, for if, but if; unless, except, if not; but; yet, nevertheless ; that.

1173 (6, a), pi. c. >ib3, dog. 773 to complete.

— T

□^3 Hiph. D'^in, D'bprr, to put to

shame, make ashamed. — to in- jure, hurt. Ni})h. to be put to shame; dX^o to feel ashamed. ]3 adj. upright; adv. rightly, also

thus.

I

Hebreio and English Index.

213

D^3 to collect^ gather.

- T

")to (Ij^O, pi. C'-, ni, harp or nD3 to cover, conceal.

T T

^^P3 (l,a)/oo/.

5]DD (6, a), with sufF. ^EpD, silver.

D^D (6, d), with sufF. iors, ioys,

vexation. — anger. v]3 f. (8, d) ^Ae hollow, palm of

the hand, hand; dual d'Qs, pi. nisB. — pan, spoon, dish; hollow. — handle of a bolt. "133 to cover, overlay. — to cover

~ T

over, to forgive, pardon. — to ex- piate.— to appease.

D*13 perf. 1 & 2 pers. W3, nna, to cut, cut off, cut down. Niph

b.

22b, n^ (4, d & 8, b), pi. nmV,

ninnS, ^Ae heart. "TH^ separately, alone; ^xb, ti-ii^,

ill'?, &c. /, /AoM, Ae alone. — hy myself, by thyself, ^c. ]I1/ (4, a) adj. white.

T T

ID/ adj. w/a7e. nj^7 f. the moon,

T T ;

I^il/ to put on a garment^ to be

~ T

clothed. t^O /) li^n / outer garment, cloak. TVt) f- garland, crown.

t; •

□117 ^0 eo^, consume.

~ T

on? c. (6, a), with sufF. ''r^r\b,food.

_ . . mea#. — bread,

to be cut off' or down.— to be di- | -j^'p ^0 ^oX^e, CG^c/^. — to take,

vided. — to be destroyed. 2'^2 (6, a) lamb.

choose, by lot. Niph. to be taken, caught. Hithp. to take

b^^ to totter, stagger, stumble. I or catch hold on each other, to - T _ ! hang together.

Niph to stumble, mi, to cause | ^^U, ^^ ^^^^^ ^.-^ ^^ accustom, to fall. Hiph. to cause to totter, : - t to make feeble. — to cause to

stumble and fall. Hoph. to be made to stumble. nJ13 to write, engrave.

to teach. Pual, to be accustomed, trained, taught.

HD? "iohy ? adv. interr., from the

T T

perf. ) and no or nri q. v.

njn3, njn3 (13, c), pi. ni:ri3, \y^^ to mock, deride, scorn. Niph.

an under garment, shirt. ?)jn3 f. (5,b), pi. nicrir, constr.

nioro, suff vera, shoulder. iinS '0 6efl^ — ^o 6eaf, break in

- T

pieces. — to beat down, rout.

to stammer. Hiph. to mock, deride. ^3/ according to. h with stat.

cnstr. pi of peh, mouth (irreg.). np7 to take. — to take away.

T^'Th (G), with suff. 'np;"'?, taking speech. — instruction.

214 Hebrew and 'English Index.

IDp7 « gleaning. T^Ty) to lick, lap.

X)^}/ c. (3, a) tongue j niD^enn 'b

T

perverse, deceitful tongue.

IND (1> a) strength; generally

as an adv. greatly, very. *liND (6, a) pi. cni^Q, nii^a light,

luminary.

rh2i^^ f- pl- ni'^SJ^'? « A:rai/<?, both

. for eating and slaughtering. ^!)3.D inundation, deluge.

V^'O Hiph. partcp. from pa to understand.

"liJUQ (2, b), j)l. im and 6th, for- T : •

tificaiion, stronghold; batsar, to

cut.

DiDI^D f- pl- (of TO^jn) c/iozce,

precious things. nnto (10)/eor.

13,"TD (2. b) a large plain. — a

desert. — speech. mD to extend. — to measure. — to

~ T

apportion. r\1ui f. (10) extension. — measure.

T •

f\10 strife.

ZOID to totter, shake; of the foot, slip, slide. Niph. to be moved, shaken. Hiph. to cause to fall or come down.

"1D1D (2, b) chastisement, cor-

T

rection. — admonition, warning. — instruction.

^\)^D (7, b), pl. D^- ni, snare;

yakash (a y), to lay snares. r\^f2 to die. mD (6,g) death.

V T

n^t!^ (aa>d) f. (10) counsel-

wicked counsel. — prudence,- dis- cretion.

TwH^ (9, a) sickness, disease.

nbnO f- (of the preceding) id. T — : -

liDnrj (l,b) want, poverty, 1pnf2 (2, b) inmost jmrt. ni^PfD f« (10) destruction, ruin.

— terrour, fear. r\t^f2 f- (10) couch, bed.

r •

DJ/ZDD only pl. D^nytpp, nim'pa,

dainty meat. 1ZDD Hiph. T'l^pn to rain, cause

- T

or give rain; bi? upon. Niph. to be rained upon. D''Q ph (from obsol. 'q), cnstr. 'a^

and reduplicated 'p>n, waters, water. D^DD (2, b), only in pl. or dual,

breeches, trowsers, or drawers, for the priests.

i^^Q ^0 he full, filled.

^^^p (l,a)/Mke5S.

nS7D f- (lO) fulness, plenty.

^^^^'?D f- (11,0, cnstr. na^bn^

service, work. ]T?f2 (3, a) lodging-place, an inn.

nDPho and nr^nbo f. (n , a &

13, a) a war; from [lakham] to consume.

U?0 to let escape or slip, to de- liver. Hiph. to deliver, to brine/ forth. Niph. to be delivered; to deliver oneself, escape. Hithp, to escape.

ly^Q to reign, to be king; b-p^ n

over. "^7^ (6, a) king.

HD/D f. (12, a) queen. J1-')D70 f. (l,b), pi. ni'^p^n, king- dom.— royalty, royal dignity. D^nipte the jaws.

npbt2, npbo (2, b), only Dual

D^np^/ tongs. — snuffers. n^D Root not used; Arab, to give.

— T

nma f. (12, b) gift.^tribute.— T : •

an offering to God; especially a

bloodless offering.

]0, as a prefix "o with dag. forte,

sometimes also without it, when the next letter has Sh'va, es- pecially when the letter is Yod, which then becomes quiescent, poet. ''Z'p, ''I'q, of (a part taken from or out of a. whole).— /rom. ^DQ io mix, mingle.

WD to flow, melt; to faint. Hiph.

Hebreiv and English Index. 215

y'^VD ( 1 J a) long and full upper

garment, robe, mantle. U^VD (dual) bowels.

X'VD a fountain.

?VD to act perversely , treacherous -

~ T

ly ; 3 of the thing or person. \VD (for n^yn) purpose, only in

|yp7, with suff. ^2?ob, Tj:???!?, prep. because of, for the sake of. — conj. in order that.

n"l^D f- (10) cave, cavern. TT :

TWVD (9, a) work (of an artificer).

— labour. — deed. — work (the fruit of one's labour).

^'':ir2 to find.

T T

ni2iQ f- (10) a commandment. ' 7^*^12 f- (10) unleavened bread. OniJD Egypt. li^'^pD (2, b) any thing sacred. —

holy place, sanctuary. DipQ c. (3, a), pi. ninipo, place. —

habitation, home. — town. lipQ (3, a) spring, fountain.

' T

n^pp (9) a) purchase. — possession,

wealth (in cattle). HKIQ (9, a) a seeing.— sight. —

appearance, countenance.

to cause to faint, make faint- \'^'2,'2!rV^ f« (H^a) chariot, war- hearted.

JD^Q to be or become little.

chariot. j nO"IQ f- (10) deceit, fraud.

WD, I^VD, ph Q"^5^n (8), small- 1 ,»JJ ', -u • x ^ • j

u-fj/i^, w>iw, I •-: ^ -" 3^^?3 (each •• impure) a friend, a

ness ; hence, a little, few. — ■cvpp lit. 05 a little; nearly, al- most ; shortly, soon.

companion. KS"1Q remedy, deliverance.

216

Hebrew and English Index.

^ilii^D ''8, a) liill^ rock, strong

place. — refuge.

'!]'^D to draw. — to draw out, pro- long. Niph. to be protracted, delayed. Pual, protracted, de- ferred.

iTTT^D (1> ^>) destruction, ruin.

— snare, trap. 33^D o. lying down, couch.

T ; •

/li}f2 to rule, have dominion {rs

~ T

over). "IQti^rj (2, b) a watching, guard-

i)ig. — a watch. — observance, rite. mbti^D f- (13, a) a watching. —

place of watching, post, station. — a keeping. — observance or per- formance.— a charge. ^ti^D to touch, feel. Piel, to

— T

grope. Hij)h. to grope. "•/ID adv. when? Ti'ch, ^no iv' how

— T - t: T -

long? 'no"nn« after how long?

piJIQ (pl. D^Rino, f. r\'p^^o) adj.

sweet; neut. sweet, sweetness; pleasantness.

t^'^ll (3, a) prophet. IDZLi Hiph. iD^arr ^ /ooA:. — to be- hold. 7^1^ (f. rhii) ad], foolish. — wicked,

XT ^"^

impious, ungodly.

PO^H f- (lljC) corpse, carcase. X •• :

1^2 J^al not used; Arab, to be clear

— X

and manifest, Hiph. T2ri /o de- clare, tell. Hoph. lan to be shown, told.

*72li with suff. >^:] before, in the

presence or 5i^A^ o/". P^i inf. c. s-ip, TO3, to touch (with

~x ' ■

1, ba, bt). 112 f- to flee.

— X

TTJ /o vow.

112 to flow. — to shine, be bright,

— X

"ini (4 , a) stream. — river.

TX

T-')^ ^0 depart, flee. 1D^2 f- slumber.

712 to obtain, acquire a possession,

- X

to possess. — to obtain by in- heritance, to inherit. — to divide for a possession, to apportion, Hiph. VriDn to cause to possess, give as a possession. — to cause to inherit. Il/riJ f. (12, d) the act of taking

possession. — inheritance. 1^12 serpent.

T X

11^2 to stretch out, extend.

X X

yZD^ to plant.

— X

11^2 to watch, guard.

~ X

)i)]^2 to leave, forsake.

- X

1'22 Piel, "ip:, to estrange, alienate.

~ X

— to seem strange; to gaze at, admire; to mistake; to reject. Hiph. ">^?n to gaze at, regard, have respect to. — to be concerned, care for any one.— ^o recognise; to acknowledge ; to be acquainted with. — to know, discriminate. Niph. 133 to feign oneself a stranger. — to be recognised, known. Hithp. to feign, dis- semble. — to be recognised, known.

lb!22 f. the ant.

Dt22 (in pause, namas). Niph. of

masas, q. v. T1D2 to pluck, tear away.

" T

^DJ to pour, pour out (a libation).

— to anoint a king.

^DJ. "^D^ (6, b) libation, drink- offering.

I^J 6, d) a male infant. — hoy,

lad. — a youth. — servant, U^^y^^ pi. (of-iw: l,a) childhood.

— youth. 73 J to fall; ^u: fallen, lying.

~ T

ti^3J to respire, take breath.

~ T

ti^SJ c. (6,3.) breath. — meton. any

thing that breathes, an animal. — person. — soul, as the principle of life.

TOJ> niii (6» e) truth, upright- ness, faithfulness. — permanency; ns: ny, n^ib, and n?: adv. /or eyer.

^JiJ Piel, V2?5 <o 5<n/} ojf, take

— T

away. — to deliver. Hiph. !?^2n to take away. — to deliver Qa^

")^{^ /o watch, preserve. — to keep,

~ T

observe (a law, mercy, &"c.). '^^J^ shoot, branch.

r\7)2 to be pure, innocent. Niph.

'tt

np to be pure, innocent, blame- less. — to be clear, free from punishment. Qp^ to avenge.

D\)2 (4, a) vengeance.

'tt

]T)^ a chatterer.

Hebrew and English Index. 217

^Vl Hiph. r^zjn ^o reacA. — to over-

- T

pti^J intrans. to be arranged. — to

kiss (with ) of the person). Piel, to kiss. Hiph. to join, touch.

Ili^^ (6, a), pi. c. n;c:, an eagle. n^'^JlJ f. (10) a trodden way, beat en

T 'J

pa^A. — joa/A, by-way. ]i)n2 to tear, pluck up. — to tear

~ T

down, destroy.

^]2D to drink to excess; partcp.

T T

«ib a drunkard; pass. ni3d drunken. 3^D to go over, go round. — to

— T

surround, encompass. "inD to go, travel about; Dii. to

go round, traverse a country for the sake of traffic. "inD (with suff. nnn?) profit, gain.

Tr3D> "^Dli^ to cover; intrans. to

cover, conceal oneself. Hiph. TTcn to cover, protect. rOD to forgive, pardon, with ) of

— r

the person, Niph. to be for- given. 77D to raise a heap or mound ;

— T

to cast up, prepare a way. y?D (6), with suff. 'r'7p, a rock.

C^^D Piel, to subvert, overthrow.

'— T

"TS3D to mourn.

~ T

u

»-,-

K

218

1S)D to write;

Hebrew and English Index, only in partcp

"iDD a writer, scribe. — to number, count. Piel, to number, count. — to recount, relate, tell. — to speak, talk. Pual, to be related, told. *1J1D to hide, conceal oneself.

Niph. to he hid, lie hidden. Piel, to hide, conceal. Pual, to be hid, secret.

2V (1» 3)> pl- D'^i% rii25?, darkness, chiefly of clouds. — thick cloud. TIl^ to work, labour; to till, cul-

" r

tivate; to dress. — to serve, work for another.

"T3^ (6, a) a servant, slave.

"mV to pass over.

^'2V ^ region or country near a

river or sea. — aside, ^ypx^from the other side; lira on the other side. 137 (l^a) a witness, Y>?irtcip. of TfS'

mi^ tougo or pass by.

T T

n*TV (ll>b) assembly, congrega- tion.— a private party, a gang, faction. — family, household. — swarm of bees.

2r)^ Hiph. to cover with darkness.

^la^y, n:iy, 2^v (once with suff.

T T'., T\

*125?) a musical instrument, a flute or organ. 11^, "7P adv. again. — again and again. — besides. — yet, still.

]"11^, ]'\^ (3, a), pi. D>:ii>, ni2i]?,

T T

iniquity, sin.

t]?)^ to cover with the wings; to

cover with darkness. "li^ (l,a), pi. ni-iii", skin (of man

or beast).

?^ (8, d), m» f. (10), adj. strong.

tp, t'l^ (8, c) strength, might, power.

^]^ to leave, forsake, desert. nnT;ir f. help.

t; V

"IIOP to surround. Piel, "YEV fo

~ T

crown. niZD^ f. crown, diadem.

T T -;

]'»^ (6, h), dual D^D't', eye.

1^^ f. a city.

7P (prop, constr. of Vi- 2, a) pi. c.

'biS with sufF. '>b'S, ?i'b2?, rbr, &c. prep, upon, on, ove^, above, against. — of the objects, means, instruments by which any thing is effected ; by. — of norm, rule, standard and cause, -n wni b? after the manner of Melchi- zedek ; riDrbs^ in this manner;

' TT -

nn-b?' wherefore F — at, by, near; with. — with idea of motion, to the question whither f* upon, down upon, to, towards. — fre- quently i. q. hti, H marking the dative, to, for. — conj. though, although. — with other particles. — '7i>3 according to. (17^ to go or come up, to ascend.

T T

— to arise of the dawn. — to spring or grow up. rhv (9, b), a leaf

V T

'hv see ■:?.

nb**/*^ ^- work, deed, doing, action (of man, in a bad sense).

Hebrew and English Index, 219

^^)J Kal not used ; i. q. ?Va to roll;

~ T

hence to repeat an action, to do habitually or effectually. — with ), to affect painfully. D^, D^c. (8, a or d), pi. cw^ d^ooiv

- T

people, nation; most frequently of Israel opp c;iii gentiles. '^^^ to stand.

— T

^QJ? to toil, labour, travail.

~ T

y'Oy labour, toil. — travail. — sor-

T T

row. — -fruit of labour. — mischief, iniquity, sin. "DDy to be deep, unsearchable.

2JV (^- ^- ^J^) prop. name. 33^ (4, b) cluster of grapes. >2^ (8, f.); rP3!? f. adj. afflicted,

distressed, poor, needy. IS^ (4, c), pi. c. rvr\zv, dust, dry

T T

earth. Y^ (7 J a), with suff. ^^.S", pi. c^2y»

c. "'^, ^ree. 2jJJ; to travail, suffer pain.

~ r

2,'^^, ^^J^ (6, b) labour, travail

— pain. nik^ f. (ll,b), for rfp], counsel,

advice. UT^V ^^J- (^'^^ s^ron^r, mighty.—

T

D::y f. (6, a), pi. nra^, bone.—

body.

2py (5. c), pi. c>2;?.v... cnstr. ^ip;?'

'i;?^, nii;?r, heel.— hoof.

i^pi? adj. (7, b) perverse, false. ^"ly (Arab, /o 6e 6ZacA-) <o become

— T

c^orA; or rfwsA;. ^1J7 c. (6, a) evening.

Q")"!^ adj. (3, a) crafty, cunning.

T

— prudent. ^"1^ <o arrange; to prepare (a

table); ^o array (a battle). — ^o place together, to compare. n^V to be cunning, subtle.

—T

JliD^y f- craftiness, cunning. —

T \ r

n'Z^y ^0 work. — to make.

T T

y^^ to smoke.

■^^^ Piel, to make rich.

- T

Jlj; c. (8, b), contracted from ni|, /ime, season.

^^"^ Vadv. now.

n

m

9.

-)^3 (I, a), but pi. c. ns2, orwa-

mental head-dress, turban. niD ^0 redeem, ransom. -

p!)3 to move to and fro. Hiph. to move; cdiwsat. to give out ; to get, obtain; to further.

ni'lD f- wine-press.

T3 adj. purified, pure, an epithet

of gold ; then for refined, pure gold. "HtD <o disperse. Piel, fo disperse,

scatter. n9 (forn^>c,irreg.) moj^^A; nQ-';« hb

. ^ i *moM<^ /o mouth.— aperture. --

]^p}; to convict of per cerseness. j g^g^^^ part, portion. — word;

u2

220

Hebrew and English Index.

^cr according to the word of, in D"1S to give, distribute. Hiph. to

proportion , according to; "iii'M 'DS according as, even as (and iirw omitted), so as, so that; 'd"? in proportion, according to; ""B ^v according to the word or com- mand; also according to. n^D (6. a), pi. c. >3bQ, brook,

stream. 73 prop, a turning to, a regarding;

hence "'je as conj. lest, for fear that, lest haply. n^D f. (10) corner.

T •

Q^Ti3 pi. pearls ; others, red

corals.

^"-S-'] (^, a), with sufF. 'i"!??, a J/^D [ wound.

■^pD ^0 i?i5iY. — to examine. Niph.

to be missed. — to be visited, punished. Piel, to muster. Pual, to be mustered, numbered. Hiph. to set over, appoint. Hoph. to be set over, have the oversight of.

DH^pD pl- (of 1??, 1, b) com- mands, precepts.

"ID a young bull, bullock.

n*1D f- for ^"^3 (10) yoMn^' cow,

TT ^'

THD to separate. Niph. to be se-

— T

parated; also fo separate oneself Qp, bi-n /rom any one). Piel, to go aside. Pual, partcp. se- parated. Hiph. to separate. — to scatter, disperse. Hithp. to separate oneself, to be sundered. "•"ID (6, i), with suff. 3 pers. pi.

urr"\B, fruit, produce; ns '^f^S/ fruit- tree.

cJeave, divide the hoof. nj?"lB Pharaoh {king), the title of

i; -

all monarchs of Effypt down to the Persian invasion. yiD to break, tear down, demolish.

0*^3 to break, crush

i^lD i. q. cie to break bread, with

-T "^

b to give or distribute (it) to. — tosnread: e.g. a garment; to spread abroad (metaph.). tOlt^B to strip or put off a, garment.

— T

Piel, to strip, pillage, plunder. Hiph. to strip a person. — to strip off a garment. Hithp. to strip onesef. r\r\^^ f. with suff. m^e, pi.

a\7i\rE, flax. ^rSD (6, i), pi. D;n5, simplicity,

folly. — simple, inexperienced, ig- norant. nnB to spread out, &e. In Piel,

T T

to deceive, seduce (= avraraw). nn3 to open.

~ T

yjl3 suddenness; yns adv. sud- denly. JIB f' (8, e) piece, crumb, morsel.

pliJ to be equitable.

p^'^l adj. (I, b) jMj?^ — righteous.

p*T[iJ (6, a), with suff. *pi2, and

r\jry^ (11, c) justice, equity. — righteousness. . iy^-^ Zion (h oj).

Hebrew and English Index.

221

^T*^ (1, a) hinge.

DTDI ^' dish, bowl.

"IDii (6, a), with suff. >yy$, wool.

IV^ (^» ^) ^ stepping, going. —

step, pace. ]S)^ to hide. — to lay, treasure up.

- T

■)S)jJ only imperf. ie^*'; to turn.

— T

liDiJ (pi. D'"!ev) 6Jrd; especially a

sparrow. IliJ to tie ov bind up. — to shut up.

*12i (8) ^^]. strait, narrow — subst.

adversary, enemy j distress, ad- versity.

TVy^ f- (10)> for ^"i^j female ad-

versary, a rival. — distress, ad- versity.

P-

'^'^\) to collect, gather. n^p to bury. So also in Piel. 13p (6> a), with suff. '-Q|7, though in pause "ap, pi. cap, nV, se-

ti^^p /o separate, consecrate. — to

be sacred. Piel, to consecrate, hallow. "^'yiT) adj. (3, a) Ao/y. — 5ef apart,

' T

sacred, holy; of men, saints. ^"Tp (6, c) holiness. — holy place. mp /o wait for, hope in.

t't

^ip (l,a), pi. ni, voice. Qlp (once perf. c>»i;;) <o ri^e. HQip f. (10) Aeis^Af.

1!lp to dig a well.

]JOp (8, a) little, small (prop, and

fig.)- — young, younger. H/p Kal not used. Niph. to be

made light of, to be despised; partcp. despised, mean. Hiph. to make light of, to despise.

]wp (3, a) shame, contempt.

' T

77p to be light. — to be lessened,

- 't

abated. J^^lp Piel, to be jealous. Hiph. to

provoke to jealousy. niA^p f> (12, h) jealousy. — envy.

T^^p to form, create. — to get, ob-

t't

tain. — to buy. — to possess. r]2p (9, b), pi. D'?p, nijp, reed,

cane. — sweet cane. — stalk (of wheat). ITl^p f. a dish, charger.

yp (8, b) end, limit (of space,

time, condition, or circum- stances). HiJp (9, b) end, limit.

v't

Hikp f- (11>^) ^^d, extremity.

t't

7t^Jp (3, a) a judge. — leader, chief .

— prince. C^^{p to be angry, wroth (■??, b« of

the person. Hiph. to provoke to anger. Hithp. to become angry. ■^^p to cut down, reap.

— 'T

T^p (3, a) fruits cut down, har-

• T

vest; hence time of harvest. i^lp to cry, call out.

t't

2np to draw or come near.

~'t

u3

222

Hebreiv and English Index.

nnp ice.

'PDIp. dual D^tenp., ankles.

ynp to tear.

yip to close, press together (the

lips or eyes), to wink, &c., de- noting fraud, cunning. 2,U}p to attend [lit. to sharpen. G.].

Hiph. (with p« ear), to prick up the ear to, to attend to, hearken.

1.

nj^l to see.

T T

V!)ik^ head. — head, chief, leader;

chief of a family. nil"l ^0 be or become manyy to

T T

multiply. ^T^ f. (6, a), with suff. '•)y^_, foot;

du. D^ba"] Me ^wo /ee/.— pi. d'|;:") {steps) times.

- T

Q"in Niph. □I'l: to lie in a deep

- T

sleep. — to sink down stupified. C]"71 to follow after.— to pursue,

persecute. — to put to flight. 3n") to ^et insolently.' — to urge,

~ T

press upon; to be urgent (with), ni") c. (l,a), pi. nirai, nim, air,

breeze. — breath; metaph. vanity, folly. — spirit, soul. — mind, spi- rit, disposition. — wind.

Q1"l to be high.

^ni to be or become wide, large.

- T

Hiph. ynf} to make wide, en- large.

3m (6j c) width, breadth.

□m f- (6, d) the womb. — the

bowels; love; compassion. 2!^"^ (1, a) contention, strife,

quarrel. 331 to ride either on an animal

~ T

or in a chariot; partcp. 351 a rider. nt21 to cast, throw. Piel, n^n to

T T

deceive (prop, to make fall). 0121 to tread. — to trample under

- T

foot. pi to shout.

~ T

pi (pl. D7"j), adj. (rrin f, 10) evil,

bad, worthless. — evil, wicked. — I?? S?T of an evil eye, i. e. en- vious, malignant, pi (rarely •s\-\) badness.

pi (1, a), for nyi, acquaintance,

companion, friend. — one beloved, lover. — neighbour, fellow. 3P1 to be hungry. — to suffer from

•• T

famine. Hiph. to cause to hunger. 3p1 (4, a) hunger.— famine.

T T

ipi to tremble, quake. Hiph. to

— T

tremble.

T T

riPI evil (prop. fem. adj.) from

X T

nSI io Aan^ c?oww the hands. —

T T

to decline. — to sink down. — to relax, abate, to desist. Hithp. to relax oneself, be slothful. P31, '^31 to tread, trample upon.

Hebrew and English Index.

223

especially of water, to trouble it. Niph. partcp. irsn: troubled, made turbid by trampling. Hithp. CE^nn to humble, submit oneselj'. nii"1 to delight, take pleasure in.

T T

]'lii"1 (3, a) delight, satisfaction,

acceptance. — object of delight, acceptance. — wdl, pleasure. — good-will, favour, grace. ^pl (4, a) rottenness.

T T

J/t^1 to be wicked. Hiph. r'\p")n

~ T

to declare guilty, to condemn. — to

cause mischief. — to act wickedly.

i^l^T (4, a), nr^n f. adj., wicked,

T T T T :

ungodly.

J^ti^n (6, a), with suff. iy\2h, wicked- ness.

n^^n f. (cnstr. r.yir-ji no pi.)

T ; •

wickedness, ungodliness.

IVtVJ (1,20 flesh. V^21L}, a week.

~ T

ny^n^ oath.

T I

y2,''D ^0 be or become satisfied,

— T

filled Qp, 2 of the thing). Hij)h. to satisfy (]o, a of the thing, ) of the person). ^3li^ abundance, plenty.

T T

Vyii (cnstr. rntJ, f. nr^uO seven.

Dual, s;n?it: sevenfold. ^'y<!) fo swear (oaths were usually

13t^ <o break, break in pieces. —

— T

to buy or sell corn. Hiph. to cause to break through. — to sell (corn). Hoph. to be broken, afflicted, distressed.

"IH^ more commonly "qp (6 b),

in pause "i2uj, from "ii^", a break- ing; sorrow, vexation, calamity, destruction. — grain, corn.

r)2,'^ to f^st from labour. Niph.

— T

to cease, have an end. Hiph. to make or let rest from labour. — to make to cease.

r\'2.'^ c. (cnstr. m^i), with suff.

T -

in3U'; pi. n'imip), day of rest, sabbath. ^yi) to err.

"TI^ (dual nn^, cnstr. »-to) the

breast. TVD to treat with violence, to op-

press. — to attack, invade. — to plunder. — to (lay) waste, destroy (e. g. a land). Niph. to be laid waste. Piel, to spoil, waste, ruin. Pual, pass. Hoph. to be spoiled, laid waste, wasted.

mii/ (9, b) plain.— field.

VT

i^yi} evil, wickedness. — evil, ca-

lamity. — worthlessness, vanity.

"2!^^ to turn, return — to turn away from. — to cause to return, bring back. — torestore. — Hiph. tocause to return, to bring back. — to turn away (anger). — to return, give back, restore. Hoph. to be brought, led, given back, returned.

"confirmed by seven victims). "^'^J^O, a), cni^, an ox. -herd of Niph. rs^r: to swear, with i by,

'':to.

oxen. ZOn^ io slaughter, kill (animals).

224

pTVV to laugh, abs. — hii to smile

upon. — b^-> b to laugh at. Piel, to rejoice. — to sport, play. "inii^ to be black. — (denom. from

"ynxD q. V.) prop, to do early; hence to seek early, diligently. Piel, to seek early, also diligently.

Snti^ (3, a), nnn^ f. (10) adj. black. in^ (6, d) the dusk of the morn- ing ; hence dawn, morning. Jinii^ Niph. to be marred or spoiled

~ T

by rotting. — to be corrupted (morally). — to be laid waste. Piel, nrnp to destroy. — to cor- rupt, pervert. Hoph. to be cor- rupted, spoiled.

I^lt^ officer, overseer or magistrate.

"yi]^ to be grey-headed.

nH''!^ f. (10) grey hair.

XV^ (1, a) speech, discourse. — complaint.

^2"^ to lie down: especially to

~ T

lie down to sleep or to rest one- self.

r\yt} to forget.

— T

]"»2)ii^ a knife. Etym. doubtful. 7Dli^ to act wisely, prudently.

— T

Piel, to act wisely. Hiph. to look at. — to be or become in- telligent, wise, or prudent; to act wisely, prudently ; and to make prudent, to teach.

/Jl^» /^ID (in pause bsto) regard,

estimation. — intelligence, under- standing. ]3^ to lie down, to rest. — to rest,

Hebrew and English Index.

abide. — to dwell. — to dwell (in), to inhabit,

]DI£^ (5, a), f. nm% pi. ni^Dip, in- habitant.— neighbour.

rh'^, ^h"^ to be quiet.

T T T T

rivli^ f. (cnstr. m^^, no pi. abs.)

quiet, prosperity . — carelessness, negligence of God. H/^ to send. In Piel, to send

~ T

forth = to excite {it). ]'rh'^ (2, b), pi. niDn^p, a table. TJ;)^ Hiph. 'ryby5r^ to throw, cast

(bx into, 3, bv upon, ]n from; vjni^ behind him, i. e. to despise). 77^ to plunder, spoil.

— T

77]^} (4, a) spoil, plunder, booty.

T T

Q7ti^ to be entire, i. e. sound, safe.

- T

— to be at peace. Piel, dVcj, dVio ^0 preserve, keep uninjured. — to complete. — to restore. — to repay. — to requite, recompense. Uw^ (3>a) health, welfare, pros-

T

perity, peace. Dli/ there.

T

D^ (7, a), pi. nin^S a name. IDIl) Hiph. to destroy. — to de-

~ T

stroy (persons, nations). Niph. pass, of Hiph. '^f21£) only pi. u^i^xd (cnstr. '•ncj, with

suff. "Tj^aip) heaven, the heavens. HDl^ io s/jme cheerfully. — fo be

~ T

TOt^ (5, a), rrnnip f. ady, joyful. nilDli^ (12, b) ;oy, rejoicing.— mirth.

Hebrew and English Index.

225

lOQli^ to let go, remit (a debt). —

~ T

to throw down. Niph. to be thrown down. W^72>^ heaven (cnstr. "p^iJ, pi. m.)-

rh^'V f. (12, b) a garment, a

T \ •

mantle.

r\V^Ut, r\V^^ f- (10) news, ti- T : T \ :

dings. — information, report. J^Dt^ to hear. — to listen (with ace.

— T

^N, ), 3 to any one). — to hearken, obey. Piel, to cause to hear, to summon. Hiph. to cause to hear or be heard. ID'^ to keep, watch, guard. — to

~ T

preserve, protect (with ace. 3, bi-i, h'p of the object, with ■pfrom or against). — to keep. — to keep, observe (ace. ^^, bs). ]^^ c. (8,b) a fooM (prop, and fig.).

— ivory. J^J''^> to hate.

•• T

r\yi) f. (11, a), pi. D':uj, ni:^, a

T T

year, yyf) to sharpen, e. g. a sword ;

partcp. ]^ya sharp. ly i^ (4, b) a hair; collect, hair.

T ••

nS'i/ f. (11, a), dual c^nDiD, pi. c.

T T •- T .

ninE^% lip. — speech, words. — language. — brim of a vessel. — shore of the sea ; bank of a river. nS)'^ Kal not used; to pour out.

— T

nnS^ f. (12, b) female servant,

T ; •

handmaid; Lixt.famnla. J23li^ to judge, administer justice.

— T

— to condemn, punish. — 'coiij a judge, ruler.

I^'SJ^S)^ a serpent, adder.

^3^ to pour out. — to shed. Niph.

/o 6e poured out. Pual, /o 6e ^Aeri. Hithp. tjEn^'n fo 6e poured out. pg^ ^0 cree/9.

7p^ to weigh.

^p*^ (6, a), pi. c. '•bpuS a shekel.

C]p^ Niph. (prop, to bend for- ward in order to see). — to look out. Hiph. to look.

")pti^] (6, a) lie, falsehood.

^pp I shakar, to lie.

T^ID (l,b), only pi. branches of

• T

a vine. C^")^ /o ^Mrn, consume.

}i)1^ (6, c), pi. D^^-iT^, root. br\^ to plant.

— T

pJlt^ /o 6e 5^i7Z, ^0 rest, to abate,

' - T

of waves, of strife.

n-

mi^n f. (10) desire, will.

-^Wn (6, f.) form.

r\2D f. (10) a chest. — ark (of

T "

Noah, built in the form of a chest). — the ark in which Moses was exposed. ni^^3/^ f. (10) a coming in, being

T I

stored up. — income, profit. — pro- duce, fruit ; trop. result.

r^y^^D f- (10) understanding, pru-

T

dence.

226 Hebrew and English Index,

T^yST^rS only in pi. perversity,

T ; ~

frowardness.

rhry\r\ f. (is, a), with sufr.

\"^bnin, expectation, hope. nriD^n f- (is, a), but pi. ninDin

proof, rebuke. n^yin f- (ll»b) abomination. —

T "

abominable act. DS^y^^D f. pl- (ffom rroyin 11, a)

swiftness. — wealth, treasure. — brightness, splendour.

n"liil f« (10), instruction, direc-

T

h'ow, precept. — law. — manner. n^Ii^^/n f. help, deliverance. — pur-

pose, enterprise. — counsel, wis- dom.

DTID f. (c. suff. ^nnri' ^j^nnri' vnnn^ rrnnri' i^^nnni orrnnri) prop, what

is below. — adv. below, beneath. — prep, under. — instead of. — in return for. — on account of. — be- cause that, because.

i^^b^\D only pl. Dwbnn diseases. l^^nn (1, b) pl. DV, ni, suppli- cation.

__^ L r scholar.

^f2D to take hold of. — to hold. D?!3il to be completed, ended. — to

cease. D''Dn (3, a) perfect. — whole. —

' T

Upright, sincere. nn f- ^^ci (10) adj. whole, per-

T ■^

feet, sincere, honest. — subst. in- tegrity.

]r\ or ]p[ only pl. can, nn huge

T —

serpents, sea monster; others, jackals.

nyFI Piel is-n ^0 ai/ior. — to render

— T

abominable. Niph. to be ab- horred, detested; to be abomi- nable.

TViDPS f. (10) expectation, hope.

(These words Avere omitted in their alphabetical place.)

jn^TJ^ strength.

*)1?i^ intimate friend ; leader.

ENGLISH AND HEBREW INDEX.

A.

Abominable, DJ/JIJ (partcp.

Niph.). Accusation, n^JO^* ^^h 7*3 (prop- a subst., 8, d,

usually followed by Makkeph). Anger, C]J^.

Anoint, ^"Q^ (propr. to pour out).

T T ••

Assuredly (the Hebrew idiom is by the repetition of the verb in inf. absol.).

B.

Basket, 7D.

Be, been, HNI- See 522, e.

Bear (= give birth to) '77>.

-T

Bear, to, 11, ^T]'

Before, DHZD (before, of time) ;

"•^El/ (before the face). Best. See Good. Better. See Good, and 193 sqq. Bind, 1"):^.

Black, '■■)sm, in^.

T T

Bless, "^H. To bless oneself

(Hithp.). Blood, Ql.

T

Born. See to bear.

Boy, nb\ -1^;.

Boys, bn'^V

•T ;

Branch, "l^i^. Bread, Un?- Breadth, 2111. Brethren, DTTi^i-

Bring, J^'Q (to come; Hiph. cause to come). 2^1^ (Hiph. to bring again, back, return, restore).

Broken-hearted, to be. Niph. of 1211) (with or without nb).

- T

Brother, Hi^-

T

Burn, ^"y^ ; Ip'' (to burn slowly,

-T '-T

steadily). Bury, 12p.

But, '•S, "^i^.

228

English and Hebrew Index.

C.

Camel, 7Q3 (pi. n^bo-i).

T T '

Child, -r|?\

Children, Q>^1, DH'^^

Choose, ini, n")2.

- T TT

City, n^p.

• T

C/eaw, /o 6e or become, inZD'

*• T

Clean, adj. "linZD-

T

Clothes, ^y2.. Cloud, thick, 3^ (v).

T

Cluster, 2^V. ^''S^St. Collect, y:ip. Cowe (down), ■7n'».

— T

Command, XVi^ (Piel of ni2, obsol.). Commandment, TVil'O- Compassion, have, 7^n (7^).

~ T ~

Covenant, iT'13,« Corer, rTD3-

T T

Covet, ion-

- T

Cow, n")3 ; "i^ii:^ ox.

TT

Create, i^")2.

TT

Crown, 1J13 ; IT (an ornamental

border round the top of the altar).

Cry out, to, p^T (with )).

Cry out or aloud, to, ^^■lp (to

t't

call). Curse, Tl^^.

— T

Cwrsec? (partcp.) ■^^■^^^.

Cut, m:^.

— T

D.

Daughter, JHS,.

Dflry, DV. Days, D''D^

• T

Death, J-|1D (6, e).

VT

Deliver, 7^J (Hiph. to cause to

~ T

deliver). Desert, to, QtJ^.

~ T

Desolate, to make, ^T^T] (to

"■ T

destroy). Destroy, '^O^ (utterly) ; '^2i^ (in

- T - T

Hiph. = to cause-to-perish). Destruction, r^DHD-

T • ;

Devour, ^^i^.

- T

Diligent, 1MD-

• T

Do, n'w-

T T

Do good, to, 3tO^«

- T

Dog, nb3.

Door, rh^.-

Dream (verb and subst.), D^H-

— T

Dry (land), H^l^a^

T T —

Dry (dry-up), \i}y.

- T

Dust, *13^.

T T

Dwell, ^^l)*^ (to sit, dwell, abide) ;

— T

"j3^ (to rest in, inhabit, dwell with).

English and Hebrew Index.

229

E.

Each other (often translated by

* a man his fellow,' * a man his brother,' &c. From each other:

* a man from his brother,' &c.)

TTM^ by)r2 t^i^^

• T - ••

JEarth, Y-^^^. Eat, ^^^. ' Enemy, ^^ij^.

Evil, j;i, n;^-).

Eye, ]^y. Eyes, U^y^V-

Face, D^J3 {pl-) With b in the

• r

cnst. form, ';Eb, before (implying rest) ; also \:ep, before, from be- fore (implying removal). Faint, ^'^y (faint, tired).

••T

Faint, to be, S]^'' (to be fatigued,

tired). Faint, to make-, DDOj in Hiph.

—Vy^ (^<^ *i^^' weary). Fall, h^^ ; ^3J (to wither, decay).

— T - T

Fat, ±>n.

Father (irreg.) 3J«J.

Feed, ny-n.

Field, rViV'

V T

Fig, ^:^fn•

Fill, K^Q. Piel of male". Fine/, sp.

Flee, niH, '1"T^

— T — T

Flesh, 'S^'2..

T T

F/ocA:, ]^^i:.

Flood, ^inO.

Fly from, to, H"!!; l-TJ (=flee).

T T • \ T T

Form, ^0, 1\f'».

— T

Found, to, 1D'» ; 1^3 (to make

-T

firm, fix : e. g. the earth).

*

G.

Garden, p. Gardens, D''i3il- Garment, rhr:iV, "T:I1.

T ; • V V

Gather, y^p; D^3 (to gather

into a house, or place of se- curity).

Girl, rrhi.

Girls, jn\l^\

Give, 7J1J.

Give -forth, to, "|J1J (e. g. the

voice). Gladness, 7"'3' Glory, -TU3. Go, TjSl. Ki3l.

- T

Gocf^ I^.

Gooc?, :2iZ0-

Grape, 2.2V'

Grass, K^l; "l^^iH (dry grass).

V V • T

X

230 English and Hebrew Index.

Grave, "lip. Great, ^Hil, ^72|.

T T

Great, to he, 7T5. Grow, bl^-

I.

H.

Hand, T- Hand, right, ]''D''- Hand, left, ^\kt2V' Hands, U*T- Hate, J^J':i;.

"T

Head, '(I)'^'^. Hear, '^'Cr^.

- T

Heart, ^7.

Heavens (singular not

Height, HDIp-

Herb, nW; ^^t?^l. (a

tender grass). Hide, to, "13^- Holiness, '^'Ip (0, m). Honour, ll^^.

T

Honour, to, 1^3.

~ r

Honey, t^l1((),r). House, rS^"^'

How, -Tj^st, nrj.

How long, >jnD "1^- Hypocrite, tj^n.

used),

green.

In, prep. 3, prefixed. Sts 7 : e. g. to trample in (:=: to) the dust.

Increase, r\'2.1-

T T

Inhabitant, 3ti^"» (yasMbh, 5, 1). Iniquity, nj^, "{Ij;.

VT V T

Joy, r\nr2^, ]W':).

T : • T

K.

Keep, '^J2t.

- T

Kill, ^20p; tont* (to slay as a sacrifice) ; TMllD (to slaughter).

— T

Kindle, Till) (to kindle itself =

to be kindled). King, TT/Q. To be made a king,

Hoph. of "^rbD- Kings, DO^D-

• T ;

Kingdom, HD'^Ou).

r T I ~

Kingdoms, JIO/DD- T : -

Kiss, pll)}. Knee, "Jf-Q. iiCwee*, D''3"IIl.

Knife, rhD^r^ ; ]''|)'^ (a knife). Know, ^1^. Knowledge, Jipi.

L.

Lament, IDD-

-T

Land, Y"^^^.

' V T

Large, ^^Hil, bl^.

T T

Law, ^^')^D'

T

Leaf, n^y.

V T

Learn, ^t2?.

— T

Leave, to, 3T^.

TT

Life, □^'•n> pl- (the life, applied to God and man only.)

Like, 3 (as prefix ; before mono- syllables and barytones often 3. See rule).

Lion, n''"}Nt-

Little, ]ro*p-

La, ]r\. ^

Look, to, ^^^1; ^22 (Hiph. to

T T - T

look into, investigate).

Lord, r\^r\''-

T ;

Lord, my, ''J*7J^ (pi. my Lord,

T ~J

applied to God) ; '^^'li^ (sing.

my lord, applied to man). Lords, D'pVi^- Love, to, 3nj^.

- T

M.

Man, DT^^, t'i^, ^^J^^.

T T v;

Master, ^Sli^-

Men, U^l^^i^ (tbe men of a family).

Mercy, IDH.

Mix, TIpQ-

English and Hebrew Index. 231

Moc^, Y?)'? ; :i;^^ (to deride).

Money, C]D3-

MoMer, n^^.

Mount, Mountain, 'y\.

T

Mouth, n3. cnstr. '»3 (irreg.).

Multitude, "y") (= number, nu- merousness).

N. Naked, UTW-

T

Name, Qti^ (pi. ri\^^). Neighbour, ^H; D^^"1- Nest, ]p ; pi. kinnim, cells. Night, rh'^b; 2')}l (evening). No, >^^r]'»N^,cf. 2*57, end. No man, t^^^ ^•'J^. Number, to, 13D-

- T

o.

Oath, ^2^- To take an oath of

- T

a person, say : * to cnuse-to- swear (Hiph. of vy^) any one.' Observe, "lQt£|.

Offer, 3np. "

-'t

Offer-sacrifice, to, 113?-

- T

Old, pt (of a man). To be so

many years old, say : * was a son of so many years.'

Open, to, nris-

Or, iK.

Overthrow, to, l^'ll} (to destroy).

- T

Ox, ^')]i}', 1p3 (horned, tame

'tt

cattle).

x2

232

English and Hebrew Index.

P.

Part, \hr}. People, Q37.

Perish, "Tn^^•

— T

Pervert, to, r|7Q.

Place, DipD.

Place [a man] over, to, Hiph. of

Plant, to, ^^^.

— T

Plunder, to, bb'i), ttl.

- T -T

Prisoner, "I^DJ^* Proverb, ^]i)t^.

•r T

Prudence, TVyy}^-

T ; r

Purge, "133 (cover, expiate).

~ T

Quern, nS^D.

T ; ~

Q.

R.

Rain, Tipan. Recompense, to, u)'^- Red, DHJ^.

T

Require, 1^1'^.

~ T

Restore, 2W. Righteous, T)^"^}^. Righteous man, p'''^^;. River, inj.

Room (= chamber), "lin. i?M/er, 7ti^irj (partcp. from md- shal).

S.

Sack, Jirr.nps^.

Say, IDNt, 157. Scorn, Y^?- Scorner, Vj. Sea, D^

See, to, ^^^'^.

T T

Seed, ^-1T.

Seec?, ^0 bear; to seed seed, ^^t

— T

Seek (Jor), ^^-^rj,

- T

Separate, "713 .

-T

Serpent, iDJl^-

T T

Servant, "7^^^.

Shadow, 7;^. Sharp, "111 ; f. nirr. Shear, tti).

— T

Silver, 5]D3'

SHw, "lip.

Sm»7e, nSrr (Hiph. of to:).

Sow, "13, (irreg.) ; 13, (poetically)

Song, l^ti^.

Sow, ^0, ^ir.

-T

Stalk, r\2p'

v't

Statute, T))ri' Statutes, W^p^Tl- Steal, 3::i-

English and Hebrew Index.

233

Stone, ini^.

Stones, b^n^i•

Strip, lOli^D. To strip oneself,

— T

Hithp. Strong drink, "IJ^.

T "

Strong-hold, lJiJ2D-

T ; •

Sword, 2Dn-

T.

Take, n[)b', l^b (to conquer,

'-T ~ T

take by force). Take an oath. See Oath. Take captive, to, TIH^- Tell, 1:1 -10^^, lil (Piel of

-T - T •• •

dabhar). Temple, byH-

T ••

Thick cloud, 2V'

T

Thick clouds, □''H^.

Threshold, PjD. Together, ir\^.

Tongue, ]')tb. Town, -^^y. Trample, DD*1-

— T

Treacherous, 1^3,.

Treasure, ^DtpD, h'tJO, Iph- Treasure-house, "lj^''^^.

T

Tree, y;j;

Verity, DT^i^- Very, -Ti^^O.'

Fesse^, D^'?^ ; cnstr. ^bs (irreg.). Vineyard, D"l3'

L ^ •

Foice, 7p.

u.

Understanding, nJIHn' T ;

Unpunished, ''p^.

Unpunished, to be, HfJiJ^ (in Niph.).

Utterly. See To Destroy (utterly).

W.

^Fa5/i, ^0,^ 013, (Piel) to wash

- T

thoroughly. fFa*/e, io, nin, lllj^.

JFeaA;, to be, bbl-

- T

Weary, yy. Weary, to be, rj^V Weigh, bpy}' Weight, b\)m-

' T ; •

Who, ''Q.

T T

Wicked, y^") (a wicked man).

Trust, to, ntD3; P^^ (Hiph.) to Wickedness, HVp')' Vp'l' T.JJ'

- T - T I _^_

cause to believe, put faith in. Truth, r)f2i^'

Wind, nn.

x3

234

Winds, Jinn.

Wine, ]».

Wisdom, (IDDH-

Withdraw, P]Dh? (to bring home,

~ T

collect). To be withdrawn, taken away (Niph.). Woman, Hti^K-

English and Hebrew Index, Word, -)2"7.

T T

Write, 2D3.

Y.

Year, r\W, D^Q^

TT • T

Years, U^y^-

Abram, Q^^^ (the exalted father).

Abraham, DmHJ^ (the father of T T : -

a great multitude). Adam, QTJ*^ (earthy).

T T

Amorite, ''^bJ*^- Babel, ^23,-

V T

Babylon, 7^^.

V T

David, ll'H. EUe^er, "ll^^^i^.

PROPER NAMES.

Jerusalem, D/lt^TT'' Jew, n!)n\ " ' - Joab, 2i^V (God the father).

T

Joseph, C]Di'' (increasing).

Ishmael, bi^];r2^\

.. -p • • jM&aZ, b2V-

T

judah, niin^.

T ; *

Judea, I^H"*'

Wa^a^ 1:111.

Halleluiah, n'''^77n (praise ye

T ; ~

the Lord). ■f^«w»5 Dn (hot).

T

Hebrewess, rT'lIl^. ^ . . .

Hebrews, D^"13.y.

Jacob, UpV^ (a detainer).

Jehovah, nirC.

Jeremiah, ^rT'iDT' (exalted of God).

Midian, ]>X2-

Moa6, 3i^iD (of the Father).

T

iVoa^, nii (a comforter).

Rsbekah, np!l"l- 't: '

Solomon, HD/^' Zion, l^"}:.

APPENDIX.

A. Table ov Declensions.

Gesenius (who is followed by Huiwitz, Stuart, &c.) divides the Hebrew Nouns into 13 Declensions, or rather arranges them under 13 Paradigms, which we here add for reference, though it will not be necessary to enumerate all the variations and exceptions in so elementary a work as the present.

Observe —

a) That all feminines without a distinctive feminine ending are inflected like the masculine Paradigms, except that

they generally take their pi. in dth (Jli); 2DT1, sword, pi.

/li^^n, constr. JliUnn (khe'rebh, kh-'rabhoth, khar'-

bhoth). With the suffixes the stronger abbreviation then remains : see the Feminine Paradigms.

b) Grave suffixes are those which have always a strong accent or tone. Such are most suffixes of 2nd and 3rd pers. plural, whether joined to the singular, as D3, ]3, QH) XHy

but not □_, 'iQl, or to the plural, as QD^-, ]3_, DH^-*

in*'— > but not iD^_. The other suffixes are called light,

c) In the plural the light suffixes attach themselves, without exception, to the status ubsolutus; the heavy or grave suf- fixes, to the status constructus.

Arrangement of the Declensions. "l 1. Monosyllabic and dis- syllabic with immutable vowels. 2. Monosyllabic with mutable (t); and dissyllabic with a similar vowel for ultimate, and im- mutable vowel for penultimate. 3. Mutable (t ) or (.. ) for penul- timate : immutable vowel in ultimate. 4. Dissyllnbic with (tt) or (t" )• 5, Dissyllabic with mutable (..) for ultimate : mutable (t) for penultimate. 6. Segolates or dissyllabic nouns, with accent on penultimate. They are derived from an original monosyllabic form with Pathakh. 7. AH with mutable (•♦ ) for ultimate: and immutable vowel for penultimate. Also some monosyllabic nouns from 7^^7■ 8. All that double their final consonant by dagesh when augmented. 9- H- final. 10. H- final preceded by an

immutable vowel. 11. Jl- final preceded by mutable (t) or (..)•

12. Feminine nouns chiefly derived from the segolate forms 7^3,

7i^S' y^B- 13. Segolate nouns formed by the addition of the

feminine ending n_l. — To the examples in the Paradigms add :

misgg'reth {enclosure), igge'reth (Jetter), masco'reth (wages), 1

				Ti	^^f Declensions
	^650Z.	Constr.	Lz^rA^ 5Wjf,	Heavy suffix.
I. (horse) S.	D^D	D^D	••p^D	DDDID
P.	D^D^D	v^v	^P^D	DD-'p-ID
II. {eternity) S. P.	• T			uynby V •• T
III. (overseer) S.	"7^3	l^pD	n^ps)	°?1'P?
P.	°'1'P?	'TP?	^Tp?	Din;pD
	a. (word) S.	VI	-in-^	''I^'l	°?1^1
iv.^	P. b.	• T ;	nn^		DDna^
	(wise) S.	DDH	D^rr	V^^.	3???^!
	P.	D^pjn	'P?n		nybzri
	^ a. (old man) S.	P.l	]p_!	••JpT	DD?p_T
	P. b. (shoulder) S.	D^jpr	''P.pI	^:pj	QfJP!
^•i	^0?	cirii)
	P.	n^ari?	D'iBrii)
	c. (court) S.	"i;in	"li^rr	n;in	D^l^n
	P. I	Dnj^n	^1^'D	n^ri	°$'"?.?(7
	'^ a. (A:%) S. P. b. (book) S.	*9
VI.^	"I3D	"isip	nH)p	DD"]3p
	P.	Dn3D •T ;	nE)D	- T ;	o?''7?P
	c. (sanctuary) 'S.	^IP	mp		DD^lp V • "'t
	P.	• t't;	"•ir^ip	- t't;	29'^IR

of Nouns.

Absol.	Constr.	Light suff.	Heavy suffix.	Dual absol.	Meanimj.
sus susiia	sus suse	snsi susai	*u5'chem' su«echem'	joma'yim	{two days)
i^olam i?61amira	i^olam	i^olami i?61araai	i^olamchem' i>61'mechem'	wh'pbD nielka- klia'yim	{pair of tongs')
pakid p'kidiin	p'kid p'kide	p'kidi p'kidai	p'kid'chem' p'kidechem'	sh'bhu- i^ayim	(tioo weeks)
dabhar	d'bhar	d'bhari	d'bharchem'	' D^I)J3	{wings)
d'bharim	dibhre	d'bharai	dibhrechem'	c'na- phayim
khacham	khacham	kh^chami	kh*chamcliem'	'o^i^n	{hips)
kh*chamim	khachme	kh*chamai	khachmechem'	kh''- ' latsa'yim
zaken	z'kan	z'keni	z'kanchem'	Q'^l)	{thighs)
z'kenirn	zikne	z'kenai	ziknechem'	y're- chayim
catheph	cetheph
c'thepoth	cithphoth
khatser	khHsar	kh*tseri	kh*tsarchem'
khnserim	kh*tsre	kh*tserai	kh'tsrechem'		'
mS'lSch	mS'lech	malci	raalc'chem	^w^r^	{feet)
m'lachim	malche	m'lachai	malcechem'	rajr'- layim
sephSr	*eph£r	siphri	5iphr'chem'	°;^??	(double)
s'pharim	siphre	5'pharai	siphrechem'	ciph- layim
kodgsh	kodgsh	kodshi	kodsh'chem'		{loins)
k^dashiin	kodshe	k°dashai	kodshechem'	motli- iia'jim
Dial Coxstr. 3	' '•r;;3 (cSnp	hg). 2 >fT( (1	.h^ltse). 3 ';;'i(rag	- : 1	5 (mSthne) r

The Declensions

VI.

VII.

VIII,

r ^- .

(a youth) S.

I p-

{perpetuity)^. P.

f. (u/OrA:) S.

P.

g. {death) S.

P.

h. (o^iVe) S. P.

i. {fruit) S.

{gazelle) S.

P.

'a. {enemy) S. P.

b. (name) S. P.

a. (^5ea) S.

P.

b. (mother) S.

P.

c. (statute) S. P.

IX. (5eer) S.

P.

1 Absol.	Constr.	Light suff.
'^^l	^Vl	''l^l
	n^j	'!?^^
mj	TO,^	to:
	V4?	— T ;
b^	^^TD	'^^?r
	••-:iT
JT)0 V T	niD	^/liD
Q'JliO	^ri'iD	••jniQ
r)][	nn	'm
wm	'^7.	^lyi
nB	nD	>nB
'^^
• T ;
2'}^	^.'.^	u;»j^
wy'^	^?'^	'^!^
ni^	ut	W
nSDi)	r))Dp	^iy\r2t
	D!	^D^
Q'?'	'?2	'^!
DJj?	°^	'^^^
iii;:2hi	n^m	''iy\m
ph	'P^	^?n
D^l^n	^^n	^^rr
•^.l^	•^.l'^	\rri
D\irT	nn	nn

Heavy suffix.

••VT,r

uy'^h

4

of Nouns,

Absol.	Constr.	Light svff.	Heavy suffix.	Dual absol.	Meaning.
nai^ar Ti'i?arim	nai^ar na^*re	na)?»ri n'i7arai	nal^archem' na 'rechem'	na- i^4ayim	(pair of sandals)
ne'tsakh	netsakh	nitskhi	nitskh'chem'
n'tsakbim	nitskhe	n'tsakhai	nitskhechem'
pd'i^al	p5i?al	po^°li	po^-'l'chem'
p'i.*a]im	p "le	p':?alai	poi^^lechem'
ma'veth	moth	mothi	moth'chem'
mothim	mothe	mothai	mothechem'
zayith	zeth	zethi	zeth'chem'	'^'}'^	(.eyes)
zethim	zethe	zethai	zethechem'	l^enayim
p'ri	p'ri	piryi	pery'chem'		(cheeks)
ts'bi				Ikha-
ts'bhayim				ya'yim
oyebh Sy'bhim	oyebh oy'bhe	oy'bhi oy'bhai	oyibhchem' oy'bhechem'	mo-	(pair of scales)
shem	shem	sh'mi	shimchem'	z'nayim
shem6th	sh'moth	sh'mothai	sh'mothechem'
yam	yam	yammi	yamm'chem'	'D?i^	(nostrils)
yammim	yamme	yammai	yammechem'	appayim
em	em	immi	imm'chem'	*D]W	(teeth)
immotb	immoth	immothai	immothechem'	shin-
kbok	khok-	khukki	khokk'chem'	nayim
khukkim	khukke	khukkai	khiikkechem'
khozeh	khozeh	khozi	khoz'chgm'
khozim	khoze	khozai	khozechSm' i

Di'AL Con. ' >Vr'3 (nSJ^'le). 5

2 »3>3^ (rene). 3 ^j^nq (moz'nl). * >£« (Spp§). * ■•?•£? (shinnft).

Feminine

	{mare) S.	Absol.	Constr.	Light suffix.	Heavy suffix.
X.	HDID	nv^D	. • T	DDJip-ID
	P.	niDID	niDiD	•'O'lC'ID	DH-'jiiD^D
	a. (year) S.	mt^	n^'^	'^W	0^0^^
	P. b. {sleep) S.	• T	ni:?^	'Pi^lp	Dn^jri'):^
XI.j	n^i:^	r)2p	•^n^t	^^^^p
	P.	mt	mh	••rii:^	ur}'r\):p
	c. (righteous- S.	np-fi:	np-Ti:	••ripiii	DDJlpl^i
	ness)	'tt:	~ : •	• 't : •	V : : •
	P. f	nip"Ti:	Jiipii:	"jnipi^	DH^jn^p"!^
	^ a. (queen) S.	n^':?^	-^3^^	'^?^^	DDJl?^!?
	P. b. (reproach) S.	T :	noSp	"jHoSd	Dn^jno'^D
XII..	•^^ir^	JiD"}n
	P.		ri^sirr	^jn^sin	Dn"»ji^3nrr
	c. (waste) S.	'^?'1'7	— • T	• T • T	DDriinn
	P.		: T	~ : T	•• ; r
	a. (sprout) S.	J^P^")^	'Hp^''	''ripiv	D?^!??'
	P.	Jipji''	nipiii''	^TiipJi''	Dn^>i^p:i^
XIII.^	b.	} •	•	•	•
	(skull) S.	-nV^^.i)	• V	• ' T • V	■ : : T : \
	P.	: :\	: : \	• ■ • > :: \	V •• : : \

Nowis.

Absol.	Constr.	Light suffix. ,	Heavy svffix.	Dual absol.	Meaning.
susah su^oth	sUssiih siisoih.	«u«athi $u56tbai	5U5ath- cbem' t
shanab sbanim	sb'natb sb'notb	sb'natbi sb'notbai	sb'natb- cbem' t	. - -p . s'pba- tba'yim	(lips)
sbetiab sbenoth	sb'natb sb'notb	sb'natbi sb'notbai	sb'natb- cbem' t	tba yira	(corners)
ts'dakab ts'dakotb	tsidkatb tsidkotb	tsidkatbi tsidkotbai	tsidkatb- chem' t
raalcab m'lacbotb	malcatb malcbotb	raalcatbi malcbotbai	malcatb- chem' t	yarca- tha'yim	(sides)
kherpab kb^raphoth	kberpatb kber'pbotb	kberpatbi kber'pbo- tbai	kberpatb- cbem' t	• — T '; • rikma- tba'yim	{double embroi- dery)
kborbah kb-'rabbotb	kborbatb kbor'bbotb	kborbatbi kbor'bbo- tb ai	kborbatb- cbem' t		-
yon^'k^tb yon'kotb	yone'ketb yon'kotb	yonakti yon'kotbai	yonakt'- cbem' t	m'tsil-	(cymbal)
			ta'yim
gulgo'letb gulg'lotb	gulgoletb gulg'lotb	gulgoiti gulg'lotbai	gulgolt'- cbem' 1 t j	- : \: n'khusb- ta'yim	(double fetter)

Dual Constr. ' "TlDtD (siphth6).

'n^»s (pStnfi). » >ri3T (ySrc'the).

-*i- - 1 t-

+ The distinction between light and heavy suffixes ceases in the plural of feminine nouns. 7 Y

B. Table of Irregular Nouns.

Meaning. Father

Brother Sister

Man J

Woman

Maid

House

Son

Daughter

Day

Vessel

Lion

Kid

City

Water

Mouth

Head

1. Irreg. Noun.

T

T T

T • T T

DV ')?

nil

abh

akh

akhoth

ish

^nosh

ishshah

amah

bayith

ben

bath yom c'li

g'di

mayim peh

roash

Constr.

Plur.

abh, ''bhi abhoth

»khi

esheth

beth

ben-

Pi

akhim

"khayoth

ishim

"nashim

nashim

'raaholh

batim

banim

banoth yamim celim

'rayim g'dayim i^arim mayim

raashim

Constr. Plural.

With suffixes.

akhyoth

an she n'she amhoth

b'ne b'noth

y'mS

m6

abhi, abhiv, "bhichem, &c.

akhai, 'khi- chem, &c.

akhyothai. ishi, &c.

ishti, &c.

batechem, &c.

b'ni, bin- chem.

batti, &c.

celyi, ce- ly'cha.

pi ^ (my^), picha, piv, &c.

g

s

li:

*

* 73

#

a.

nJ

"3 led

??• Va

Q^

ns

<

£1

9»-;^

to

••J

*

"iS

«

13

*

<S

* 9-

H

a--

O

r^

JcS

n:

•-:<2

& 9:

.)e«J

J^

,X

9=

s

9-

)cd s

• ft

~r^

B

»n

h :<

*

lit •— < * • 12!

*

."iv

* ..>g

t 1

t y

* *- •

1—4 ia>

H

n-

•lo

nu-ilS

nJ

r^r^

nj

• ■»«l

m:

• )ri

. •«>»

.9

^

f}'.^

9=

leS J4

9« '^

9

9'

^

~r^

">^

►r^

V.

J^

;^

J^

9:

4->

•«f

■>.

H

■<)

«

* TS

* .

*

*

^-^

«

n.-

*o

^>» lOI

ni

"ioJ

Ml

10)

n-

1^

H

.a

f^>-2

9:

•^

r^

9:

.)"a

t-H

>i-^

^

9::3

J-^

)«5

9:

J4 4->

CO

JN

la

^— V

"».•

«0

*

*

*

*

*

*

F^

^

n-

"io

m

To;

(^"^

r<

zzi

Ht^

)ri

n.

iq>

> '

.9

;»^

9-

■v»

9> 5S

n:

•^

n:

q- ni 9=

• jee

b a

j^

^

9: :S

j^

9-

3rt

9'

J4

^■^

~r^

la

(N

* .

*

-*

♦ ^

*

»

*

IQ^

cd

fZL*'

^

fX'

Ti3

^^

n:«

<--<

ir^

3e3

n-

>«

fa

9«

9:

'-2

9i 5i

9.

**«* -M ^

9'

*2

q; 9:

4J

.

-T^

la

r^

"^

^

1-

!»>»

;2

1

p4

ci

• CO

•^

ui

«d

t>l

y2

D. General Paradigms

(The forms with asterisks

	KAL (1).	NIPHAL(2).	PIEL (?,).	PUAL (4).
Sing. 1 c. 2 (m. (/• 3 m. V- Plur. 1 c. 2 cm. V 3 e.	• : - 't phhp* T : -'t biQp* nb:Dp* UPhlDp* l^^^P ^S^P	r^^j^opy phnp: ^^Pf n^zopj* ▼ : : • ^:^bp^ o^^^P? l^^^Pi^	rhhp* T : - '• 'bi^p* T^bBp"" ■f . 1. ^:ibhip ^^bBp. ]phBp 6bp	'^rhhp rh^p* rh^p n'^rop* ^2bBp^ . nphBp
2. Inf. (constr.) Inf. (absol.)	bbp* ^izop* 't	^ropn* ••'t • 0^;) bbprj*	bBp_* bbp*	bBp^* bbp*
3. Imp, Sm^r. m. /. P/wr. m.	•>^[pp* ^bbp n^b'6p*	b^^^ri* >br?prT* 6bfn	b^p* 'b^pj" ^bbp_ n^bhp* T ; " '-	(none)
4,Imperf. (Fut.) Swi^. 1 c. 2 rm. . V- 3 rm. P/wr. I c. 2 1 m. i 3 rm.	bbpi^ bbpr\ >^zppji* %p]* bbpr\ biDp2 ^b^ph n^biipn "ft:pp^ n:b'6pr)*	bigpn 'bDpn* bigpn bigpji ^bi^pn m'^-^pri* t; "'t«	bBp_^, b^pri "hBpf}* ■ b^prs* ^b'Bpn r^phpn* m'^LD'pn* T- . .. 1- .	b^pn ^r'^P'O* bBj)]* bi^pp ^bBp^r\ nf?Bpjr\ ^'^bBp'. n^bhipr)*
5. ?TCP. act. bl^p* 10	't	bi^pr ■f>. .	bBp]2*	b^po* t'\:

of the Regular Verb.

serve as models for the rest.)
1. Perfect.	KAL(l).	NIPHAL(2).	PI EL (3).	PUAL (4).
Sing. 1 c.	ka/al'ti	nik/al'ti	ki//al'ti	ku//al'tt
2 Cm.	ka/al'ta	nik/al'ta	ki//al'ta	ku/Zal'ta
V-	ka/alt	nik/alt	ki//alt	ku//alt
3 I'm.	ka/al	nik/al	ki//el	kuttal
V-	ka/'lah	nikrlah	ki//'lah	kii//'lah
Plur. 1 c.	ka^al'nd	nik/al'nu	kiZ/al'iiu	ku//al'nu
2fm.	k^altgm'	nik/altem'	ki//altem'	kii//altem'
I/-	k'/alten'	nik/alten'	ki//alten'	ku//alt6ii'
3 c.	ka^'IA	nik/'ld	ki//'lu	ku//'lu
2, Inf. {constr.)	k'/61	hikka/el	ka//el	ku//al
Inf. {ahsol.)	kafol	fhikka/oH lnik/61 /	ka//6l	ku//ol
3. Imp. 5i«^. m.	kVol	hikka/el	ka//el
/.	kidt	hikka/»li	ka//'li
P/itr. m.	kidu	hikkaria	ka//'lu	(none)
/.	k'/5rnah	hikka/el'nah	kaZ/el'iiah
4. Impekf. (Fut.) 5twy. 1 c. 2rm.	ek/61 tik/ol	gkka/el tikka/el	•ka//el t'ka//el	"ku//al t'ku//al
tik/'li	tikka/'li	t'ka//'li	t'ku//'li
3 j m.	yik/51 .	yikka/el	y'ka//el	y'ku//al
I/-	tik/6l	tikka/el	/'ka//el	t'ku//al
P/ur. 1 e.	nik^ol	nikka/el	n*ka//el	n'ku//al
2 rm.	tik^'ia	tikka/'m	t'ka//'lu	t'ku//'lu
V	tik/ol'nah	tikka/ernah	t'ka//el'nah	t'ku//al'nah
3rm.	yik/'lu	yikka/'lu	y'ka//'lu	y'ku//'lii
L-^-	tik/ol'nah	tikka/el'iiah	fka/Zel'ttah	t'ku//al'nah
5.PARTCP. {"'	t. ko/el \ ss ka/ul/	nik/al	m'ka//el	m'ku^/al

11

Y 3

General Paradigms

1 P"i?P irTrpT	HIPHIL(5).	HOPHAL (6).	HITHPAEL (7).
Sing. 1 c. 2 (m. \f- 3rm. V- Plur. 1 c. 2 Cm. (/• 3 e.	•'jji^^pn pbhpr}* rhi^pT} 'b'^V^pT}* •i:^Dpn urh^pr}	^rhhpr\ r\bhpr\* T : - ': T '*?Dpn* n'propn* T : ': T ^:hhp7\ Dr^Sropn \pb]^pT\ •i^ippn	^j;ib|p_iin rbhpm* rh}^pm ' b^'pPT rhii>iphr\* j):i^^p_iirT \2rb\^pm ^b\^pm
2. Inf. (constr.) Inf. {absol.)		'^^pn* 'piDprr ...I. T	bi^pm*
3. Imp. -Siw^'. w.	^^^Dpn nj^^pn*	(none)	"^^p.rin* ^bmpm nphpm*
4. Imperf.(Fut.) Sing. 1 c. 2 rw. \f- 3 rm. v- P/ttr. 1 c. 2 rm. 1/. 3 cm.	^^rpph* y^prl ^b'hpn ri:hhpr\ ^bj?\>\ r\t>hpr\ T : •• ': -	tepn '^^pri •i^ippjn r}:bhpp\ ^^^PP> m^zopin* T : - ': T	b^^pnps 'hi^pnp* %Pjy* bv^;pr)r\ ^bii^pnn r\:hiipr\r\ ^bv^^Pjy*
5. Partcp. 12	y^pO*	b^^^pr::^* T ': T	b^^pm*

of the Regular	Verb.
1 PpRFFPT	HIPHIL (5).	HOPHAL (6).	HITHPAEL (7).
Sing. 1 c.	hik^al'ti	hok/al'ti	hithkaZ/al'ti
2 Cm.	hik^al'ta	hokial'ta	hithka/^al'ta
I/-	hikfalt	hokfalt	hithka^/alt
3 rw.	hik/il	hok/al	bithka^el
1/	hik^i'lah	hokriah	hithka^flah
Plur. 1 c.	hik/al'nu	hoktal'nu	hithkaZ/al'Dii
2 rm.	hik/altem'	hok/altem'	hithka/^altem'
I/-	hik/alten'	hok/alten'	hithkaWalten'
3 c.	hik/i'm	hokriu	hithka^'lu
2. Inf. {constr.)	hak/il	hok/al	hithka//el
Inf. (^absol.)	hak/el	hok^el
3. Imp. Sin^r. m.	hak^el		hithka^fel
/•	hak/i'li	(none)	hithka/fli
P/wr. w.	hak/i'Ki		hithka«'lu
/.	hakfel'nah		hithka/^el'nah
4. Imperf. (Fut.) Sing. 1 c. 2 rw.	akm takfil	ok^al toktal	ethka//el tithka/<el
!/•	takfi'li	tok/'li	tithka//'li
arm.	yak^il	yok/al	yithka^^el
V'	tak^il	ibktal	tithka/^el
P/wr. 1 c.	nakfil	nok/al	nithka//el
2 Cm.	tak^i'lu	tok^'lu	tithka^riu
V	tak/el'nah	tok/al'nah	tithka/^el'nah
3 Cm.	yak/i'lu	yok/'lu	yitbka/flii
V-	tak/el'nah	tok/al'nah	tithka^/el'nah
6. Partcp.	mak/il	mok/al	mithka/^el
13

Verb with First Guttural (^*).

E. Verbal

1. Perfect. Sing. 1 c.

2 ^m.

V-

3 (m.

v.

Plur. 1 c.

2 fm.

V-

3 c.

KAL.

2. Inf. {constr.) Inf. (absol.)

3. Imp. Sin^. m.

/. PZur. m.

/.

4.Imperf. (Fut.) Sing. 1 c. 2 fm.

3 rm.

Plur. 1 c.

2 ri».

1/

3 fm.

~ T

T : |T

Mr2V

"Tby *

NIPHAL.

1/.

"Tbr!

: - |-

Vap TCP. act. TDJ/ 14

• :--:iv -v:iv

•• T ••

: |T" T ; •• T ••

Tj TV:iV

HIPHIL. HOPHAL.

T ; - v; V

• •••:iv

nj79^n

• :-t:it

; ;- r:iT -t:it

T : 7:|T

V :-r:iT -t:it

(none)

TDVr2'

- t:it

- t:it

• : t:it

IDT* - t:it

- t:it

: t:it T : - t:it : i:iT

T t:it

Paradigms.	Verb with Second	Guttural	{y^
KAL.	NIPHAL.	PIEL.	PUAL.	HITHPAEL.
	••jitDnt^p	'-^Pl?	'•T^?*!^	''j°nD^::inn
r\^ht	p^^hm	i^D^n	r^D^ii	rionnnn
rs'mt	riioni:;:	ron:i	i^yxi	r^D"i3nn
ton::; - T	dto;i	"^?.?*	^1^*	■^Iinjnn*
T -:iT	nzon-^::*		T ;	nD"i2nn T :|r : •
^T^ht	^mrm	^JID^B	^:P1_3	•iJDn::inn
Di^ion'^	D.nroni:^:	Dr)D-i3	Dr^D"13	Dr^Dn:inn
]r\\f)m	V"::^zpni^:	l^?l?	]^??1^	iripn^on
•iiont^* ~:iT		•ID-IB	•iDnii
T	' T	xyji*	"^"innn*
nit*	zanii^n •• T •	1 ..T		"?Ii3nn*
	• -: 1 T • •ironii'n -:iT-	on:! :iT	(none)
	mtorri'n T : - T •	T : -V		T ; — T ; •
	•• T •
loni^r)*	^rOHOT*	o"inn	'2^:ir\	o-innn
	nr\m ^mtr\ -:iT •			^D"iann
	T : - T •	T ; - T ;	n^iD'^Di;^	T ; — T ; •
!)ion^;	-:iT-		^Dnii;
		T ; - T ;	mDnhil
" T 15	^1??'	^-y^r	■ijnajio*

Verb with Third	Guttural {g^).	Verbal
1. Perfect. Sing. 1 c.	KAL.	NIPHAL.	PIEL.
• ; ~ T	"TTi^tl}	''rriyp
2 1 m.	rsr6t T • ~ T	T ; - ; •	nHit
U	nn9^^*	rrf>ty	rsHit*
3 cm.	'n^;:^	' rhm	rht*'
if-	T : |T	Y- . • •	rrht
Plur. 1 c.	•ijjn^t:^	^T6t^	•ijn'^V
2 rm.	Dnn^^	unrbt^	urrbt
V-	]prht	'[irfrm	]rTht
3 c.		Tht^	Tht
2. Inf. {constr.)	ri^^*	rhwn*	rht*
Inf. {ahsol.)	— T	ribty	Tf?^*
3. Imp. Sin^. m.	rbt*	rhmr\*	rht*
/.	'^rht	'^rh'i'n	'>rht
P/ar. m.	Tht		Tht
/.	T : — ;	T : - T •	T . - —
4.Imperf. (Fut.) Sing. 1 c. 2 (m.	rhtr\	— T V rhwr\	rhtrs
{/•	^rbtn	^rb^D	'^rht'r\
3 rm.	rf)t^*	rhw''*	rht^*
rhth	nWrs	rhtF\
Plur. I e.	r6t:i	r6m	rht:i
2 rm. 1/			T\Tfitr\
3rm. 1/	Top] r^T6tr\* T : - : •	: |T* T : - T •	T ; - - ;
Paetcp. act. rt>tl 16	* pass. TVbt* — T		•

Paradigms.	Verb with	Third Guttural (g^).
PUAL.	HIPHIL.	HOPHAL.	HITHPAiiL.
	■•nn^V'?	' I ~ : T	''r\n%pn
			T ; ~ - ; ■
rri^^*	r^r6tr\*	r\r6tn*	nn^Dtn*
rbt	'rvhtr^*	nbtn	nbDtn*
	r\n'6tr\ T • ; •	nvhhn	nn":>r)tii
^Tii>t	^T6tT^	^^rf7tn	^:n^r\^r\
ursrht	ursrhtn	nr\nbi}n	nr\nbDtn
	\r\rht7}	]r}ribpn	]nnbr}tr\
: \			•in'pjn^^rT
n^^	vibtn	n'?ni:^n*
	nbtn*
		nbD^r}*
	•^n'^^tn		'nbDtn
(none)	^n'jbn	(none)	^nbnpn
			n:rt^r}tn*
rht^	n'btii	nbm	n'^/n^.s
rt^trs	n'b^n	rhi}r\	n'pr^i^D
^rb^r\	•^n^Strs	•'nbii^D	'•n'pr^^r^
rht'	n^y^tf^*	nbt'*	nbn^i}'*
vb^n	n'b':)Pi	nbtin	nbr\tr\
n-JW:	rt'bt^	nbt2	rtbr)^2
Tbtrs	in^'p'^jR	^nbtn : ; T '	^nbnpr}
nTiitn	n^n'^i^j"^	r\:r6tr)	T^2n^r\^r)
; \ :	m6pi	^nbt'<	^nbnp]
T : - \ :	rj'bpD"	T : - : T	ri2n^r\tr\*
17	T : T	nbr^pD*

		Verb Double	Ay	N, ;t^;; (d).	Verbal
		KAL.	NIPHAL.
1. JrERFECT.	•>		>
Sing.	1 c.	•'Jll^p	«	"/linp^
	2 (m.	T -	•
	V-	ni:ip	•	ni:ap:
	3 fwi. V.	np* T ~		2DJ* • - T nio:)* t - 1
Plur.	1 c.	^:iip	•	j):3')ip^
	2 Cm.	Dn^3D	•	DjHBP^
	V-	IJ;?"!^?		IJ^^^'^P?
	3 c.	nip		- T
2. Inf. (constr.)	nb*		npn*
Inf. {ahsol.)	T		niDH*
3. Imp. Sing. m.	::ib* *		3pn*
	/.	"3D*		'^^'r^*
Plur.	m.	^ID		••i2Dn
	/.	T V \		T V — •
4. Imperii. , Sing.	(FUT.) 1 c.	nbi^ r	^	abK	^^'^
	2 frn.	2Dr\' T		2Dn	npji
	U	••^DJ^*		UDn*	''nDn*
	3 rm.	3D;* nbji T		:]bri	np^» 2'DP\
Plur.	1 c.	T		2D2	np^
	2 rm.	T		^2Dr\	•inp;;)
	L/. 3 / m.	T V X :		^ — •
	[/.	T V ••. :	r\:2DD T ;	TV--
pARTCP. act. ^3'	D pass. y\'2'D T			2vr T T

18

Paradigms.	Verb Double	Ayin, ^^ (d).
HIPHIL.	HOPHAL.	POEL.	POAL.
"jpiiDn	••jiiBpin	>jjinniD	••ji^niD
;i^iDrT*	n^io^n*	r^ni^D	r^ni'iD
jii3Dn	ni^p^i	i^nniD	j;ianiD
•• ••	npin*	aniD*	::aiD*
T •• ••	T -	T ;	T ;
^iiinn	^:)i3p^n	maiD	^Ja2T
DriUDH	Drap-in	DjnnniD	nr)2y>v
irii^pn	ini^p^n	1{P^?''C)	]r)2y\D
^npn	•inpin	•iiin^D	•uniD
3Dn*
•• T	np^TT*	aniD	nnlD
•• T		nniD
• •• T	(none)	"^nniD	(none)
^non		j)nniD
j^y-^pn*		T ; ••
2Vii	np"l^*	nn^D^*	aniDi^
•• T	np^n	nniDJi	a:'.iDjp
••20^*	••^p^r)*	unior^	•^aa^Di^
aD"'MnD^)	2DV*(2D')	an'D^	2niD^
2Dri	2D')r)	nniDn	2:}Tn
3d: •• T	2m	^^''cij	naiD;)
" T	^2p^r)	Jinn'iDri	•laniDJi
TV* :	T1T2D^D T ;• -	T ; •* ;	T ; - ;
n^D^	?)npV	^nn'^D^	•inro^
TV* ;	TV-		T ; — ;
2m*	2V^D*	nniDo
19			z

Verb Pe Nun, ]3 (n).

Verbal

1. Perfect. Sing. 1 c.	KAL.	NIPHAL.	HIPHIL.	HOPHAL.
	'^^IP	"'-^^^i'7	• : -\
2 Cm.		riti;3J	rw!\'n	r^i^^^rr
V-		r\tii:	r\t^r\	rstrxn
3 (m.	t:?:i:)	mr	t'^^n*	t^T\*
Plur. 1 c.	(regular)	nm2 -f . .	T • •
2 rm.		ur\t:\^	DJni^^iin	Dri^i^nn
V-		\rsm'i	\^V^'^	]^??^|i7
3 c.		!)i^ii:	W}f}
2. Inf. (constr.)	* -nt^^*	t:^:i-3n	ur>iin*	mn*
Inf. (absol.)	T	T •	mr}*
3. Imp. Sin^. m.	^1*	••T •	^^n*	-
PZttr. wi.		• :iT'		(none)
/.	T ; -	T ; "T •	T ; •• -
4.Imperf. (Fut.) Sing, 1 c. 2 rm.				- \
U	''p^n		''^'l^n	• ; \
3 rw. P/Mr. 1 c.	^ir ^^r) t^2	••T* (regular)		mi
2 rm. 1/	T ; - •		T ; •• -	: \ T : - \
3 rm.	Wl\'^		^li^^l^	Wl^"^
V-	T ; - •	T •		T : - \
Partcp. act. ^3^	/JOSS. t^:\^ T	i:^>iiQ*

20

Paradigms. Verb Pe Aleph, K3 (a^).

KAL.

NIPIIAL.

HIPIIIL.

HOPHAL.

b2\^

^^^,^-

'?^:)^^^^

• :iv

-t:it

Like the Verb Pe Guttural^ in Paradigm, p. 14.

^j><*	'?^^^^	boj^n	b2Vi,T\
T	T •• " T ••	. _.,-	t:it
'?^?:^*
•''^DJ^
^^?^	ETC.	etc.	(none)
b2\^*
b'y^n
'b^^rs
^DJ^^*	b:^^'*	y^^^^*	^D^^^*
bD^^n		• :i-	-t:it
b2^^	ETC.	etc.	etc.
^b2'^r\
^'?D^^^
flc^ b^^< pass. S^^^	'^dk::	b'2ikr2	"^Di^D
21	r, O

Verb Pe Yod, >3, orig. 13 (y).	Verbal
1. Perfect.	KAL.	NIPHAL.
Sing. 1 c.			''I^2t)^
2fm. if-
3 Cm.	- T	2m*
if.	(regular)	T :
Plur. 1 c.			•1^1:^1:1
2 Cm.			nD2t'^:i
[f			1^^^'^
3 c.			^la^iij
2. Inf. {constr.)	Jin^^	% TD^	nt:^^n*
Inf. {ahsol.)	T
	y^
3. Imp. /Siw^'. w.	2^*	^ir	•• T •
/.	>nti^	^^T
P/wr. »i.	up	^^"1!	: IT*
/•			T : •• T •
4. Imperf. (FuT.) Sin^. 1 c. 2 rm.			2^^r\ •• T •
1/	'2tn	'>::^-T'r)	u:i^^n
3 i^m.	2t^*	^-i»*	a^-v*
\f	2tD	^i^n	*• T •
Plur. 1 e.	2t:	^T^	nt:^i:i
2 rm.	UtD		: |T«
1/.	nnra	n^t^'^n	n:in^^n
3 rw.	^2^^	wi''>
T ; - ••	T ; - •
Partcp. act. 2V	» pass. ^W"^		T
22

Paradigms.		Verb properly Pe Yod, ""H) (y)-
HIPHIL.	HOPHAL.	KAL.	HIPHIL.
••jpniE^in	''nn^in.		^p^2hr\
r^nti^in	;int:nn		r^nio^n
rsit'-^r^	r^n'^in		nnro^n
'yt\u*	:i^in*	- T	i"»^'»n*
T •	T ;	(regular)	X • ••
5iJ3^^n	^^2v^r\		^:)n:D^n
ur\ymn	om^in		Dr^n;?";!
]ri3t^in	innii^^rr		irin^^n
iTi^in	^n'^i^^n		^i>:p>rT
y^r[*	im*	ab^	n-^'-n*
Tii^'^n, 2t\n*		T	3D^n*
2tSr^*		^^\	np>n*
u^^^iii		>az3^	>a^io^n
^n^^in	(none)	!in!p>	u^^^n
n^^i^^	2;:^^^^	nto^s*	2^:o^^*
y^t^rs	n^^in	n^^j;i	n^ip^ji
••a^i^n	"•n'^^n	^nzD^n	U^ZO"'n
y^^'^*	it^'^*	a^o*"^*	3>j2i>*
a^'^in	^mr\	nzD^n	n-io^r^
n^'^ii	y^^^	nro^::	Tto^^
^a^^f^in	^ymr\	: 1'	U^D^jR
nn-^r)	r^^zh^rs	njniD-;n	njaio^n
ria^'^^v	r\2VV	^3ZD^''	^3v^2>,
T : ••	T ; -	T ; -	mntD^ri
ytSr:^*	32'1D*	«. ar?'* p- nvj;	2'ip'5
23	r	, Q

	Verb Ayin Vav, •^•; (v).	Verbal
	KAL.	NIPHAL.	HIPHIL.	HOPHAL.
1. Perfect. Sing. 1 c.	^^pii	•'jiiQ-ip^	•'jpiDprr	^r^ippn
2 fm. 1/		JiiDipy JiiD^pi		r^rppjiH
3 Cm.	Dp*	Dipy	D^n*	Dp-in*
V-	HDp* T 'T	HDipj*	HQ-'pn* T '• "	n^pin
Plur. 1 c.	^:ipp	^:iD!)pi	•liiDprr	^:ipp_')n
2 rm.	D^?i^	DjniQpj	DriiD'-pn	Dnpp^in
(/.	1^?P_	]jiiopj	iniDprr	]j;npp_')n
3 c.	Dp*	^Dip:	^D'^pn	•i^iDp^n
2. Inf. (constr.)	Dipn*	D^n*	Dpjin*
Inf. {absol.)	Dip*	Dipn*	Dpn, uvn*
3. Imp. Sin^. m.	D^*	Dipn*	Dpn*
P/wr. m.		^Dipn* ^D^pn	••Dpn* • '• T '• T	(none)
/.	O^pi} D^n	mopn T ; ' •	m^pn
4. Imperf. (FuT.) Sin^/. 1 c. * 2 rm.	Dipi^ Dipiji	U'pi} U'pr) '' T	Dp.\^ Dp_iri
I/. 3 rm.	^Dpjn*	^QipJi* Dipr D'pJ^I	D^p>*	'>Dp^B 6py* Dpj^B
Plur. 1 c. 2 rm. 1/.	U^2 ' T r^m)pr) T V ' :	DjpJ JlQipJJI	°'P^r ^D^pr\ mDpn T : '"T	Dp_^:
3 p?i.	r^m^pn*		n^Dpn* T : '"T	•'IDp-V •^??P3^
Partcp. act. Dp* 't 24	pass. D^p*	uspy	D''p!p*	DP^D* •T

Paradigms,		Verb	Ayin Yod,	'y (v).
PILEL.	PULAL.	KAL.	NIPHAL.
••npQip	^ripDip	'^^%	"•jni^^	"'O'l^^i?
jnpbip	jRrpQip	T • -	T	T ;
r^prjtp	JjlDOp	r\^3.	mj^3	m:i3J
DDip*	DDip	W	r^*	r^y
T ; ' i:)DQip	IJ-pDip	m2* T T	T •	T T
Driippp	Dr^DDip	^^^^	Djni:^:a	Drii:)'i3J
irippp	IJ^ppp	]jnjn	l^"!^'^	]jni:iaj
^t:pip	^DDip	T	^T3.	T
D9P	DDp	\'T	pan
		13*	pnrr
DDip		r?*	p2in
	(none)		as Dprr
nj^^ip T : •• '
09P^^	Dppi^	r??
DQipn	DDip;;^	• T
^DOipri	••pDpn	^T2r\
07 P'	Dpip^	• T	pn:
D.ppjl	DD'pj^	' • T	as Dp^
D.pipj	DDipi	^:^^
IDQipn	^apipi^	Iran • T
mpDp;;!		TV • ;
IDD^P^	^DJp'ip^	^:U^
		TV':
DDipp 25 "	ac/. ]n*	pass. p2*	1^^,^

	Verb Lamed	Aleph, X7 (a^).	Verbal
1. Perfect. Sing. 1 c.	KAL.	NIPHAL.	PIEL.
• T T	'0^???	^0^.^?
2 Cm.
3 fm.	T T	T ; •	i^'^D
v.	T : IT	T ; ; •	nmr2 T ; •
Plur. 1 c.	•'):l^<^o	^:j^^?dj	^:^i^D
2 r»i.	DJlS^iJO	Dni^:^^:	Dr)^i^^Q
\f-	l-D^^P	l-D^^fP^	l^^t!?
3 c.	: |T	M^^r22	^mD
2. Inf. {constr.)	i^2D	K«iDn	^5??
Inf. (absol.)	T	K^ip:	i^kp
3. Imp, /Sin^. »i.		■• T •	K^D
/.	^KiSD*	• : |T •	'^mn
P?Mr. m.	•IK^D		•iKi:D
/.	T V ;	T V T •	T V -
4.Imperf, (Fut.) Sing. 1 c. 2 fm.		" T •
V.	^mon	''N:iDn	•'j^^iQn
3 rm.			N^O^
U	K^JDri	K^iDn	N^*0J1
P^wr. 1 c.	i^^i^:	^^:iD:	^*^Db
2 cm.	•1^<^pr^	: |T •	•ixiJDri
If.	T V ; •	T V T •	T V - ;
3 rm.	•')^^i:Q'»	^K^iD**	^mr2'
V-	T V ; •	T V T •	r\:i^^Dr\*
Partcp, act. K2i	D i?a55. ^^^:iD	N^OJ	NiJQD
26			•

Paradigms.	Verb Lamed	Aleph, k'? (a^).
PUAL.	HIPHIL.	HOPHAL.	HITHPAEL.
• •• \	^jHi^^Qn	• •• : \	••riK^QinrT
T •• •..	T •• : •	T " : \	T .. - . .
Jl^<:iD	j^^*^^D^T	" ' \	/^^^iiDn^T
	^^'•iiQ^T	T ; \	KifOJin
T : \	T • : •	T : : \ *■ ■ \
nn^D	Dr)>ijfprr	DJiKii^Qn	Dn.^^iD/in
V •• \	^J^^<^Q^	... .. . ..	iriN-iiD/irT
: \	••)><>i{Qn	: ; \	•1^<irpr)^7
T \	N^i^prr	Niirjnrr
	N^^QH
	Kjiorr		^^'P'O'?
	>x^^on		^h^siDJirr
(none)	5)^^'•^p^	(none)	^^<i:l^r^^T
	T ■•■ ; -		T •••-;•
i^^'Oh^	N-^iiDh^	>^^iD^<	^^:i;^J^^^
	K-'^QP)		^SPO^
'mr2n	>K''^d;^	•'i^^^Dj-n	^i^:iDnr)
	^^?P!	T ; \	mDD^
T \ •	^<^:iD^^	ik:ir2r)	i^'^r^nn
T \ •	^^'':iDJ	N2:qj	ii'^DJl^
: \ :	!)K>*:pr^	: : \	^mr^nn
	T ■•■ : ~	T V ; \	T V - : •
W>*D>	^^i*:iO>	^^^^iQ^	ix^iDn*
		T v : \	m^<;^Dr^J;^*
T \ :	S^^pD		Sjforio

27

If, Verb Lamed He, X\7 (h).

Verbal

	KAL.	NIPHAL.	PIEL.
1. irERFECT. Sing. 1 c. 2 cm. I/- 3 fm. 1/ Plur. 1 c. 2 rm. V- 3 c.	• • T jrb^* T • T n'bi\ • T TT • T T	nnb:^^* T : ; •	T • • n'b^ nb^* T • T ; • ^TbSi
2. Inf. (constr.) Inf. (^absol.)	T	T •	n^b^* rib^
3. Imp. iSiw^. m. PZwr. m.	n^bi^* T V :	• T • T • T ••• T •	nbsi* 'bi\* ^b^ nyb-\* T V —
4.Imperf. (Fut.) Sing. 1 c. 2 rm. \f- 3 rm. P^wr. 1 c. 2 rm. L/. 3 rm..	mb:iD* T V ; •	nb;\r) VT • • T • V T • r^b^2 ^b'in T • mbiin T V T • T • mb^Pi* X V T •	V — : ^b'^r\ nTb:in nTb:\r\* TV- :
Partcp. flc^ H/il 28	T	nj?p^*	Hj^^a*

Paradigms.	Verb Lamed He, Tw 0^)-
PUAL.	HIPIIIL.	HOPHAL.	HITHPAEL.
	^ryh^T}	• •• ; T	''rh^ryn
ihr	rh^^*	lyhyr}*	rvb^DT}*
rshj^	ryh^^r^	n'bT\	lyb^DTi
rhr	rhT\*	rhT\*	rh^nn*
T ; \	T ; J •	T : : T	r\r\b^m*
^hni	•irbjn	^Tbyr\	•ir-Jii/in
uirb^	un'byn	uryhyn	Dn^-jjnn
y\}i\	]r\'h.^r\	]n'byr[	^r)\^.|ji.7
^b^ \	^b'yn		^b^m
iy\W	rxb:in*	rii'pjin*	r\t>^r\r\*
	rhT\	•• ; T	rt-'^/in*
	rbyn*		n>»iinn*
	'hT\*		'h^nn
(none)	^b'T\	(none)	^b^m
	T ■•■ « -		r^yb^nr^* TV-; •
n^:i?^	rh:\'A	n'?:^^	^'?iln^^
rhiiFs	rh^r\	rh:^r\	r\b:\nr\
4^n*	^h'^^n*	'h:^r\^	••^iinn*
rhT*	rf)T*	rhy*	rh^n^*
7X^:\r\	rhVrs	n'piih"	n'^iinh
n^jj	nS::i	n"?::)	n^iinj
\ :	iVjh	', T	^y^nji
nr^j;^	HT'p^n	nr'^jri	nr'^unn
	•i^r	• T	•i-'^jn^
T V \ ;	nr'pjn*	T V : T	r^Tb^n^\* TV-: •
rhyo* "\ : 29	n^^ip*	V ; T	'^!?^-0?*

CLASSICAL WORKS by the Rev. T. K. ARNOLD, M.A.

Arranged under Numbers for progressive Tuition.

5. <

LATIN. Edition

Henry's First Latin Book 9

("Second Latin Book, and Practical Grammar 5

, J First Verse Book 4

(second Part, with additional Exercises 1

rHistorias Antiquse Epitome 4

I A Second Verse Book (being Mr. Rapier's Introduction, care-

^ fully revised) 2

j Eclogae Ovidianae 7

[ Practical Introduction to Latin Prose Composition, Pt. 1 8

r Cornelius Nepos, with Critical Questions and Imitative Exer-

I cises 3

) ViRGILII iENEIS, lib. I.— VI 1

I Eclogae Horatianae. Pars I. (Carmina) 2

I Eclogas^ Horatianae. Pars II. (Sermones) 1

Practical Introduction to Latin Verse Composition 2

Selections from Cicero, with English Notes. Part I. (Orations : the Fourth against Verres ; the Orations against

Catiline, and for the PoetArchias) 1

Part II.

(Epistles, arranged in the order of time; with accounts of

I the Consuls, events of each year, &c.) 1

EcLOGjE Historic^; or. Selections from the Roman Histo- rians. Caesar, Sallust, Livy, Curtius, Tacitus , 1

''Practical Introduction to Latin Prose Composition, Pt. II 3

f Longer Latin Exercises, Parti 2

I Part II 1

( Grotefend's Materials for Translation into Latin 2

Ellisian Exercises (adapted to the Practical Introduction,

Part L) 1

GBEEK.

The First Greek Book 2

Practical Introduction to Greek Accidence 4

— — Greek Prose Composition 7

— Pt. II 1

Greek Construing 1

Greek Grammar for the higher forms 2

Elementary Greek Gramm.ar 1

The same, with an Account of the Greek Dialects 1

The Dialects separately 1

The Olynthiac Orations of Demosthenes, with copious Notes

and Grammatical References 1

The Oration of Demosthenes, on the Crown, on the same plan... 1

HoMERi Ili.vs, lib. I. — IV.. with Critical Introduction and Notes I

The Ajax of Sophocles, with English Notes 1

The Pliiloctetes of Sophocles, with English Notes ,. 1

HISTORY AND ANTIQUITIES.

Handbook of Roman Antiquities...") ,tj ^

Handbook of Grecian Antiquities j v^oJ^senj Handbook of Ancient Geography and History ^ Handbook of Mediaeval Geography and History [ (PiiTz) Handbook of Modern Geography and History j

Handbook of Greek Synonymes (Pillon)

The Athenian Stage; a Handbook for the Student

Copious and Critical English-Latin Lexicon, founded on the German Latin Dictionary of Georges [by the Rev.

T. K. Arnold and the Rev. J. E. Riddle] 2

Classical Examination Papers 1

English Grammar for Classical Schools 4

The First German Book 2

Key to the Al>ove ]

German Reading Book 1

Handbook of German Vocabulary I

The First French Book 2

Key to the Above [by M. DelilleJ 1

Handbook of French Vocabulary 1

A First Classical Atlas 1

Price
3s. Orf
4 0
2 0
1 0
4 0
3 6
2 6
6 6 .
4 0
12 0
5 0
5 0
5 6 4 0

4 0

8 0

4 0

4 0

7 6

5 5 6 6 6 10 f) 6 1

3 0

4 6 7 6 3 0 3 0

3 3 6 4 5 6 4

RIVINGTONS, ST. PAUL'S CHURCH YARD, & WATERLOO PLACE.

PJ4566 .A75

The first Hebrew book.

Princeton Theological Seminary-Speer Library

1 1012 00076 4649

mm ifln IMI	Hi	^^^^m	»
P@	^H		i
	^^^^^	Ea
	^H		11

"iijil: ,.„

t !

iliiMnii|(!i!